the three first those which they call the Extremities neither doe they teach to what rancke of the three prime parts each extremitie should be reduced From whence many difficulties happen in reading the writings of Anatomists for shunning whereof we will prosecute as wee have said that distinction of mans body which we have touched before Wherefore as wee said before mans body is devided into three principall and generall parts Animall Vitall and Naturall By the Animall parts wee understand not onely the parts pertaining to the head which are bounded with the crowne of the head the coller-bones and the first Vertebra of the breast but also the extremities because they are organs and instruments of the motive facultie ãâ¦ã seemes to have confirmed the same where hee writes Those who have a thicke and great head have also great bones nerves and limbs And in another place hâââaith those who have great heads and when they stoope shew a long necke such have all their parts large but chiefly the animal Not for that Hippocrates would therefore have the head the beginning and cause of the magnitude and greatnesse of the bones and the rest of the members but that he might shew the equallity and private-âare or government of nature being most just and exact in the fabricke of mans body as if she hath well framed the head it should not be unlike that shee idlely or careleââ¦y neglected the other parts which are lesse seene I thought good to dilate this passage least any might abuse that authoritie of Hippocrates and gather from thence that not onely the bones membranes ligaments gristles and all the other animall parts but also the veines and arteries depend on the head as the originall But if any observe this our distinction of the parts of the body he will understand wee have a farre other meaning By the vitall parts we understand onely the heart arteries lungs winde-pipe and other particles annexed to these But by the naturall wee would have all those parts understood which are contained in the whole compasse of the Peritonaeum or Rim of the body and the processes of the Erythroides the second coate of the Testicles For as much as belongs to all the other parts which we call containing they must be reckoned in the number of the animall which notwithstanding we must thus devide into principall sensitive and motive and againe each of these in the manner following For first the principall is devided into the imaginative which is the first and upper part of the braine with its two ventricles and other annexed particles into the reasoning which is a part of the braine lying under the former and as it were the toppe thereof with its third ventricle Into the memorative which is the cerebellâ⦠or afterbraine with a ventricle hollowed in its substance Secondly the sensitive is parted into the visive which is in the eyes the auditive in the eares the smelling in the nose the tasting in the tongue and palate the tactive or touching which is in the body but most exquisite in the skinne which invests the palmes of the hands Thirdly the motive is devided into the progressive which intimates the legges and the comprehensive which intimates the hands Lastly into simply motive which are three parts called bellies for the greatest part terminating and containing for the vitall the instrument of the faculty of the heart and dilatation of the arteries are the direct or streight fibers but of the constrictive the transverse but the three kinds of fibers together of the pulsificke or if you please you may devide them into parts serving for respiration as are the lungs and weazon and parts serving for vitall motion as are the heart and arteries furnished with these fibers which we formerly mentioned The devision of the naturall parts remaines which is into the nourishing auctive and generative which againe are distributed into attractive universall and particular retentive concoctive distributive assimulative expulsive The attractive as the gullet and upper orifice of the ventricule the retentive as the Pylorus or lower passage of the stomacke the concoctive as the body of the ventricle or its inner coate the distributive as the three small guts the expulsive as the three great guts we may say the same of the liver for that drawes by the mesaraicke and gate veines retaines by the narrow orifices of the veines dispersed through the substance thereof it concocts by its proper flesh distributes by the hollow veine expels by the spleene bladder of the gall and kidneies We also see the parts in the testicles devided into as many functions for they draw by the preparing vessels retaine by the varieous crooked passages in the same vessels they concoct the seed by the power of their proper substance and facultie they distribute by the ejaculatorie at the glandules called Prostata and the hornes of the wombe supplying the place of prostates Lastly they expell or cast forth by the prostates hornes and adjoyning parts For as much as belongs to the particular attraction retention concoction distribution assimulation of each part that depends of the particular temper and as they terme it occulte propertie of each similar and simple part Neither doe these particular actions differ from the universall but that the generall are performed by the assistance of the three sorts of fibers but the speciall by the severall occult propertie of their flesh arising from their temperature which we may call a specificke propertie Now in the composition of mans body nature principally aimes at three things The first is to create parts necessary for life as are the heart braine and liver The second to bring forth other for the better and more commodious living as the eyes nose eares armes and hands The third is for the propagation and renewing the species or kind as the privie parts testicles and wombe And this is my opinion of the true distinction of mans body furnished with so many parts for the performance of so many faculties which you if you please may approve of and follow If not you may follow the common and vulgar which is into three bellies or capacities the upper middle lower that is the head breast and lower belly and the limbs or joints In which by the head we doe not understand all the Animall parts but onely those which are from the crowne of the head to the first vertebra of the necke or to the first of the backe if according to the opinion of Galen Lib. de ossibus where he makes mention of Enarthrosis and Arthrodia we reckon the necke amongst the parts of the head By the brest whatsoever is contained from the coller bones to the ends of the true and bastard or short ribbs and the midriffe By the lower belly the rest of the trunke of the body from the ends of the ribbs to the share-bones by the limbs we understand the armes and legges We will follow
truly we use this word Cubit in the first signification Wherfore we say the cubite is composed of two bones the one of which we call the Radius or Wand or the lesser Focile of the Arme the other we properly call the Cubit or Ell. These two bones sticke together at their ends being firmely bound together by strong Ligaments but the middle parts of them are a prety way distant from each other chiefly towards their lower ends for the better scituation and passage of the muscles and vessells from the inner side to the exteriour as shall be shewed in fit place The wand hath two Epiphyses or Appendices the one at the upper end the other at the lower The upper is round hollowed on the surface like a bason it receives the fore processe of the bone of the arme bound to the same by strong ligaments descending as wel from that processe of the arme as the Olecranon into the circumjacent parts of this appendix of the VVand This connexion is made for this use that we may turne our hand upwards and down-wards by the Cubit turned and twined about this processe But the lower appendix of this wand is hollowed on the inside that so it might more commodiously receive the bones of the wrest but gibbous without that it might be safer now this wand is softer and thicker at the lower end but lesser and harder above where on the inside it hath a swelling out wherby to receive the muscle Biceps besides on the outside of the mlddle therof it is somewhat gibbous and round so to become more safe from the injuries of externall bodies but it is hollowed or bended on the inside for the better taking or holding any thing in the hand But that side which lyes next to the Ell is flatted for the fitter originall and seat of the muscles lastly it is seated upon the bone of the Cubit or Ell just against the thumb But the Ell or bone of the cubit properly particularly so called hath in like maner two appendices the one above the other beneath The upper which also is the greater is fitted to the Orbe of the arme in which it goes to again for the extensioÌ bending of the arme no otherwise than a rope runs in a pulley but that it turnes not absolutly perfectly round which is caused by the two processes of unequal bignesse the which are therfore staied in the holes or cavities of the bone of the arme the greater processe which we called Olecranon is letted by the exterior hole that so the extension of the arme can be no further but the lesser processe by the inner hole makes the bending therof the lesse perfect The Composure of these bones is by Ginglymos it is strengthened not onely by common Ligaments comming from the muscles which move the bones themselves but also by proper Ligaments descending from the processes of the arme the lips of the holes and cavities standing about the Appendix of the Cubit The other lower and lesser appendix is in some sort hollow on the inside for the fitter receiving the bones of the wrest but the outside is round ends in a point whence it is called by the Greeks Styloides But now this Ell contrary in this to the wand is thicker towards the arme but slenderer towards the wrest And besides in the thicker part therof it is hollowed or bended towards the inside in the same place is gibbous or bunching forth on the out side but it is round straight unlesse on that side which lyes next the wand for the rest it is hollow full of marrow like the wand The site of the Radius or wand is oblique but that of the Cubit or Ell is right that the arme might be the better more easily moved because the motion by which the arme is exteÌded beÌded is according to a right line but that by which the inside of the hand is turned upwards downwards is performed obliquely circularly Wherfore it was expedient that the wand should be oblique the cubit streight for the cubit-bone is appointed for to extend bend the arme but the wand to performe the wheeling turning about therof this is the cause that it was fitting ther should be a different connexion of these bones with the arme These things were fitting to be spoken concerning the nature of these bones that in the cure of fractures we may worke the more safely happily taking indication from that which is agreeablâ to nature wherfore now it remaines that we come to the description of the muscles which are seated in the arme the cubit-bone or Ell. These are 4 in number two extending it two bending it The first of the Benders is called Biceps by reason of its two heads the one wherof descends from the Coracoides that other from the lip of the cavity of the shoulder-blade by the fissure or clift of the head of the bone of the arme These two heads under the necke of this arme becoming fleshy are firmely united at the belly midst of the arme thus united are at length implanted by a strong tendon to the inner protuberation of the wand The other is called the Brachiaus by reason of the straite coherence therof with the bone of the arme this fastened under the Biceps descends obliquely on the backe and upper part of the bone of the arme into the top of the wand and the inner side of the Ell. But the first of the extenders is called the longus or Long muscle this descends from the lower Rib of the shoulder and cleaving to the bone of the Arme goes thither fastened and as it were alwayes most straitly joyned with his fellow muscle specially nere the Cubite where you shall presently heare The other termed the Brevis or short Muscle being the companion of the long descends on the hinde part of the necke of the bone of the Arme as it were growing to and lying under the former long muscle so that making one common broad Tendon outwardly ââeshy inwardly nervous they are inserted into the Olecranum so by mutuall assistance to extend the Cubite CHAP. XXVII The Description of the Bones of the Wrest Afterwrest and fingers WE said before that the Hand taken more particularly and properly is divided into the Wrest afterwrest fingers that the hand in this signification is bounded by the ends of the bones of the cubit and fingers All the parts of the wrest which it hath coÌmon with the afterwrest have bin already also plentifully explaned this only remaines to be noted that the skin aswell of the hands as of the feete is of a middle nature betweene pure flesh and pure skin no otherwise than that which covers the forehead but that this which covers the palmes of the hands soles of the feet is unmoveable But it is most thicke
The head is mooved by 14. Muscles The 8. Muscles of the necke The Muscles of the chest 18. The 8. muscles of the lower belly The 6. or 8. of the loines The two Cremasters of the Testicles The three of the fundament The muscles of the Arme ãâã generall 32. The muscles of the legge in generall 50. What an Impostume vulgarly so called is The materiall causes of Impostumes or unnaturall tumors After what manner tumours against nature are chiefely made Three causes of heat Foure causes of paine Two causes of weaknesse Two causes of congestion The principall signes of tumors are drawne from the essence of the part Lib. 2. ad Glaue 13. method The proper signes of a sanguine tumor of a plegmaticke of a melancholick of a cholerick The knowledge of tumors by their motion and exacerbation Lib. 2. Epidem The beginning of an impostume The encrease The State The signes of a tumor to be terminated by resolution The signes of suppuration The signes and causes of a tumor terminated in a Scyrrhus The signes of a Gangrene at hand Of disappearance of a tumor and the signes thereof Cold tumors require a longer cure Tumors made of matter not naturall are more difficultly cured Hippo. Aph. 8. sect 6. What must be considered in undertaking the cure of tumors What we must understand by the nature of the part What we must understand by the faculty of the part What we must consider in performing the cure What things disswade us from using repercussives What tumors may be reduced to a Phlegmon Which to an Erysipelas Which to an Oëdema Which to a Scyrrhus What a true Phlegmon is A Phlegmon one thing and a Phlegmonous tumor another Gal. lib. de tumoribus 2. ad Glanc Hippoc. lib. de vâln cap. Gal. lib. de tumor praeier naturam The cause of a beating paine in a Phlegmon Comm. ad Aph. 21. sect 7. Another kinde of Pulsation in a phlegmon The primitive causes of a Plegmon The Antecedent and conjunct The signes of a Phlegmon Gal. l. de Tum What kinde of diet must be prescribed in a Plegmon How to divert the defluxion of humors The paine must be asswaged When we must use repercussives What locall medicines we must use in the encrease What in the state What in the declination The correction of the accidents The discommodities of paine Medicines aswaging paine Narcoticke medicineâ The signes of a Phlegmon turning to an Abscesse Lib. ãâã ad Glauâ Cap. 7. Suppurative medicines The signes of pâ⦠or matter Hip. lib. de Fistulâ What the cure must be after the opening of the Abscesse Detersive Medicines Vngâentum de Appiâ The âeaver of a Phlegmon What a Feaver is What an Ephemera or Diarye is The causes thereof Aphorism 55. lib. 4. The signes of a Diarie Why in a Diarye the vrines like to these in health The unputride Synochus The cure of a Diary feaver The use of wine in a Diarye How a putride Synochus is caused Phlebotomy necessary in a putride Sâââchuâ What benefit we may reape by drawing blood even to fainting Why we must give a clyster presently after bloods letting What Syrupes profitable in this case Why a slender Diet must be used after letting much blood When drinking of water is to be permitted in a putride Synochus The definition of an Erysipelas Gal. Cap. 2. lib. 14 Meth. med 2. ad Glau. Two kinds of Erysipelas Gal. lib. 2. ad Glaue Hip. Apho. 79 Sect. 7. Aph. 25 Sect. 6. Aph. 43. Sect. 3. Gal ãâã Method 4 Things to be performed in curing an Erysipelas In what Erysipelas it is convenient to let blood in what not What topicke medicines are fit to be used it the beginning of an Erysipelas What caution must be had in the use of narcoticke medicines Resolving and strengthening medicines What a Herpes is what be the kinds there of Gal. 2. ad Glauronem What the Herpes miltaris is What the exedens Three intentions in curing Herpes A rule for healing ulcers conjoined with tumors The force of Vnguentum enulatum cum Mrcurââ Medicines fit for restraining eating and spreading ulcers A vulgar description of an intermitting Tertian feaver The causes of Tertian feavers The signes of an intermitting Tertian The Symptomes Why Tertians have an absolute cessation of the feaver at the end of each fit The Diet of such as have a Tertian When such as have a certain may use wine The time of feeding the patient When to purge the patient When the time is fit to use a Bath What kinds of evacuations ãâã most fit in a Tertian Sudorifickâ When blood must be lot Aphor. 29. Sect. 2. Gal. lib. de tumo praeter naturs What an Oedema is The differentces of Oedemas By how many waies Phlegme becomes not naturall The Causes The signes The prognosticks How Oedemas are terminated The intentions of curing Oedema's The diet Exercise What to be observed in the use of venery 6. Epid. sect 5â sen 23. Lib. 2. ad Glaus cap. 3. A rovvler What caution to be had in application of Emplaisters In what places flatulencies may be gathered In what flatulent tumors differ from a true Oedema The causes of flatulent Tumors The signes of such Tumors Diet. Thingâ strengthning the parts Medicines evacuating the conjunct matter Galensâomentation âomentation Corrobotating medicines The signes of a waterââh Tumor Why a wateterish tumor must be opened with an instrument A History In what an Atheroma Steatoma and Meliceris differ Of Chirurgâry to be used to these Tumors What the cause may be that vvee sometimes sinde infectae in these Tumors What the Testudo or Talparia is What the Nata is What a Gandula What Nodus What a Glanglion is The causes Signes Their cure at the beginning Plates of lead rubbed with Quick-silver A resolving plaister Things to wast or consume the bag The manner to take away Wenâ A History What Wens to be cured by ligature Which dangerous to cure A History The matter of a Wen is sometimes taken for a Cancer Another History How you may know a Wen from a Cancer What a Ganglion properly so called is The causes What Ganglia may not be cured with iron Instruments What the Scrophulae or Kings-Evill is Their materiall cause How they differ from other glanduleus tumors Their cure by diet Emollient and resolving medicines Seppuratives A note to be observed in opening Scropulous tumors Naturall heats the cause of suppuration The Chirurgicall manner of cuting Scrophulae How an intermitting Quotidian haopens upon oedematous tumors The cause of a Quotidian âea The Signes How children come to be subject to Quotidian feavers How phlegmaticke humors happen to be generated by hot and dry meats The Symptomes of quptidians The manner of the pulse and heate in a Quotidian Criticall sweats The urine Why Quodidiansare oft times long In to what diseases a quartaine usually changes How to distinguish a quotidian from a double tertian Diet. When the use of spiced and salted
the grinding muscles because they move the skin as a mill to grinde asunder the meale From their forme or figure because some are like Mice other like Lizards which have their Leggs cut off for that they imitate in their belly body or tendon the belly or taile of such creatures from whence the names of Musculus and Lacertus are derived Such are those which bend the wrest and which are fastened to the bone of the Leg which extend the foot Others are triangular as that which lifts up the arme called Epomis or Deltoides and that which drawes the arme to the breast called the Pectorall muscle Others quadrangular as the Rhomboides or Lozenge muscle of the shoulder blade and the two hindesum-muscles serving for respiration and two of the wrests which turne down the hand Others consist of more than foure angles as the oblique descending and that muscle with joynes it selfe to it from the shoulder blade others are round and broad as the Midriffe others circular as the Sphincter muscle of the fundament and bladder others are of a pyramidall figure as the seaventh muscle of the eye which compasses the opticke nerve in beasts but not in men Others have a semicirculer forme as that which shuts up the eye feated at the lesser corner thereof Others resemble a Monks cowle or hood as the Trapezius of the shoulder blade Besides others at their first originall are narrow but broad at their insertion as the Saw-muscle of the shoulder and the transverse of the Epigastrium others are quire contrary as the three Muscles of the Hippe others keepe an equall breadth or bignesse in all places as the intercostall muscles and these of the wrest others are long and slender as the long muscle of the thigh others are long and broad as the oblique descending muscles of the Epigastrium others are directly contrary as the Intercostall which are very narrow From their perforations for some are perforated as the Midriffe which hath three holes as also the oblique and transverse of the Epigastrium that so they may give passage forth to the preparing spermaticke vessells and to the ejaculatory vessells the Coate Erythroides associating and strengthening them others are not perforated From their magnitude for some are most large as the two muscles of the Hipp others very small as the eight small muscles of the necke and the proper muscles of the Throtle and the wormy muscles Others are of an indifferent magnitude From their colour for some are white and red as the Temporall muscles which have Tendons comming from the midst of their belly others are livide as the three greater muscles of the calfe of the leg which colour they have by the admixtion of the white or tendinous nervy coate with the red flesh for this coat by its thicknesse darkning the colour of the flesh so that it cannot shew its rednesse and fresh colour makes it seeme of that livide colour From their scituation for some are superficiary as those which appeare under the skin and fat others deepe in and hid as the smooth and foure twin muscles some are stretched out and as it were spred over in a streight and plaine passage as the muscles of the thigh which move the legge except the Ham-muscle others oblique as those of the Epigastrium other some transverse as the transverse of the Epigastrium where you must observe that although all the fibers of the muscles are direct yet we call them oblique and transverse by comparing them to the right muscles as which by the concourse of the fibers make a streight or acute angle From the sorts of fibers for some have one kinde of fiber yet the greatest part enjoy two sorts running so up and downe that they either are crossed like the letter X as happens in the pectorall and grinding muscles or else doe not concurre as in the Trapezij Others have three sorts of fibers as the broad muscle of the face From their coherence and connexion or their texture of nervous fibers for some have fibers somewhat more distant and remote immediately at their originall than in other places as you may see in the muscles of the buttocks Others in their midst and belly which by reason thereof in such muscles is more big or tumid their head and taile being slender as happens in most of the muscles of the arme and leg in which the dense masse of flesh interwoven with fibers disioynes the fibers in so great a distance in other some the fibers are more distant in the taile as in the greater Saw-muscle arising from the bottome of the shoulder blade in others they are equally distant through the whole muscle as in the muscles of the wrest and betweene the ribbs From their head for in some it is fleshy interwoven with few fibers as in the muscles of the buttocks in others it is wholy nervous as in the most-broadmuscle common to the arme and shoulder blade and in the three muscles of the thigh proceeding from the tuberosity of the hucle bone in some it is nervous and fleshy as in the internall and externall muscle of the arme Besides some have one head others two as the bender of the elbow and the externall of the legge others three as the Threeheaded muscle of the thigh But wee must note that the word nerve or sinew is here taken in a large signification for a ligament nerve and tendon as Galen saith Lib de Ossibus and moreover we must observe that the head of a muscle is one while above another while below otherwhiles in the midst as in the Midriffe as you may know by the insertion of the Nerve because it enters the muscle by its head From their belly also there be some differences of muscles taken for some have their belly immediately at their beginning as the muscles of the buttocks others at their insertion as the Midriffe Others just at their head as those which put forth the Calfe of the leg in others it is somewhat further off as in those which draw backe the arme and which bend the legge in others the belly extends even from the head to the taile as in the intercostall muscles and these of the wrest in others it is produced even to their insertion as in those of the palmes of the hands and soles of the feet some have a double belly distinguished by a nervous substance as those which open the mouth and those which arise from the roote of the lower processe of the shoulder blade Moreover the differences of muscels are drawne also from the Tendons for some have none at least which are manifest as the muscles of the lips and the sphincter muscles the intercostall and those of the wrest others have them in part and want them in part as the Midriffe for the Midriffe wants a Tendon at the ends of the shorter ribs but hath two at the first Vertebra of the Loines
Σ the first muscle of the backe or the Square muscle Φ the 2. muscle of thebacke or the Longest whose originall is at L and his tendons at the Vertebrae at M M. Ω the fourth muscle of the backe called Spinatus δ the backe of the shoulder-blade flaied The seventh Figure of the muscles shewing some muscles of the head and Chest the Trapezius or Table-muscle being taken away as also of the blade and arme A The prominent part of the fourth muscle of the chest called Serratus posticus superior Î the first muscle of the head called splenius E E the insertion of the second muscle of the head called Complexus I the coller bone bared M the backpart of the second muscle of the arme called Deltois ζH His backward originall θ His implantation into the arme N N the fourth muscle of the arme called Latissimus s μ His originall from the spines of the rack-bones and from the holy bone ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the connexiou of this muscle with the hanch-bone which is led in the inside from μ to ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the place where it lieth upon the lower angle of the Basis of the shoulder-blade O the 4. muscle of the arme called Rotundus maior e some muscles of the backe doe here offer themselves P the fift muscle of the arme called Superscapularis Inferior Q the sixt muscle of the arme called Superscapularis Superior S the beginning of the third muscle of the arme called Latissimus V the third muscle of the blade called Rhomboides ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã X His originall from the spines of the rackebones ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã His insertion into the basis of the shoulder-blade Ï the fourth muscle of the blade called Levator * A part of the oblique descendent muscle of the Abdomen The eight Figure of the muscles especially of those of the Chest Head and Shoulder-blade the Trapezius Latissimus and Rhomboides being taken away A The fourth muscle of the chest or the upper and hinder Saw-muscle B the 5 muscle of the chest or the lower and hinder Saw-muscle a b A membranous beginning of the muscle of the Abdomen descending obliquely downe from the spine of the backe C the first muscle extending the Cubit at c his originall is from the necke of the arme and from the lower basis of the blade at d. E the originall of the fourth muscle of the bone hyois from the blade G G the outward intercostall muscles I the Clavicle or coller-bone bared N the upper the second muscle of the arme called Deltois char 4 5 the beginning of this muscle N the third muscle of the arme or the broad muscle separated O the fourth muscle of the arme or the lower Super-Scapularis or bladerider 1 2 3. Char. His originall at the basis of the shoulder-blade at 1 2 and his insertion into the joynt of the arme at 3. Q the sixt muscle of the arme or the upper Super-Scapularis X the fourth muscle of the blade called Levator or the heaver Z the second muscle of the Chest or the greater Saw-muscle 7 7 Char. the ribs ãâã the sixt muscle of the chest or the muscle called Sacrolumbus ãâã the first muscle of the head or the splinter E E the second muscle of the head or the insertion of the muscles called complexei Φ the second muscle of the backe or the longest muscle Ω the fourth muscle of the backe called Semispinatus Wherefore when the first oblique moves the head obliquely forwards the second puls it packe by the first Vertebra this with his associate of the other side may be truly termed the proper muscles of the neck because they belong to no other part whereas it is contrary in other muscles But we must note that the head according to Galens opinion hath two motions one directly forwards and backwards as appeares in beckning it forwards and casting it backwards the other circular The first in Galens opinion is performed by the first Vertebra moved upon the second the second by the head moved upon the first Vertebra for which he is reproved by the latter Anatomists who teach that the head cannot be turned round or circularly upon the first Vertebra without putting it out of joynt The ninth Figure of the muscles shewing the muscles of the Head and Necke A B the third paire of the Muscles of the head called Recti Maiores C the Mammillary processe D the transverse processe of the first rackebone E the processe of the 2 rackebone of the necke F G the fourth paire of muscles of the head called Recti Minores H I the fift paire of muscles of the head called Obliqui Superiores K L the sixt paire of muscles of the head called Obliqui Inferiores X the fourth paire of muscles of the shoulder-blade Î the second muscle of the necke called Scalenus which Falopius maketh the eight muscle of the chest Î the fourth muscle of the necke called spinatus Σ the first muscle of the backe called Quadratus Φ the second muscle of the backe called Longissimus a the sinus or bosome of this muscle whereby it giveth way unto the third muscle of the backe called Sacer. b His Originall Ï the third muscle of the backe called Sacer. γ His Originall δ His end Ω the fourth muscle of the backe called Semispinatus ãâã His upper end under the fourth muscle of the necke After the shewing of these muscles we must come to three or foure of the necke âf which number two which some reduce to one extends another bends and the ââ¦st moves side wayes and all of them with a motion succeeding each other turne it ââ¦bout as we said of the muscles of the head The first of these which extend taking ââ¦s originall from the sixe transverse processes of the sixe upper racke-bones of the ââ¦acke or rather from the root of the oblique ascends directly to the spine of the second Vertebra of the necke and the oblique processe thereof some call it the Transââ¦versarius that is the transverse-muscle This if you desire to take it away it is best first to separate it from the spine then to turne it upwards to the transverse processes ânlesse you had rather draw it a little from its partner and companion in that place where their originals are distinct seeing it is the last and next to the bones Marvell not if you finde not this distinction of their originall so plaine and manifest for it is commonly obscure For the muscle Spinatus as it most commonly comes to passe arising from the roots of the seven upper spines of the backe and the last of the necke is inserted into other spines of the necke so that it might easily be confounded with the former by Galen The third bends the necke and arising within from the body of the five upper Vertebrae of the back though with a very obscure originall specially in leane bodies it
when it comes almost to the midst of the Cubit presently or a little after it is divided into two large branches the one of which alongst the wand the qther alongst the Cubite is carryed into the hand on the inside under the Ring For both these branches are distributed and spent upon the hand after the same manner as the branches of the internall Axillary veine that is having sent by the way some little shoots into the parts by which they passe at the length the branch which descends by the Wand of the remainder therof bestowes two sprigs upon the Thumbe on each side one two in like manner on the fore finger and one on the midle the other which runs alongst the Ell performes the like office to the litle and the midle or ring finger as you may see by dissection CHAP. XXIIII Of the Nerves of the Necke Backe and Arme. NOw we should handle the sinewes of the Arme but because these proceed from the Nerves of the Necke and Backe I thinke it fit therefore to speake something of them in the first place Therefore from the Necke there proceed seven paire of Nerves the first of which proceeds from the nowle bone and the first Vertebra of the necke as also the first paire of the Backe from the last Vertebra of the Necke and the first of the Chest But all these Nerves are divided into two or more branches of the first paire that is to say on each side goe the one to the small right muscle ascending from the first racke-bone of the necke to the nowle bone the other to the long muscle on the foreside of the necke The branches of the second paire are distributed some with a portion which they receive from the third paire over all the skin of the head the two others go as well to the muscles which are from the second Vertebra to the backe part of the head and from the same to the first Vertebra as also to the long muscle before mentioned One of the third paire of Sinewes is communicated to the head as we said before but others to the Muscles which extend or erect the head and the Necke there is also one of these distributed into the neighbouring ââde muscle and part of the long The nerves of the fourth paire go one to the muscles aswel of the neck as the head to the broad muscle the other after it hath sent some portioÌ therof into the long muscle the side muscles of the necke it descends with a portion of the fift and sixt paire to the Midriffe One of the branches of the fift paire is bestowed on the hinde muscles of the necke and head the other upon the longe muscle and Midriffe the third is communicated to the Levatores or Heaving muscles of the Arme and shoulder One of the Nerves of the sixt paire goes to the hinde muscles of the Necke and head another to the Midriffe the third with a portion of the seventh paire of the necke and of the first and second of the Chest goe to the Armes and heaving muscles of the shoulder-blade One of the branches of the seventh paire runs to the broad muscle and to the neighbouring muscles both of the necke and head another encreased with a portion of the fift and sixt paire of the necke and a third joyned to the second and third paire of the Chest descending into the Arme goe to the hand But you must note that the Muscles which take their originall from many Vertebrae whether from above downwards or from below upwards admit Nerves not onely from the Vertebrae from whence they take their originall but also from them which they come neere in their descent or ascent There passe twelue conjugations of Nerves from the Rack-bones of the Chest The first entring forth from betweene the last Racke-bone of the necke and the first of the Chest is divided that is on each side each Nerve from his side into two or more portions as also all the rest Therefore the branches of this first conjugation goe some of them to the Armes as we said before others to the muscles as well these of the Chest as others arising there or running that way The branches of the second conjugation are distributed to the same parts that these of the first were But the branches of all the other conjugations even to the twelfth are communicated some to the intercostall muscles running within under the true ribs even to the Sternon and under the bastard ribs even to the right and long muscles and the Costall Nerves of the sixt conjugation are augmented by meeting these intercostall branches by the way as they descend by the roots of the Ribs Other particles of the said Nerves are communicated to the muscles as well of the Chest as spine as the same Muscles passe forth or runne alongst by the Vertebrae from whence these nerves have either their originall or passage forth Having thus therefore shewed the originall of the Sinewes of the Arme it remaines that we shew their number and distribution Their number is five or sixe proceeding from the fifth sixth and seventh Vertebra of the necke and the first and second of the Chest The first of which not mixed with any other from the fifth Vertebra of the necke goes to the Muscle Deltoides and the skin which covers it The other 4 or 5 when they have mutually embraced each other not onely from their first originall but even to the shoulder where they free themselves from this convolution are distributed after the following manner The first and second descending to the Muscle mentioned a litle before and thence sometimes even to the hand is by the way communicated to the Muscle Biceps and then under the said Muscle it meets and is joyned with the third Nerve Thirdly it is communicated with the Longest muscle of the Cubite in the bending whereof it is divided into two branches descending alongst the two bones of the Cubit untill at last borne up by the fleshy pannicle it is spent upon the skin and inner side of the hand The third lower than this is first united with the second under the Muscle Biceps then straight way separated from it it sends a portion thereof to the Arme which lyes under it and to the skin thereof lastly at the bending of the Cubit on the fore side it is mingled with the fift paire The fourth the largest of all the rest comming downe below the third branch under the Biceps with the internall Axillary veine and Artery is turned towards the outward and backe part of the Arme there to communicate it selfe to the Muscles extending the Cubit and also to the inner skin of the Arme and the exteriour of the Cubit the remainder of this branch when in its descent it hath arrived at the joynt of the Cubit below the bending thereof it is divided into two
branches the one wherof descending alongst the Cubit is spent on the outside of the Wrest the other associating the Wand is on the outside in like manner in two branches bestowed upon the Thumbe and in as many upon the fore finger and by a fift upon the middle finger though more obscurely The fift branch being also lower than the rest sliding between the muscles bending and extending the Cubite when it comes behinde the inner protuberation of the Cubite in which place we said before the third branch meets with this it is communicated to the internall muscles of the same and then divided into three portions one of which on the outside alongst the middle of the Cubite goes in two sprigs to the litle finger so many to the middle finger and one to the Ring finger the other two the one without and the other within the Ring goe to the hand where after each of them hath bestowed what was requisite on the muscles of the hand they are wasted into other five small portions of which these which are from that portion which descends without the Ring send two sprigs to the litle two to the fore and one to the middle finger but these which come from that which passes under the Ring by such a distribution communicates it selfe to other fingers as two sprigs to the thumbe two to the fore and one to the middle finger The sixt the lowest and last runs betweene the skin and fleshy Pannicle by the inner protuberation of the Arme and then is spent upon the skin of the Cubit CHAP. XXV The description of the bone of the Arme and the Muscles which move it BEcause we cannot perfectly demonstrate the originall of the muscles of the Arme especially of the two Arme muscles not knowing the description of this bone first therefore we will describe it then returne to the originall of the muscles arising from thence The bone of the arme is the greatest of all the bones in the body except the Thigh-bone it is round hollow and filled with marrow with a great Appendix or head on the top thereof having an indifferent necke to which it is knit by Symphysis for appendices are no otherwise united to their bones In the lower part thereof it hath two processes or protuberations one on the fore side another on the hinde betweene which swellings there is a cavity like to halfe the compasse of a wheele about which the Cubit is moved The extremityes of this cavity ends in two holes of which one is the more externall the other more internall these cavityes receive the heads of the Cubite that is the fore or internall receives the fore processe when the arme is bended inwards but the externall or hinder the exteriour as it is extended For the head of the arme it hath a double connexion the one with its owne necke by Symphysis that is a naturall union of the bones without any motion the other with the lightly ingraven cavity of the shoulder-blade which we call Glene by that kinde of Dearticulation which is called Arthrodia this connexion is made firme and stable by the muscles descending into the arme from the shoulder-blade as also by the proper Ligaments descending from the circle and brow of the cavity of the Acromion and Coracoides to this head of the arme this same head of the arme is as it were more cleft and open on the inner side than on the fore side that so it may give way to one of the Ligaments comming from the shoulder-blade to the muscle Biceps For asmuch as belongs to the lower end of the bone of the arme which we said hath two processes we may say that it is fastened to the bones of the Cubit by two sorts of articulation that is by Ginglymos with the Ell or proper bone of the Cubit and by Arthrodia with the Radius or Wand which in a lightly engraven cavity receives the fore processe of the arme and is turned about it for the motion of the hand The hinder processe is chiefly added for the safety and preservation of the veines arteries and nerves These things thus showne it is worth our labour to know the figure of the arme it selfe as it lyes betweene the forementioned appendices and processes that in the case of a fracture we may know how conveniently to restore it therfore first we must understand that this bone is somwhat bended and hollowed on the inside under the cleft of the head thereof but bunching out on the out and fore side Table 24. sheweth the Braine together with the Aster-braine the spinall marrow and the Nerves of the whole body A That part of the braine that is ãâã the nosethrils B That part which is at the side of the ventricles C The back part of the braine D The Cerebellum or After-braine E The Mamillary processe in the right side F The originall of the opticke nerve G Their conjunctions H The coate into which the opticke nerve is extended I The second paire of the sinewes of the braine K The lesser roote of the third conjugation L The thicke roote of the same conjugation according to the common opinion M The fourth conjugatioÌ of the sinews N The lesser roote of the fift paire O The bigger roote of the same paire P The small membrane of the eare which they call the Tympany Q The lower branch of the bigger roote of the fift conjugation S The sixt paire of sinewes T The seventh paire V The beginning of the spinall marrow out of the middle of the basis of the braine X The right sinew of the midriffe cut off Y A branch from the fift paire creeping to the top of the shoulder Z The first nerve of the arme from whence there goeth a branch to the skin A The second nerve of the arme and a branch there from into the first muscle of the Cubite B The third nerve of the arme and a branch going to the skin on the outside C A branch from the 3. nerve to the 2. muscle of the Cubite D The congresse or meeting of the second nerve with the third E A small branch from the 3. nerve to the 2. muscle of the Radius F The distribution of the second nerve into two branches * The lesser branch of this division lengthened out to the skin as far as the thumbe a The place of the spinall marrow where it issueth out of the braine 1 2 3 c. Thirty paires of nerves arising from the spinall marrow are here noted by their Char. that is to say 7. of the necke 12 of the Chest 5. of the loynes and 6 of the holy-bone b The thicker branch of the 2 nerve divided into 2 parts c Branches of the 3 nerve sprinkled here and there d Nerves from the third paire to the thumb the forefinger and the middle finger âe The 4 nerve of the arme f The passage hereof through the inside of the shoulder g A
is cause of many accidents in men for the perpetuall effluxe of blood extinguisheth the vivide and lively colour of the face calls on a dropsie overthrowes the strength of the whole body The fluxe of Haemorrhoides is commonly every moneth sometimes onely foure times in a yeare Great paine inflammation an Abscesse which may at length end in a Fistula unlesse it be resisted by convenient remedies doe oft times forerunne the evacuation of the Haemorrhoides But if the Haemorrhoides flow in a moderate quantity if the patients brooke it well they ought not to be stayed for that they free the patients from the feare of imminent evills as melancholy leprosie strangury and the like Besides if they bee stopped without a cause they by their refluxe into the Lungs cause their inflammation or else breake the vessells thereof and by flowing to the Liver cause a dropsie by the suffocation of the native heate they cause a dropsie and universall leanenesse on the contrary if they flow immoderately by refrigerating the Liver by losse of too much blood wherefore when as they flow too immoderately they must be stayed with a pledget of hares downe dipped in the ensuing medicine â pul aloes thuris balaust sang draconis an ⥠ss incorporentur simul cum ovi albumine fiat medicamentum ad usum When they are stretched out and swollne without bleeding it is convenient to beate an Onion roasted in the embers with an Oxes gall and apply this medicine to the swolne places and renew it every five houres This kind of remedy is very prevalent for internall Haemorrhoides but such as are manifest may be opened with horsleaches or a Lancet The juyce or masse of the hearbe called commonly Dead nettle or Arkeangell applyed to the swolne Haemorrhoides opens them and makes the congealed blood flow there hence The Fungus and Thymus being diseases about the fundament are cured by the same remedy If acrimony heate and paine doe too cruelly afflict the patient you must make him enter into a bath and presently after apply to the ulcers if any such be this following remedy â Olei ros ⥠iiij cerusae ⥠j. Litharg ⥠ss cerae novae Êvj opij â j. fiaet unguent secundum artem Or else â an.Êj. opij â j. fiat unguentum cum oleo rosarum mucagine sem psilij addendo vitellum unius ovt You may easily prosequute the residue of the cure according to the generall rules of Art The end of the Thirteenth Booke OF BANDAGES OR LIGATURES THE FOURTEENTH BOOK CHAP. I. Of the differences of Bandages BAndages wherewith we use to binde doe much differ amongst themselves But their differences in Galens opinion are chiefly drawne from sixe things to wit their matter figure length breadth making and parts whereof they consist Now the matter of Bandages is threefold Membranous or of skinnes which is accommodated peculiarly to the fractured grisles of the Nose of Woollen proper to inflamed parts as those which have neede of no astriction of Linnen as when anie thing is to be fast bound and of Linnen cloathes some are made of flaxe othersome of hempe as Hippocrates observes But Bandages doe thus differ amongst themselves in structure for that some thereof consist of that matter which is sufficiently close and strong of it selfe such are the membranous others are woven as the linnen ones But that Linnen is to bee made choice of for this use and judged the best not which is new and never formerly used but that which hath alreadie beene worne and served for other uses that so the Bandages made thereof may be the more soft and pliable yet must they bee of such strength that they may not breake with stretching and that they may straitly containe and repell the humour readie to flow downe and so hinder it from entring the part These besides must not bee hemmed nor stitched must have no lace nor seame for hems and seames by their hardnesse presse into and hurt the flesh that lyes under them Lace whether in the midst or edges of the rowler makes the Ligature unequall For the Member where it is touched with the Lace as that which will not yeeld is pressed more hard but with the cloth in the middle more gently as that which is more laxe Furthermore these Ligatures must bee of cleane cloth that if occasion bee they may bee moystened or steeped in liquour appropriate to the disease and that they may not corrupt or make worse that liquour by their moistening therein Now the Bandages which are made of Linnen cloathes must be cut long-waies and not athwart for so they shall keepe more firme and strong that which they binde and besides they will be alwaies alike and not broader in one place than in another But they thus differ in figure for that some of them are rowled up to which nothing must be sowed for that they ought to be of a due length to binde up the member others are cut or divided which truly consist of one piece but that divided in the end such are usually taken to bind up the breasts or else in the midst others are sowed together which consist of many branches sowed together and ending in divers heads and representing divers figures such are the Bandages appropriated to the head But they thus differ in length for that some of them are shorter others longer so in like sort for breadth for some are broader others narrower Yet wee cannot certainly define nor set downe neither the length nor breadth of Rowlers for that they must be various according to the different length and thicknesse of the members or parts Generally they ought both in length and breadth to fit the parts whereunto they are used For these parts require a binding different each from other the head the necke shoulders armes breasts groines testicles fundament hips thighes legs feet and toes For the parts of Bandages wee terme one part their bodie another their heads By the bodie we mean their due length breadth but their ends whether they run long-waies or a-crosse wee according to Galen terme them their heads CHAP. II. Sheweth the indications and generall precepts of fitting of Bandages and Ligatures THere are in Hippocrates opinion two indications of fitting Bandages or Ligatures the one whereof is taken from the part affected the other from the affect it selfe From the part affected so the legge if you at any time binde it up must bee bound long-waies for if you binde it overthwart the binding will loosen as soone as the patient beginnes to goe and put forth his legge for then the muscles take upon them another figure On the contrarie the Arme or Elbow must be bound up bending in and turned to the breast for otherwise at the first bending if it bee bound when it is stretched forth the Ligature will be slacked for that as we formerly said the figure of the muscles is perverted Now
forthwith I exceeding straitly bound my finger above the wound that so I might presse forth the blood and poyson lest they should diffuse themselves further over the body I dissolved old treacle in aqua vitae wherein I dipped and moistened cotton and so put it to the wound and within a few dayes I throughly recovered by this onely medicine You may use in stead of Treacle Mithridate and sundry other things which by reason of their heat are powerfull drawers as a squill rosted in hot embers garlicke and leeks beaten and applyed barly floure tempered with vinegar hony and goats dung and so applyed like a pultis Some thinke it sufficient forthwith to wash and foment the wound with vinegar salt and a little hony Galen writes that the poyson inflicted by the bite of a viper may bee drawne forth by applying to the wound the head of a viper but othersome apply the whole viper beaten to mash CHAP. XVII Of the Serpent called Haemorrhous THE Serpent Haemorrhous is so called because by his biting hee causeth blood to droppe out of all the passages of the wounded bodie hee is of a small bodie of the bignesse of a viper with else burning with a certaine fierie brightnesse and a most beautifull skinne The backe of him as Avicen writes is spotted with manie blacke and white spots his necke little and his taile verie small the part which he bites forthwith growes blackish by reason of the extinction of the native heat which is extinguished by such poison which is contrarie thereto in its whole substance Then followes a paine of the stomacke and heart these parts being touched with the pestiferous qualitie of the poison These paines are seconded by vomiting the orifice of the ventricle being relaxed by a Diarrhaea the retentive facultie of all the parts of the bellie being weakened and the veines which are spred through the guts not being able to retaine the blood conteined in them For the blood is seen to flow out as in streams from the nose mouth eares fundament privities corners of the eies rootes of the naile and gums which putrefie the teeth falling out of them Moreover there happens a difficultie of breathing and stoppage of the urine with a deadlie convulsion The cure is forthwith to scarifie and burne the bitten part or else to cut it quite off if that it may be done without danger of life and then to use powerfullie drawing Antidores The figure of the serpent Haemorrhous CHAP. XVIII Of the Serpent called Seps THe Serpent Seps is so called because it causeth the part which it bites forthwith to putrefie by reason of the cruell malignitie of its poyson It is not much unlike the Haemorrhous but that it curles or twines up the taile in divers circles Pausanias writes that this serpent is of an ash-colour a broad head small necke bigge bellie writhen taile and as he goes hee runs aside like a crabbe But his skin is variegated and spotted with severall colours like to Tapistrie By the crueltie of his causticke and putrefying venome hee burnes the part which he hath bit with most bitter paine he causeth the shedding of the haires and as Aëtius addeth the wound at the first casteth forth manifest blood but within a little while after stinking filth The putrefyed affected parts waxe white and the bodie all over becomes of the colour of that scurfe which is termed Alphos so that by the wickednesse of this putrefactive poison not onely the spirits are resolved but also the whole bodie consumed as by fire a pestilent carbuncle and other putride tumours arising from a hot and humide or suffocating constitution of the aire Now for the remedies they must be such as are formerly prescribed against the bitings of a viper The Figure of the Serpent Seps CHAP. XIX Of the Basiliske or Cockatrice THe Basiliske far exceeds all kinds of Serpents in the curstness of its poyson Therefore it is affirmed by Nicander that into what place soever he comes other venemous creatures do forthwith flie thence for that none of them can so much as endure his hissing for he is thought to kill all things even with this not with his biting and touch only besides if any of them hasten to get anie meate or drinke and perceive that the Basiliske is not farre from thence he flies back and neglects the getting of nourishment necessarie for life Galen writes that the Basilisk is a yellowish serpent with a sharpe head and three risings distinguished with white spots and rising up in forme of a crowne by reason whereof hee is stiled the King of Serpents Certainely the violence of his poyson in killing men is so great that he is therefore thought to kill men and other creatures by his sight onely Solinus affirmes that the body of a dead Basiliske hath wondrous faculties Wherefore the inhabitants of Pergamum in ancient times gave a mightie price for one to hang upon the joistes of the temple of Apollo so to drive away the Spiders and Birds lest they should there weave their webs or the other build their nests in that sacred place Verily no ravenous creature will touch their carkasse but if constrained by hunger they doe touch it then they forthwith fall downe dead in the same place and this happens not onely by eating their body but also by devouring the bodies of such beasts as are killed by their bitings They kill the trees and shrubs by which they passe not onely by their touch but even with their breath Amongst the westerne Aethiopians is the fountaine Nigris neer which there is a serpent called Catablepas small in bodie and slow having a great head which it scarce can carrie but that it lies alwaies upon the ground otherwise it would kill abundance of people for it forthwith kills all that see the eyes thereof the Basiliske hath the same force he is bred in the province of Cyrene of the length of some twelve fingers with a white spot in his head resembling a crowne he chaseth away all serpents with his hisse Weasels are the destruction of such monsters thus it pleased nature that nothing should be without its equall they assaile them in their dennes being easily knowne by the barrennesse or consumption of the soile These kill them also by their sent and they die and the fight of nature is ended thus nature to the magnanimous Lion lest there should be nothing which he might fear hath opposed the weake creature the Cocke by whose crowing onely he is terrefied and put to flight Erasistratus writes that a golden yellownesse affects the bitten part of such as are hurt by a Basiliske but a blacknesse and tumour possesseth the rest of the body all the flesh of the muscles within a while after falling away piece-meale An antidote against this must be made of a dramme of Castoreum dissolved in wine and drunken or else in
Clisters and with opening the Cephalicke veine in the arme the arteries of the temples must be opened taking so much bloud out of them as the greatnesse of the Symptomes and the strength of the patient shall require and permit Truly the incision that is made in opening of an arterie will close and joyne together as readily and with as little difficulty as the incision of a veine And of such an incision of an artery commeth present helpe by reason that the tensive and sharpe vapours do plentifully breath out together with the arterious bloud It were also very good to provoke a fluxe of bloud at the nose if nature be apt to exoneâate herselfe that way For as Hippocrates saith when the head is grieved or generally aketh if matter water or bloud flow out at the nostrils mouth or eares it presently cures the disease Such bleeding is to be provoked by strong blowing or striving to cleanse the nose by scratching or picking of the inner sides of the nostrils by pricking with an horse haire and long holding downe of the head The Lord of Fontains a Knight of the Order when we were at Bayon had a bleeding at the nose which came naturally for the space of two dayes and thereby hee was freed of a pestilent Feaver which he had before a great sweat rising therewithall and shortly after his Carbuncles came to suppuration and by Gods grace he recovered his health being under my cure If the bloud doe flow out and cannot be stopped when it ought the hands armes and legges must be tyed with bands and sponges wet in Oxycrate must be put under the arme-holes cupping-glasses must be applyed unto the dugges the region of the liver and spleen and you must put into the nostrils the doune of the willow tree or any other astringent medicine incorporated with the haires pluckt from the flanke belly or throat of a Hare bole Armenicke Terra Sigillata the juice of Plantain and Knot-grasse mixed together and furthermore the patient must be placed or laied in a coole place But if the pain bee nothing mitigated not withstanding all these fluxes of bloud we must come to medicines that procure sleep whose formes are these Take of green Lettuce one handfull flowers of water Lillies and Violets of each two pugils one head of white Poppy bruised of the foure cold seeds of each two drams of Liquorice and Raisons of each one dram make thereof a decoction and in the straining dissolve one ounce and an halfe of Diacodion make thereof a large potion to be given when they goe to rest Also a Barly-creame may be prepared in the water of water-Lillies and of Sorrell of each two ounces adding thereto sixe or eight graines of Opium of the foure cold seeds and of white Poppy seeds of each halfe an ounce and let the same be boyled in broths with Lettuce and Purslaine also the Pils de Cynoglosso id est Hounds tongue may be given Clisters that provoke sleep must be used which may be thus prepared Take of Barly-water halfe a pinte oyle of Violets and water-Lillies of each two ounces of the water of Plantaine and Purslaine or rather of their juices three ounces of Camphire seven graines and the whites of three egges make thereof a Clister The head must be fomented with Rose-vinegar the haire being first shaven away leaving a double cloth wet therein on the same and often renewed Sheepes lungs taken warme out of the bodies may be applyed to the head as long as they are warme Cupping-glasses with and without scarification may be applyed to the neck and shoulder-blades The armes and legs must be strongly bound being first wel rubbed to divert the sharpe vapours and humours from the head Frontals may also bee made on this manner Take of the oyle of Roses and water-Lillies of each two ounces of the oyle of Poppy halfe an ounce of Opium one dram of Rose-vinegar one ounce of Camphire halfe a dram mixe them together Also Nodules may bee made of the flowers of Poppies Henbane water-Lillies Mandrakes beaten in Rose-water with a little Vinegar and a little Camphire and let them be often applyed to the nostrils for this purpose Cataplasmes also may be laid to the forehead As Take of the mucilage of the seeds of Psilium id est Flea-wort and Quince seeds extracted in Rose-water three ounces of Barly-meale foure ounces of the powder of Rose-leaves the flowers of water-Lillies and Violets of each halfe an ounce of the seeds of Poppies and Purslaine of each two ounces of the water and vinegar of Roses of each three ounces make thereof a Cataplasme and apply it warme unto the head Or take of the juice of Lettuce water-Lillies Henbane Purslaine of each half a pint of Rose-leaves in powder the seeds of Poppy of each halfe an ounce oyle of Roses three ounces of Vinegar two ounces of Barly-meale as much as shall suffice make thereof a Cataplasme in the forme of a liquid Pultis When the heate of the head is mitigated by these medicines and the inflammation of the braine asswaged wee must come unto digesting and resolving fomentations which may disperse the matter of the vapours But commonly in paine of the head they doe use to bind the forehead and hinder part of the head very strongly which in this case must bee avoyded CHAP. XXVII Of the heat of the Kidnies THe heat of the kidnies is tempered by anointing with unguent refrigerans Galen newly made adding therto the whites of egs wel beaten that so the ointment may keep moyst the longer let this liniment bee renewed every quarter of an houre wiping away the reliques of the old Or â aq ros lb. ss sucti plant ⥠iv alb ovorum iv olei rosacei nenuph. an ⥠ii aceti ros ⥠iii. misce ad usum When you have anointed the part lay thereon the leaves of water-Lillies or the like cold herbs then presently thereupon a double linnen cloth dipped in oxycrate wrung out againe and often changed the patient shall not lye upon a feather bed but on a quilt stuffed with the chaffe of oates or upon a matte with many doubled clothes or Chamelet spread thereon To the region of the heart may in the meane time bee applyed a refrigerating and alexiteriall medicine as this which followeth â ung rosat ⥠iii. olei nenupharini ⥠ii aceti ros aquaerosar an ⥠i. theriacae Êi croci Ê ss Of these melted and mixed together make a soft ointment which spred upon a scarlet cloth may be applyed to the region of the heart Or â theriacae opt Êi ss succi citri acidi limonis an ⥠ss coral rub sem rosar rub an Ê ss caphurae croci an gra iiii let them bee all mixed together and make an ointment or liniment At the head of the patient as he lies in his bed shall be set an Ewre or cocke with
all spices and all salted and spiced meats and all sharpe things wine especially that which is not allayed or mixed with water and carnall copulation with a man let her avoyd all perturbations of the minde but anger especially let her use moderate exercise unlesse it be the exercise of her armes and upper parts rather than the legges and lower parts whereby the greater attraction of the blood that must be turned into milke may bee made towards the dugges Let her place her childe so in the cradle that his head may be higher than all the body that so the excrementall humours may bee the better sent from the braine unto the passages that are beneath it Let her swathe it so as the neck and all the back-bone may be straight and equall As long as the childe sucketh and is not fed with stronger meat it is better to lay him alway on his backe than any other way for the backe is as it were the Keele in a ship the ground-worke and foundation of all the whole body whereon the infant may safely and easily rest But if hee lye on the side it were danger lest that the bones of the ribs being soft and tender not strong enough and united with slacke bands should bow under the waight of the rest and so waxe crooked whereby the infant might become crooke-backed But when he beginneth to breed teeth and to bee fed with more strong meat and also the bones and connexions of them begin to waxe more firme and hard hee must bee layed one while on this side another while on that and now and then also on his backe And the more hee groweth the more let him be accustomed to lye on his sides and as hee lieth in the cradle let him bee turned unto that place whereat the light commeth in lest that otherwise he might become poore-blind for the eye of its owne nature is bright and light-some and therefore alwaies desireth the light and abhorreth darkenesse for all things are most delighted with their like and shunne their contraries Therefore unlesse the light come directly into the childes face he turneth himselfe every way being very sorrowfull and striveth to turne his head and eyes that hee may have the light and that often turning and rowling of his eyes at length groweth into a custome that cannot bee left and so it commeth to passe that the infant doth either become poore-blind if hee set his eyes stedfastly on one thing or else his eyes doe become trembling alwaies turning and unstable if hee cast his eyes on many things that are round about him which is the reason that nurses being taught by experience cause over the head of the childe lying in the cradle an arch or vault of wickers covered with cloath to be made thereby to restraine direct and establish the uncertaine and wandering motions of the childes eyes If the nurse be squint-eyed she cannot look upon the childe but side-waies whereof it commeth to passe that the childe being moist tender flexible and prone to any thing with his body and so likewise with his eye by a long and daily custome unto his nurses sight doth soone take the like custome to looke after that sort also which afterwards he cannot leave or alter For those evill things that we learn in our youth do stick firmly by us but the good qualities are easily changed into worse In the eies of those that are squint-eyed those two muscles which do draw the eyes to the greater or lesser corner are chiefly or more frequently moved Therefore either of these being confirmed in their turning aside by long use as the exercise of their proper office encreaseth the strength soone overcomes the contrary or withstanding muscles called the Antagonists and brings them into their subjection so that will they nill they they bring the eye unto this or that corner as they list So children become left-handed when they permit their right hand to languish with idlenesse and sluggishnesse and strengthen their left hand with continuall use and motion to do every action therewithall and so bring by the exercise thereof more nutriment unto that part But if men as some affirme being of ripe yeers and in their full growth by daily society and company of those that are lame and halt doe also halt not minding so to doe but it commeth against their wills and when they thinke nothing thereof why should not the like happen in children whose soft and tender substance is as flexible and pliant as waxe unto every impression Moreover children as they become lame and crook-backt so doe they also become squint-eyed by the hereditary default of their parents CHAP. XXIII How to make pappe for children PAppe is a most meet foode or meat for children because they require moist nourishment and it must bee answerable in thickenesse to the milke that so it may not be difficult to be concocted or digested For pap hath these three conditions so that it be made with wheaten flower and that not crude but boiled let it be put into a new earthen pot or pipkin and so set into an oven at the time when bread is set thereinto to bee baked and let it remaine there untill the bread bee baked and drawne out for when it is so baked it is lesse clammy and crude Those that mixe the meale crude with the milke are constrained to abide one of these discommodities or other either to give the meale grosse clammy unto the child if that the pap be onely first boiled over the fire in a pipkin or skillet so long as shall bee necessary for the milke hence come obstructions in the mesaraike veines and in the small veines of the liver fretting and wormes in the guts and the stone in the reines Or else they give the child the milk despoiled of its butterish and whayish portion and the terrestriall and cheeselike or curdlike remaining if the pap be boiled so long as is necessary for the meale for the milke requireth not so great neither can it suffer so long boyling as the meale Those that doe use crude meale and have no hurt by it are greatly bound to nature for so great a benefit But Galen willeth children to bee nourished onely with the nurses milke so long as the nurse hath enough to nourish and feed it And truely there are many children that are contented with milke only and will receive no pappe untill they are three moneths old If the child at any time bee costive and cannot voide the excrements let him have a cataplasme made with one dramme of Aloes of white and blacke Hellebore of each fifteene graines being all incorporated in as much of an oxe gall as is sufficient and extended or spread on cotton like unto a pultis as broad as the palme of ones hand and so apply it upon the navell warme moreover this cataplasme hath also vertue to kill the wormes in the belly Many
and hang loose and lanke and her belly will be more hard and swollen than it was before In all bolies so putrefying the naturall heat vanisheth away and in place thereof succeedeth a preternaturall by the working whereof the putrefyed and dissolved humours are stirred up into vapours and converted into winde and those vapours because they possesse and fill more space and roome for naturalists say that of one part of water ten parts of aire are made doe so puffe up the putrefyed body into a greater bignesse You may note the same thing in bodies that are gangrenate for they cast forth many sharpe vapours yet neverthelesse they are swollen and pufted up Now so soone as the Chirurgian shall know that the childe is dead by all these forenamed signes he shall with all diligence endeavour to save the mother so speedily as hee can and if the Physitians cannot prevaile with potions bathes fumigations sternutatories vomits and liniments appointed to expell the infant let him prepare himselfe to the worke following but first let him consider the strength of the woman for if he perceive that shee bee weake and feeble by the smalnesse of her pulse by her small seldome and cold breathing and by the altered and death-like colour in her face by her cold sweats and by the coldnesse of the extreme parts let him abstaine from the worke and onely affirme that shee will dye shortly contrariwise if her strength be yet good let him with all confidence and industry deliver her on this wise from the danger of death CHAP. XXVI Of the Chyrurgicall extraction of the childe from the wombe either dead or alive THerefore first of all the aire of the chamber must bee made temperate and reduced unto a certaine mediocrity so that it may neither be too hot nor too cold Then she must be aptly placed that is to say overthwart the bed side with her buttockes somewhat high having a hard stuffed pillow or boulster underthem so that she may be in a meane figure of situation neither sitting altogether upright nor altogether lying along on her backe for so shee may rest quietly and draw her breath with ease neither shall the ligaments of the womb bee extended so as they would if shee lay upright on her backe her heeles must bee drawn up close to her buttocks and there bound with broad and soft linnen rowlers The rowler must first come about her neck and then crosse-wise over her shoulders and so to the feet and there it must crosse again and so be rowled about the legs and thighes and then it must be brought up to the necke againe and there made fast so that she may not be able to move her selfe even as one should be tyed when he is to be cut of the stone But that shee may not bee wearied or lest that her body should yeeld or sinke downe as the Chirurgian draweth the body of the infant from her and so hinder the worke let him cause her feet to bee set against the side of the bed and then let some of the strong standers by hold her fast by the legs and shoulders Then that the aire may not enter into the wombe and that the worke may bee done with the more decency her privie parts thighs must be covered with a warm double linnen cloath Then must the Chirurgion having his nailes closely pared and his rings if hee weare any drawne off his fingers and his armes naked bare and well anointed with oyle gently draw the flappes of the necke of the wombe asunder and then let him put his hand gently into the mouth of the wombe having first made it gentle and slippery with much oile and when his hand is in let him finde out the forme and situation of the childe whether it be one or two or whether it be a Mole or not And when he findeth that he commeth naturally with his head toward the mouth or orifice of the wombe he must lift him up gently and so turne him that his feet may come forwards and when he hath brought his feet forwards he must draw one of them gently out at the necke of the wombe and then hee must binde it with some broad and soft or silken band a little above the heele with an indifferent slack knot and when he hath so bound it he must put it up againe into the wombe then he must put his hand in againe and finde out the other foote and draw it also out of the wombe and when it is out of the wombe let him draw out the other againe whereunto he had before tyed the one end of the band and when hee hath them both out let him join them both close together so by them by little little let him draw all the whole body from the wombe Also other women or Midwives may help the endeavour of the Chirurgion by pressing the patients belly with their hands downe-wards as the infant goeth out and the woman her selfe by holding her breath and closing her mouth and nostrills and by driving her breath downewards with great violence may very much helpe the expulsion I wish him to put backe the foot into the wombe againe after he hath tyed it because if that he should permit it to remain in the necke of the womb it would hinder the entrance of his hand when he putteth it in to draw out the other But if there bee two children in the wombe at once let the Chirurgian take heed lest that he take not of either of them a legge for by drawing them so hee shall profit nothing at all and yet exceedingly hurt the woman Therefore that he may not bee so deceived when hee hath drawne out one foot and tyed it and put it up again let him with his hand follow the band wherewithall the foot is tyed and so goe unto the foot and then to the groine of the childe and then from thence he may soone finde out the other foot of the same child for if it should happen otherwise he might draw the legges and the thighes out but it would come no further neither is it meet that hee should come out with his armes along by his sides or bee drawne out on that sort but one of his armes must bee stretched out above his head and the other down by his side for otherwise the orifice of the womb when it were delivered of such a grosse trunke as it would be when his body should be drawne out with his armes along by his sides would so shrinke and draw it selfe when the body should come unto the necke onely by the accord of nature requiring union that it would strangle and kill the infant so that hee cannot be drawne there-hence unlesse it bee with a hooke put under or fastened under his chinne in his mouth or in the hollownesse of his eye But if the infant lyeth as if hee would come with his hands forwards or
happen by the same cause that twinnes and many at one birth contrary to natures course doe chance that is by a larger effusion of seed than is required for the framing of that part that so it exceeds either in number or else in greatnesse So Austin tells that in his time in the East an infant was borne having all the parts from the belly upwards double but from thence downewards single and simple for it had two heads foure eyes two breasts foure hands in all the rest like to another child and it lived a little while Caelius Rhodiginus saith he saw two monsters in Italy the one male the other female handsomly neatly made through all their bodies except their heads which were double the male died within a few daies after it was borne but the female whose shape is here delineated lived 20. five yeers which is contrary to the common custome of monsters for they for the most part are very short lived because they both live and are born as it were against natures consent to which may be added they doe not love themselves by reason they are made a scorne to others and by that meanes lead a hated life The effigies of a maide with two heads But it is most remarkeable which Lycosthenes telleth of this woman-monster for excepting her two heads shee was framed in the rest of her body to an exact perfection her two heads had the like desire to eat and drinke to sleepe to speake and to doe every thing she begged from dore to dore every one giving to her freely Yet at length she was banisht Bavaria lest that by the frequent looking upon her the imaginations of women with childe strongly moved should make the like impression in the infants they bare in their wombes The effigies of two girles whose backes grew together In the yeere of our Lord 1475. at Verona in Italy two Girles were borne with their backes sticking together from the lower part of the shoulders unto the very buttockes The novelty and strangenesse of the thing moved their parents being but poor to carry them through all the chiefe townes in Italy to get mony of all such as came to see them In the yeere 1530. there was a man to bee seene at Paris out of whose belly another perfect in all his members except his head hanged forth as if he had been grafted there The man was forty yeeres old and hee carried the other implanted or growing out of him in his armes with such admiration to the beholders that many ranne very earnestly to see him The figure of a man with another growing out of him The effigies of the horned or hooded monster At Quiers a small village some ten miles from Turine in Savoy in the yeere 1578. upon the seventeenth day of January about eight a clocke at night an honest matron brought forth a childe having five hornes like to Rams hornes set opposite to one another upon his head he had also a long piece of flesh like in some sort to a French-hood which women used to wear hanging downe from his forehead by the nape of his necke almost the length of his backe two other pieces of flesh like the collar of a shirt were wrapped about his necke the fingers ends of both his hands somewhat resembled a Haukes talons and his knees seemed to be in his hammes the right leg and the right foot were of a very red colour the rest of the body was of a tawny colour it is said he gave so terrible a scritch when he was brought forth that the Midwives and the rest of the women that were at her labour were so frighted that they presently left the house and ran away When the Duke of Savoy heard of this monster he commanded it should be brought to him which performed one would hardly think what various censures the Courtiers gave of it The shape of a monster found in an egge The monster you see here delineated was found in the middle and innermost part of an egge with the face of a man but haires yeelding a horrid representation of snakes the chinne had three other snakes stretched forth like a beard It was first seene at Autun at the house of one Bancheron a Lawyer a maide breaking many eggs to butter the white of this egge given a Cat presently killed her Lastly this monster comming to the hands of the Baron Senecy was brought to King Charles the ninth being then at Metz. The effigies of a monstrous childe having two heads two armes foure legs In the yeere 1546. a woman at Paris in her sixt moneth of her account brought forth a childe having two heads two armes and foure legges I dissecting the body of it found but one heart by which one may know it was but one infant For you may know this from Aristotle whether the monstrous birth bee one or more joined together by the principall part for if the body have but one heart it is but one if two it is double by the joyning together in the conception The portraiture of Twinnes joyned together with one head In the yeere 1569. a certaine woman of Towers was delivered of twinnes joyned together with one head and mutually embracing each other Renatus Ciretus the famous Chirurgian of those parts sent mee their Sceleton The effigies of two girles being Twinnes joyned together by their fore-heads Munster writes that in the village Bristant not farre from Wormes in the yeere 1495. he saw two Girles perfect and entire in every part of their bodies but they had their fore-heads so joined together that they could not be parted or severed by any art they lived together ten yeeres then the one dying it was needfull to separate the living from the dead but she did not long out-live her sister by reason of the malignity of the wound made in parting them asunder In the yeere 1570. the twentieth of July at Paris in the street Gravilliers at the signe ãâã the Bell these two infants were borne distering in sexe with that shape of body ââat you see expressed in the figure They were baptized in the Church of St. Nichlas of the fields and named Ludovicus and Ludovica their father was a Mason his nâme was Peter German his surname Petit Dieu i little-God his mothers name was Mathea Petronilla The shape of the infants lately borne at Paris The figure of two girles joyned together in their breasts and belly In the yeere 1572. in Pont de See neare Anger 's a little towne were borne upon the tenth day of July two girles perfect in their limbs but that they had but foure fingers apiece on their left hands they clave together in their ãâã parts from their chin to the navell which ãâã but one as their heart was also but one their ãâã was divided into foure lobes they lived haââ an houre and were baptized The figure of a child with two heads and the body as bigge as one of
fore moneths old Caelius Rhodiginus tells that in a âwn of his country called Sarzano Italy being roubled with civill warres there was born monster of unusual bigness for he had two heads having all his limbs answerable in grâness tallnesse to a child of foure months old between his two heads which were boâh alike at the setting on of the shoulder ãâã had a third hand put forth which did not ââceed the eares in length for it was not all ââ¦n it was born the 5. of the Ides of March ãâã 14. The figure of one with foure legges and as manyarmes Jovianus Pontanus tells in the yeere 1529. the ninth day of January there was a man childe borne in Germany having foure armes and as many legges The figure of a man out of whose belly another head shewed it selfe In the yeere that Francis the first King of France entered into league with the Swisses there was borne a monster in Germany out of the midst of whose belly there stood a great head it came to mans age and this lower and as it were inserted head was nourished as much as the true and upper head In the yeere 1572. the last day of February in the parish of Viaban in the way as you goe from Carnuta to Paris in a small village called Bordes one called Cypriana Girandae the wife of James Merchant a husbandman brought forth this monster whose shape you see here delineated which lived untill the Sunday following being but of one onely sexe which was the female The shape of two monstrous Twinnes being but of one onely Sexe In the yeere 1572. on Easter Munday at Metz in Loraine in the Inne whose signe is the Holy-Ghost a Sow pigged a pigge which had eight legges foure eares and the head of a dogge the hinder part from the belly downeward was parted in two as in twinnes but the foreparts grew into one it had two tongues in the mouth with foure teeth in the upper jaw and as many in the lower The sexe was not to be distinguished whether it were a Bore or Sow pigge for there was one slit under the taile and the hinder parts were all rent and open The shape of this monster as it is here set downe was sent me by Borgesius the famous Physitian of Metz. The shape of a monstrous Pigge CHAP. III. Of women bringing many children at one birth WOman is a creature bringing usually but one at a birth but the ãâ¦ã been some who have brought forth two some three some fouâ⦠sixe or more at one birth Empedocles thought that the abundââ¦e of seed was the cause of such numerous births the Stoikes affirmââ¦e divers cells or partitions of the wombe to be the cause for the seâ⦠being variously parted into these partitions and the conception divided there are more children brought forth no otherwise than in rivers the water beating against the rockes is turned into divers circles or rounds But Aristotle saith there is no reason to think so for in women that parting of the womb into cells as in dogs and sowes taketh no place for womens wombes have but one cavity parted into two recesses the right left nothing comming between except by chance distinguished by a certain line for often twins lye in the same side of the womb Aristotles opinion is that a woman cannot bring forth more than five children at one birth The maide of Augustus Caesar brought forth five at a birth a short while after she her children died In the yeer 1554. at Bearn in Switzerland the wife of Dr. John Gelinger brought forth five children at one birth three boies and two girles Albucrasis affirmes a woman to have bin the mother of seven children at one birth another who by some externall injury did abort brought forth fifteene perfectly shaped in all their parts Pliny reports that it was extant in the writings of Physitians that twelve children were borne at one birth and that there was another in Peloponnesus which foure severall times was delivered of five children at one birth and that the greater part of those children lived It is reported by Dalechampius that Bonaventura the slave of one Savill a Gentleman of Sena at one time brought forth seven children of which four were baptized In our time between Sarte and Maine in the parish of Seaux not far from Chambellay there is a family and noble house called Maldemeure the wife of the Lord of Maldemeure the first yeere she was married brought forth twinnes the second yeere she had three children the third yeere foure the fourth yeere five the fift yeere sixe and of that birth she died of those sixe one is yet alive and is Lord of Maldemeure In the valley of Beaufort in the county of Anjou a young woman the daughter of Mace Channiere when at one perfect birth shee had brought forth one child the tenth day following she fell in labour of another but could not be delivered untill it was pulled from her by force and was the death of the mother Martin Cromerus the author of the Polish history writeth that one Margaret a woman sprung from a noble and antient family neere Cracovia and wife to Count Virboslaus brought forth at one birth thirty five live children upon the twentieth day of January in the yeere 1296. Franciscus Picus Mirandula writeth that one Dorothy an Italian had twenty children at two births at the first nine and at the second eleven and that she was so bigge that she was forced to beare up her belly which lay upon her knees with a broad and large scarfe tyed about her necke as you may see by the following figure The picture of Dorothy great with child with many children And they are to bee reprehended here againe who affirme the cause of numerous births to consist in the variety of the cells of the wombe for they feigne a womans wombe to have seven cells or partitions three on the right side for males three on the left side for females and one in the midst for Hermaphrodites or Scrats and this untruth hath gon so far that there have bnene some that affirmed every of these seven cells to have bin divided into ten partitions into which the seed dispersed doth bring forth a divers and numerous encrease according to the variety of the cells furnished with the matter of seed which though it may seeme to have been the opinion of Hippocrates in his book De natura Pueri notwithstanding it is repugnant to reason and to those things which are manifestly apparent to the eyes and senses The opinion of Aristotle is more probable who saith twinnes and more at one birth are begot and brought forth by the same cause that the sixt finger groweth on the hand that is by the abundant plenty of the seed which is greater and more copious than can bee all taken up in the naturall framing of one body for if it all be forced
the growing heat some vehement concussion or jactation of the body be joined Therefore I thinke it manifest by these experiments and reasons that it is not fabulous that some women have beene changed into men but you shall finde in no history men that have degenerated into women for nature alwaies intends and goes from the imperfect to the more perfect but not basely from the more perfect to the imperfect CHAP. VI. Of monsters caused by defect of seed IF on the contrary the seed be any thing deficient in quantity for the conformation of the infant or infants some one or more members will be wanting or more short and decrepite Hereupon it happens that nature intending twinnes a childe is borne with two heads and but one arme or altogether lame in the rest of his limbes The effigies of a monstrous childe by reason of the defect of the matter of seed Anno Dom. 1573. I saw at St. Andrewes Church in Paris a boy nine yeeres old borne in the village Parpavilla sixe miles from Guise his fathers name was Peter Renard and his mother Marquete hee had but two fingers on his right hand his arm was well proportioned from the top of his shoulder almost to his wrest but from thence to his two fingers ends it was very deformed he wanted his leggs and thighes although from the right buttocke a certaine unperfect figure having onely foure toes seemed to put it selfe forth from the midst of the left buttock two toes sprung out the one of which was not much unlike a mans yard as you may see by the figure In the yeere 1562. in the Calends of November at Villa-franca in Gascony this monster a headlesse woman whose figure thou heere seest was borne which figure Dr. John Altinus the Physitian gave to mee when I went about this booke of Monsters he having received it from Fontanus the Physitian of Angolestre who seriously affirmed he saw it The figure of a monstrous woman without a head before and behind A few yeeres agone there was a man of forty yeeres old to be seene at Paris who although he wanted his armes notwithstanding did indifferently performe all those things which are usually done with the hands for with the top of his shoulder head and necke hee would strike an Axe or Hatchet with as sure and strong a blow into a poast as any other man could doe with his hand and hee would lash a coach-mans whip that he would make it give a great crack by the strong refraction of the aire but he ate drunke plaid at cardes and such like with his feet But at last he was taken for a thiefe and murderer was hanged and fastened to a wheele Also not long agoe there was a woman at Paris without armes which neverthelesse did cut sew and doe many other things as if she had had her hands We read in Hippocrates that Attagenis his wife brought forth a childe all of flesh without any bone and notwithstanding it had all the parts well formed The effigies of a man without armes doing all that is usually done with hands The effigies of a monster with two heads two legs and but one arme CHAP. VII Of monsters which take their cause and shape by imagination THe antients having diligently sought into all the secrets of nature have marked and observed other causes of the generation of monsters for understanding the force of imagination to bee so powerfull in us as for the most part it may alter the body of them that imagine they soon perswaded themselves that the faculty which formeth the infant may be led and governed by the firme and strong cogitation of the Parents begetting them often deluded by nocturnall and deceitfull apparitions or by the mother conceiving them and so that which is strongly conceived in the mind imprints the force into the infant conceived in the wombe which thing many thinke to be confirmed by Moses because he tells that Jacob encreased and bettered the part of the sheepe granted to him by Laban his wives father by putting roddes having the barke in part pulled off finely stroaked with white and greene in the places where they used to drinke especially at the time they engendered that the representation apprehended in the conception should be presently impressed in the young for the force of imagination hath so much power over the infant that it sets upon it the notes or characters of the thing conceived We have read in Heliodorus that Persina Queene of Aethiopia by her husband Hidustes being also an Aethiope had a daughter of a white complexion because in the embraces of her husband by which she proved with childe she earnestly fixed her eye and mind upon the picture of the faire Andromeda standing opposite to her Damascene reports that he saw a maide hairy like a Beare which had that deformity by no other cause or occasion than that her mother earnestly beheld in the very instant of receiving and conceiving the seed the image of St. John covered with a camells skinne hanging upon the poasts of the bed They say Hippocrates by this explication of the causes freed a certain noble woman from suspicion of adultery who being white her selfe and her husband also white brought forth a childe as blacke as an Aethiopian because in copulation she strongly and continually had in her minde the picture of the Aethiope The effigies of a maid all hairy and an infant that was blacke by the imagination of their Parents There are some who thinke the infant once formed in the wombe which is done at the utmost within two forty dayes after the conception is in no danger of the mothers imagination neither of the seed of the father which is cast into the womb because when it hath got a perfect figure it cannot be altered with any external form of things which whether it be true or no is not here to be enquired of truly I think it best to keep the woman all the time she goeth with childe from the sight of such shapes and figures The effigies of a horrid Monster having feet hands and other parts like a Calfe In Stecquer a village of Saxony they say a monster was borne with foure feet eyes mouth and nose like a calfe with a round and redde excrescence of flesh on the fore-head and also a piece of flesh like a hood hung from his necke upon his backe and it was deformed with its thighes torne and cut The figure of an infant with a face like a Frog Anno Dom. 1517. in the parish of Kings-wood in the forrest Biera in the way to Fontain-Bleau there was a monster borne with the face of a Frog being seen by John Bellanger Chirurgian to the Kings Engineers before the Justices of the towne of Harmoy principally John Bribon the Kings procurator in that place The fathers name was Amadaeus the Little his mothers Magdalene Sarbucata who troubled with a feaver by a womans perswasion held
wonderfull effect which Celandine hath upon the sight was learnt by the practise of Swallowes who have bin observed with it to have besmeared and so strengthened the eyes of their young Serpents rubbe their eyelids with fennell and are thought by that meanes to quicken and restore the decaying sight of their eyes The Tortois doth defend strengthen her selfe against the biting of Vipers by eating of savorie Beares by eating of Pismires expell that poison that they have contracted by their use of Mandrakes And for correction of that drowzinesse and sloth which growes upon them by their long sleepe in their dens they eate the herbe Aron i Cuckopint But the Art they use in the entising and catching of Pismires is very pretty They goe softly to the holes or hilles of the Pismires and there lay themselves all their length upon the ground as if they were dead hanging out their tongue wet with their foame which they draw not againe into their mouth before they feele them full of Pismires which are intised by the sweetnesse of the foame And having taken this as a purging medicine they expell by the guts those ill humors wherewith they were offended Wee see that Dogges give themselves a vomit by eating of a kinde of grasse which is from thence called Dogge-grasse Swine when they finde themselves sicke will hunt after smalt or river lobsters Stockdoves Blackbirds and Partridges purge themselves by bay leaves Pigeons Turtels and all sort of Pullen disburden themselves of grosse humors by taking of Pellitory of the wall The bird Ibis being not much unlike the Storke taught us the use of Clisters For when he finds himselfe oppressed with a burden of hurtfull humors he fills his bill with saltwater and so purgeth himselfe by that part by which the belly is best discharged The invention of the way of removing the Cataract of the eye wee must yeeld unto the Goate who by striking by chance against the thorny bushes pulls off the Cataract which hinders the sight and covers the ball of the eye and so recovers his sight The benefit of Phlebotomie we owe unto the Hippotamus or River-horse being a kinde of Horse and the inhabitant of the river Nilus who being a great devourer when hee finds himselfe surcharged with a great deale of bloud doth by rubbing his thigh against the sharpe sands on the bankeside open a veine whereby the superfluous bloud is discharged which he stoppeth likewise when it is fit by rowling himselfe in the thicke mudde The Tortois having chanced to eate any of the flesh of a Serpent doth make origanum and marjerom her Antidote The ancients found helpe from brute beasts even against the dreadfull and none-sparing force of lightning for they were of opinion that the wings of an Eagle were never strucke with lightning and therefore they put about their heads little wreathes of these feathers They were perswaded the same thing of the Seale or Sea-calfe and therefore were wont to encompasse their bodies with his skinne as a most certaine safegard against lightning It were a thing too long and laborious to speake of all those other muniments of life and health observed here and there by Aristotle and Plinie which we have learnt of brute beasts I will therefore end this Chapter after that I have first added this That we are beholding to beasts not onely for the skill of curing diseases and of preservation of health but for our foode our raiment and the ornament and beautifying the bodies Of the Faculty of brute Beasts in Presaging THe first knowledge and skill of Prognostication and observation of weather by the Aire was first delivered unto us from beasts of the land and water and from fowle For we see in daily observation that it is a signe of change of weather when Lambes and Rammes doe butt at one another with their hornes and playing wantonly doe kicke and keepe up their heeles The same is thought to bee presaged when the Oxe lickes himselfe against the haire and on the sodaine fills the Aire with his lowing and smells to the ground and when he feedes more greedily than he used to doe But if the Pismires in great multitudes fetch their prey so hastily that they runne and tumble one upon another in their narrow pathes it is thought a signe of raine As is also the busie working of Moales and the Cats rubbing and stroaking of her head and necke and above her eares with the bottome of her feete Also when Fishes play and leape a little above the water it is taken for a signe of raine But if the Dolphins doe the same in the sea and in great companies it is thought to presage a sodaine storme and tempest Whereby the Marriners forewarned use all care possible for the safetie of themselves and their shippes and if they can cast Anchor And it is sufficiently knowne what the louder croaking of Frogges than ordinary portends But the facultie of birds in this kinde of presaging is wonderfull If Cranes flie through the aire without noise it is a signe of faire weather and of the contrary if they make a great noise and flie stragglingly As also if Sea-fowle flie farre from the sea and light on the land The crie or scritching of Owles portends a change of the present weather whether foule or faire Plutarch saith that the loude cawing of the Crow betokens windes and showres as also when he flappes his side with his wings Geese and Duckes when they dive much and order and prune and picke their feathers with their beakes and crie to one another foretell raine and in like manner Swallowes when they flie so low about the water that they wet themselves and their winges And the Wren when he is observed to sing more sweetly than usuall and to hop up and downe And the Cocke when he chants or rather crowes presently after the setting of the Sunne And Gnats and Fleas when they bite more than ordinary If the Herne soare aloft into the aire it betokeneth faire weather if on the contrary he flie close by the water raine If Pidgeons come late home to the Dove-house it is a signe of raine If Bats flie in the evening they foreshew wet weather And lastly the Crocodile layes his egges in that place which must be the bounds of the overflowing of the river Nilus And therefore he that first meetes with these egges tels the rest of the countrie people and shewes them how high the floud will rise and what inundation it will make upon their grounds A thing most worthy of admiration that in this monster there should be that strong facultie of presaging Of the Industry of Fishes MAny sea-Fishes when they feele a tempest comming doe gravell or balast themselves to the end they may not be tossed up and downe at the pleasure of the waves Others when the fury of the sea is at the hight hide themselves in the
him it being for his owne good And in like manner he getts into the Whales mouth and there lodging himselfe sleepes when he sleepes and leaves him not either by day or night Of Cranes CRanes when they are to take a long journey into some Countrey crosse the seas put their company in so good order that no Captaine can put his soldiers in better For before they stir out of any place they have as it were their trumpets to call them together and encourage them to fly They come together and then fly up on high that they may see a far off choosing a Captaine whom they are to follow They have their Serjants to take care of their rankes and keepe their nightly watches by turnes Plutarch tells us that the Crane which is appointed to stand Sentinell for all the rest holds a stone in her foote to the end that if she chance to give way to nature and sleepe she may be waked by the noise of the falling stone The leader lifting up his head and stretching out his long necke lookes about him farre and wide and gives warning to the rest of any danger that may befall them The strongest leade the way that they may the better with the flapping of their wings breake the force of the aire and this they doe by turnes And that they may the easilier prevaile against the force and opposition of the winds they dispose their company into a wedge in the forme of the Greeke letter Î or a triangle and being skilfull in the starres they foresee when tempests are comming and fly downe to the ground to keepe themselves from the injury of the approaching storme Of Geese THe Geese of Sicilie doe with great warinesse take care that by their ceeking and their noyse they doe not expose themselves to the rapacity of Birds of prey for Plutarch sayth that when they are to fly over the hill Taurus for feare of the Eagles that are there they hold stones in their mouthes to keepe themselves from gaggling untill that they come unto a place where they may be secure Of Dragons NEither are the Dragons lesse crafty for thus doe they overcome those vaste and otherwise invincible beasts the Elephants They lye in ambush and suddainly set upon the Elephants where they feare no such matter and involve their leggs with the twines of their taile in such sort that they are not able to goe forward and stop their nosthrils with their heads so that they cannot fetch their breath they pull out their eyes and wheresoever they find the skin most tender there they bite and sucke the blood untill they make them fall downe dead Pliny sayth that there are Dragons found in Aethiopia of ten Cubits long but that in India there are Dragons of an 100. foot long that fly so high that they fetch Birds and take their prey even from the midst of the cloudes Of the Fish called the Fisherman THis Fish is called the Fisherman because he hunts and takes other Fishes which he doth almost by the same cunning which the Cuttell uses for he hath hanging at his throat a certaine bagge like the Wattells of a Turckycocke This when hee listeth he casteth out and layeth before the little fishes for a baite and then by litle and litle drawes it up againe untill he catch for food the litle fishes seazing upon it as a prey Of the Cuttell Fish VVOnderfull is the craft of the Cuttell Fishes for they carry a bladder at their necke full of a blacke juice or Inke which they poure forth as soone as they feele themselves taken that so they may blinde the eyes of the Fishermen as Plutarch saith and as Aristotle witnesseth they with their long fangs doe not onely hunt and take little Fishes but oftentimes also Mullets Of the Armes or weapons of brute beasts BRute beasts are naturally so furnished with armes that they have no neede to get make or borrow in any other place And some of them neverthelesse are so furnished with such armes that they captivate those which hold them prisoners an example of this is the Torpedo which doth not onely hurt by touch but also by the net being betweene he breathes such a quality from him as stupifies the hands of the Fishermen so that they are forced to let goe their nets and so let him goe moreover if it touch a ship it makes it stay Thevet writes that the Persian bay towards Arabia nourishes a Fish equall in length and thicknesse to a Carpe on every side encompassed with sharpe and strong pricks like our Porcupine with which hee fights against all kinds of fish If a man chance but to be lightly hurt either with these or his teeth he will dye within 24. houres Of the fish Vtelif HEe saith moreover that as he was carryed by force of tempest through the Atlanticke Ocean he saw this fish having as it were a Saw in his forehead of three foot long and foure fingers broad armed on each side with sharpe spikes They call it Vtelif in their Country speech Of the fish Caspilly THere is another fish to be seene in the Arabian Gulfe which the Arabians call Caspilly it s two foot long and as many broad it hath a skin not much unlike a Dogfish but armed with spikes one whereof he carryes in his forehead a foot and halfe broad in sharpenesse and force of cutting not much short of a graver or chissell with this weapon when she is opprest with hunger she assailes the first fish shee meets neither doth she give over before she carry her as a prey whither she please as Thevet saith he hath seene Of Crabs CRabs and Lobsters though in the quantity of their body they be but small yet they use their forked clawes before not onely in feeding but also in defending themselves and assailing others Of the Docility of Beasts and first of the Dog BEasts are apt to learne those things which men desire whereby they shew themselves not wholy void of reason For Dogges Apes and Horses learne to creepe thorough the Iuglers hoopes and rise on their hinder feet as though they would dance Plutarch tells that a Iugler had a Dog which would represent many things upon the stage befitting the occasion and argument of the play amongst the rest hee exceeded all admiration in that that taking a soporificke medicine hee excellently feigned himselfe dead for first as taken with a giddinesse in his head he begun to tremble then presently fell down and lying on the ground as it were contracted his dying members and lastly as if truely dead he waxt stiffe and moreover suffered himselfe diversly to be fitted according to divers parts of the Theater the fable so requiring But when he by those things that were said and done knew it was time to rise he first begun to move his legs by litle and litle as if hee had been wakened from
are extended all together as it were with an unanimous consent the whole member is wrinkled as contracted into it selfe as on the contrary it is extended when they are relaxed Some of these are bestowed upon the animall parts to performe voluntary motions others upon the vitall to performe the agitation of the Heart and Arteries others upon the naturall for attraction retention and expulsion Yet we must observe that the attraction of no simular part is performed by the helpe of the foresaid fibers or threds but rather by the heat implanted in them or by the shunning of Emptinesse or the familiarity of the substance The flesh also is a simple and soft part composed of the purer portion of the blood insinuating it selfe into the spaces betweene the fibers so to invest them for the uses formerly mentioned This is as it were a certaine wall and Bulwarke against the injuries of heat and cold against all falls and bruises as it were a certaine soft pillow or cushion yeelding to any violent impression There be three sorts of flesh one more ruddy as the musculous flesh of perfect creatures and such as have blood for the flesh of all tender and young things having blood as Calves and also of all sorts of fish is whitish by reason of the too much humidity of the blood The second kinde is more pallid even in perfect creatures having blood such is the flesh of the heart stomacke weasond guts bladder wombe The third is belonging to the entrails or the proper substance of each entrail as that which remaines of the Liver the veines arteries and coate being taken away of the bladder of the Gall braine kidneys milt Some adde a fourth sort of flesh which is spongy and that they say is proper to the tongue alone A veine is the vessel pipe or channel of the blood or bloody matter it hath a spermaticke substance consists of one coate composed of 3 sorts of fibers An Artery is also the receptacle of blood but that spirituous and yellowish consisting in like manner of a spermaticke substance But it hath two coats with three sorts of fibers the utmost whereof is most thin consisting of right fibers and some oblique But the inner is five times more thicke and dense than the utmost interwoven with transverse fibers and it doth not onely conteine blood and spirit but also a serous humor which wee may beleeve because there bee two emulgent Arteryes aswell as veines But the inner coat of an Artery is therefore more thick because it may containe blood which is more hot subtle and spirituous for the spirit seeing it is naturally more thin and light and in perpetuall motion would quickly flye away unlesse it were held in a stronger hold There is other reason for a veine as that which containes blood grosse ponderous and slow of motion Wherefore if it had acquired a dense and grosse coate it could scarse bee distributed to the neighbouring parts God the maker of the universe foreseeing this made the coats of the vessels contrary to the consistance of the bodyes contained in them The Anastomosis of the veines and Arteryes that is to say the application of the mouthes of the one to the other is very remarkeable by benefit of which they mutually communicate and draw the matters contained in them and so also transfuse them by insensible passages although that anastomosis is apparent in the veine and artery that meet together at the Ioint and bending of the Arme which I haue sometimes shewed in the Physicke schooles at such time as I there dissected Anatomyes But the action or function of a muscle is either to move or confirme the parte according to our will into which it is implanted which it doth when it drawes it selfe towards its originall that is to say it 's head But wee define the head by the insertion of the nerve which wee understand by the manner of the working of the Muscle CHAP. XI Of the Muscles of the Epigastrium or lower belly NOw seeing that wee haue taught what a muscle is and what the differences thereof are and what simple and compound parts it hath and what the use action and manner of action in each part is it remaines that wee come to the particular explication of each Muscle begining with those of the lower belly as those which we first meet withall in dissection These are 8 in number 4 oblique 2 on each side two right or direct one on the right another on the left side and in like manner 2 transverse All these are alike in force magnitude and action so mutually composed that the oblique descendant of one side is conjoined with the other oblique descendant on the other side and so of the rest We may adde to this number the 2 little Supplying or Assisting muscles which are of a Pyramidal forme and arise from the share-bone above the insertion of the right muscles Of the oblique muscles of each side the one ascends the other descends whereupon it comes to passe that they are called the Oblique descendant and Ascendant Muscles Those oblique which wee first meet with are the descendant whose substance is partly sanguine partly spermaticke for they are fleshy nervous ligamentous veinous arterious and membranous Yet the fle shy portion is predominant in them out of which respect Hippocrates is wont to expresse the muscles by the name of fleshes their greatnes is indifferent betweene the large and the small muscles their figure 3 square They are composed of the fore-mentioned parts they are two in number their site is oblique taking their beginning from the touching of the great saw Muscle and from the sixt and seventh true ribbes or rather from the spaces between the sixe lower ribbes and rather on the forepart of the muscles than of the ribbes themselues from whence shunning the Veriebra's of the loines the fleshy parts of them are terminated in the externall and upper eminency of the Haunch-bone and the Membranous end in the lower eminency of the share-bone and the White-line Yet Columbus dissenting from this common description of the oblique Muscles thinks that they are onely terminated in the White line and not in the share-bone For saith he wherefore should they be inserted into the share-bone which is not moved But because it would bee an infinite labour and trouble to set downe at large the severall opinions of all Authors of Anatomy I haue thought it sufficient for me to touch them lightly by the way Their connexion is with the oblique ascendant lying vnder them and with the direct or right Their temperament is twofold the one hot and moist by reason of the belly and the fleshy portion of them the other cold dry in respect of their ligamentous and tendinous portion Their action is to draw the parts into which they are inserted towards their originall or els to unite them firmely Yet each of these
leading vessels descending to the hornes of the wombe but to the rest of the body by the vessels and the nerves arising from the holy bone and costall nerves They are of a colder Temper than mans The ejaculatorie or leading vessels in women differ thus from mens they are large at the beginning and of a veinie consistance or substance so that you can scarse discerne them from the coate Peritonaeum then presently they become nervous and waxe so slender that they may seeme broken or torne though it be not so but when they come nearer to the hornes of the wombe they are againe dilated in their other conditions they agree with mens but that they are altogether more slender and short They have a round figure but more intricate windings than mens I beleeve that these windings might supply the defect of the varicous Parastats They are seated betweene the testicles and wombe for they proceede out of the head of the testicle than presently armed with a coate from the Peritonaeum they are implanted into the wombe by its hornes The twelfth Figure of the Wombe A. The bottome of the wombe laid open without any membrane BB. The necke of the wombe turned upward CD a part of the bottome of the wombe like the nut of the yard swelling into the upper part of the necke of the wombe in the middle whereof the orifice appeareth EE a membrane knitting the wombe to the Peritonaeum and holding togethe vessels thereof F. the left testicle G. the spermaticall veine and artery H. a part of the spermaticall vessells reaching unto the bottome of the wombe I. one part of the vessels comming to the testicles * a vessell leading the seede unto the wombe K. the coate of the testicle with the implication of the vessels L. the cavitie of the bladder opened M. the insertion of the Vreters into the bladder N. the Vreters cut from the kidneies O. the insertion of the necke of the bladder into the lap or privitie The second Figure aa The spermaticall veine and artery bb branches distributed to the Peritonaeum from the spermaticall vessels c. the bottome of the wombe d. the necke of the wombe e. certaine vessels running through the inside of the wombe and the necke thereof ff vessels reaching to the bottome of the wombe produced from the spermaticall vessell gg the leading vessell of seede called Tuba the Trumper hh a branch of the spermaticall vessell compassing the trumpet ii the testicles kk the lower ligaments of the wombe which some call the Cremasteres or hanging muscles of the wombe l. the lap or privitie into which the Cremasteres doe end m. a portion of the necke of the bladder The third Figure aa the spermaticall vessels bb a branch from these spermaticall vessels to the bottome of the wombe cc. the body or bottome of the wombe d. the necke of the same e. the necke of the bladder ending into the necke of the wombe ff the tefticles gg the leading vessels commonly though not so well called the ejaculatory vessels hh the division of these vessels one of them determining into the hornes at double kk ii the other branch ending in the necke by which women with child avoid their seede kk the hornes of the wombe The fourth Figure AB The bosome of the bottome of the wombe at whose sides are the hornes CD a line like a suture or seame a little distinguishing that bosome EE the substance of the bottome of the wombe or the thicknesse of his inner coate F. a protuberation or swelling of the wombe in the middle of the bosome G. the orifice of the bottome of the wombe HH the coate or second cover of the bottome of the wombe comming from the Peritonaeum IIII. a portion of the membranes which tie the wombe KK the beginning of the necke of the wombe L. the necke of the bladder inserted into the necke of the wombe m. the Clitoris in the toppe of the privity n. the inequalitie of the privitie where the Hymen is placed o. the hole or passage of the privitie in the cleft p. the skinny caruncle of the privitie CHAP. XXXIIII Of the Wombe THe Wombe is a part proper onely to women given by nature instead of the Scrotum as the necke thereof and the annexed parts in stead of the yard so that if any more exactly consider the parts of generation in women and men he shall finde that they differ not much in number but onely in situation and use For that which man hath apparent without that women have hid within both by the singular providence of Nature as also by the defect of heate in women which could not drive and thrust forth those parts as in men The wombe is of a nervous and membranous substance that it may be more easily dilated and contracted as neede shall require The magnitude thereof is diverse according to the diversitie of age the use of venery the flowing of their courses and the time of conception The wombe is but small in one of unripe age having not used venery nor which is menstruous therefore the quantititie cannot be rightly defined The figure of the wombe is absolutely like that of the bladder if you consider it without the productions which Herophilus called hornes by reason of the similitude they have with the hornes of Oxen at their first comming forth It consists of simple and compound parts The simple are the veines arteries nerves and coates The veines and arteries are foure in number two from the preparing spermaticke vessels the two other ascend thither from the Hypogastricke after this manner First these vessels before they ascend on each side to the wombe divide themselves into two branches from which othersome goe to the lower part of the wombe othersome to the necke thereof by which the menstruous bloud if it abound from the conception may be purged Nerves come on both sides to the wombe both from the sixt conjugation descending by the length of the backe bone as also from the holy bone which presently united and joyned together ascend and are distributed through the wombe like the veines and arteries The utmost or common coate of the wombe proceeds from the Peritonaeum on that part it touches the holy bone but the proper it hath from the first conformation which is composed of the three sorts of fibers of the right on the inside for the attraction of both seedes the transverse without to expell if occasion be the oblique in the midst for the due retention thereof The wombe admits no division unlesse into the right and left side by an obscure line or seame such as we see in the Scrotum but scarse so manifest neither must we afterthe maner of the ancients or imagine any other cels in the womb For by the law of nature a woman at one birth can have no more than two An argument hereof is they have no more than
Basilica running obliquely and bestowing surcles upon the muscles that issue from the externall protuberation This branch descendeth together with the fourth nerve q division of the Basilica into two branches and that is noted with q is ever accompanied with an arterye s a branch of this veine bestowed upon the skin of the arme t a branch of the Basilica which together with the branch of the Cephalica marked with h makes the mediana or middle veine marked wirh a. u a branch of the Basilica going to the inner head of the arme xx a branch issuing out of the former that creepeth along unto the wrist and toward the little finger conjoining it selfe with a branch of the Cephalica y A veine running out unto the skinne at the outside of the cubit Vpper Z. A propagation issuing out of a branch of the Basilica marked with t. Lower z. A branch of the Basilica x goeing to the in-side of the Arme. a. The Median or common veine β The partition of the Median veine above the wrist This division should have beene made above γ. γ. The Externall branch of the partition which goeth to the outside of the head δ From which issueth a small branch to the inside ãâã The internall branch under ãâã which toward the middle and the ring finger is especially disposed que The veine of the thumbe dispersed into the mountenet or hillock which is conjoyned with the branch noted with δ ζ the trunke of the hollow veine from which issue branches unto the parts seated under the liver ãâã The fatty veine called Adiposa sinistra which goeth unto the fat of the kidnies θ μ The two Emulgents which leade wheyey bloud unto the kidnies λ μ the two spermaticall veines leading the matter of the seede unto the testicles V the beginning of the bodden vessell called vas varicosum ξ the veines of the loynes called Lumbares which are sent in the knots or knees to the rackebones to the marrow of the backe to the muscles that lies upon the loines and to the Peritonaum ο the bifurcation of the hollow veine into the Iliacke branches which bifurcation is not unlike λ. Ï Muscula superior a transverse branch going to the muscles of the Abdomen and to the Peritonaenm Ï Ï the division of the left Iliacke veine into an inner branch at Ï and an utter at Ï. Ï Muscula media the utter propagation of the branch Ï distributed through the muscles of the coxa and the skin of the buttockes ν An inner propagation of the same branch Ï which goeth unto the holes of the holy bone Ï the veine called Sacra which goeth to the upper holes of the holy bone Ï Ï the veine Hypogastrica distributed to the bladder to the muscles of the fundament and the neck of the womb Ï A veine arising from the utter branch marked with Ï which is ioyned with some branches of the internall veine neare the holes or perforations of the share bone È Î¹ A veine which when it hath passed the share bone distributeth one branch into the cup of the coxendix and to the muscles of that place Ï Another small branch which runneth under the skinne at the inside of the thigh Ï The congresse or meeting of the foresaid veine with a branch marked with char 2. and distributed into the legge I The Epigastricke veine a propagation of the utter branch Ï perforating the Peritonaeum whereto as also to the muscles of the Abdomen and the skinne it offereth branches the chiefe branch of this veine is joyned with the descending mammary above the navell at M. Î Pudenda an inner propagation of the branch Ï running overthwart unto the privities Î Saphaena or the ancle veine or the inner branch of the crurall trunke which creepeth through the inside of the legge under the skinne unto the tops of the toes Î the first interior propagation of the Saphaena offered to the groine Î The utter propagation thereof divided to the foreside or outside of the thigh Î The second propagation of the Saphaena going to the first muscle of the legge ãâã The third propagation of the Saphaena going to the skinne of the whirle-bone and unto the hamme Ï The fourth propagation of the Saphaena dispersing his muscles forward and backward Ψ Branches from this unto the foreside of the inner ankle to the upper part of the foote and to all the toes Ω Ischias minor called also muscula interior the utter branch of the crurall trunke divided into the muscles of the coxendix and to the skinne of that place 1 2 And this also may be called muscula 1 the exterior and lesser which passeth into some muscles of the legge ãâã the interior greater and deeper unto the muscles of the thigh 3 4. The veine called Poplitea made of two crurall veines divided under the knee 5 From this a surcle is reached upward unto the skinne of the thigh 6. But the greater part runnes by the bent of the knee under the skinne as farre as the heele 7 Also to the skinne of the outward ankle 8 The veine called Suralis or calfe veine hecause it runneth unto the muscles that make the calfe of the legge 9 The division of the Surall veine into an exterior trunke 9 and an interior 14. 10 11 The division of the exterior trunke under the knee into an externall branch which along the brace attaineth unto the muscles of the foot 11 and in internall 12 13 12 13 Which descending along the outside of the legge to the upper part of the foote is cloven into divers branches and in the backe of the foot mixeth it selfe with Poplitea or the hamme veine 20. 14 The interior branch of the Surall veine which runneth into the backside of the leg 15 A branch hereof descending to the inside of the heele and the great toe and is divided into divers surcles 17 Ischias maior issuing out of the internall trunke at 14 and running through the muscles of the calfe 18 A propagation hereof derived unto the upper part of the foot affoording two surcles to every toe 19 the remain of the inner trunke 14 behind the inner ankle approcheth to the bottome of the foote and is consumed into all the toes 20 the commixtion of the veine Poplitea with the surall or calfe-branch at 13. But when it arives to the basis of the lower part of the head it is divided into more branches one wherof is carried to the muscles of the bone Hydis the Larinx the tongue and the lower part of the tongue in which place it is commonly opened in squinancies and other inflammations of the mouth and to the coate of the nose Another is carried to the Dura mater passing on both sides through a hole situate under the bone mastoides and besides ascending to the bone of the backe part of the scull it comes obliquely to the upper part of the suture lambdoides where these branches meeting together passe into
expulsion in vomiting and breaking of winde These two coats are continued with the two coats of the stomacke and have the like site Besides the Gullet hath these parts composing it as a veine from the Gate and Hollow ascendent veine a nerve from the sixt conjugation an Artery from that which creepes alongst the bottome of the stomacke with the vena Gastrica or else from the Arteryes ascending the hollow part therof but also besides all these vessels it may have a third coat from the membrane investing the Ribs or Pleura The magnitude of the Gullet is large enough yet some be bigger some lesse according to the variety of bodyes The figure of it is round that so it might be more large to swallow meat and lesse subject to offence It is placed betweene the backe bone and the weazon from the roots of the tongue even to the stomacke But as it discends alongst the backe bone when it comes to the fourth Vertebra of the Chest it turnes to the right side to give way to the great Artery Aorta and the descendent Artery then it turnes to the left side to the stomacke or mouth of the ventricle Nature hath fastened it to the Diaphragma with strong membranous tyes lest that if it had laine upon the Artery it should have hindred the passage of the vitall spirit to the lower parts It is onely one and that tyed to the forementioned parts both by its vessels and membranes It is of temper rather cold than hot as all those parts which are more nervous than fleshy are The Action thereof is to draw and carry downe the meat and to cast forth such things by vomit as trouble the stomacke Here you must note that whilest we swallow downe the Gullet is drawne downewards and the weazon upwards which is the cause that wee cannot sup and blow swallow and breathe together at the same instant which wee must thinke to happen by Gods singular providence to whose name be glory for everlasting Amen The End of the fourth Booke THE FIFTH BOOKE OF THE ANIMALL parts contained in the Head CHAP. I. A Generall description of the Head HAving hitherto declared two generall parts of mans body that is the Naturall and vitall it is now fit to betake our selves to the last that is the Animall beginning with the head Whrefore we will first define the head then divide it into its parts thirdly describe each of these parts fourthly demonstrate them after the order they offer themselves to our sight in dissection The head therefore is the seat of the senses the Pallace and habitation of reason and wisedome from whence as from a fountaine infinite actions and commodities arise It is seated above the rest of the body that the Animall spirit from thence as from a tower may governe and moderate the whole body and performe all actions according to the praescript of nature By the head we understand all that which is contained from the Crowne of the head to the first vertebra of the neck The best figure of the head is round lightly flatted on each side extuberating something to the fore and hinde part thereof For from hence is taken an argument of the goodnesse of the senses on the contrary those which are exactly round or acuminate and sharp towards the top are not thought good The head is devided into the face forehead temples the forepart the crowne and hinde part By the face we understand whatsoever is contained between the Eye-browes and the lower part of the chin By the forehead all the space from the eye-browes even to the Coronall future By the temples whatsoever is hollowed from the lesser Corner of the eye even to the eares By the forepart of the head whatsoever runnes in length from the top of the forehead or the Coronall suture even to the suture lambdoides and on each side to the Ossa petrosa the stony bones or scaly sutures By the Crowne we signifie a certaine point exquisitely in the midst of the Sagittall future which is suffyciently knowne By the Occiput or hindepart of the head that which is terminated by the suture lambdoides and the first vertebra of the neck Of all these parts there be some simple some compound besides some are containing some contained Of the containing some are common to all the parts of the head as the skinne the fleshy pannicle and pericranium others are proper to certaine parts as the fleshy panicle to the neck face forehead and skin covering the Cranium the common coat of the muscles to the fat and face The skull and both the Meninges to the braine The parts contained are the substance of the braine the foure ventricules and the bodyes contained in them the nerves the mamillary processes the Plexus Choroides or Rete Admirabile the Glandula Basilaris and others of which we will speak hereafter Wee must now speak of the containing parts beginning with the skinne for the order of teaching requires that we take our Exordium from the more simple but first we will say some thing of the haires The haire is nothing els than an excrement generated and formed of the more grosse and terrene portion of the superfluities of the third concoction which could not be wasted by insensible transpiration The benefite of it is that consuming the grosse and fuliginous or sooty excrements of the braine it becomes a cover and ornament for the head This haire of the head and eye-browes have their originall from the first conformation of the infant in the wombe the rest of the haires of the body arise and grow forth as the body growes and becomes more dry of which sort are the haires which cover the Chin armeholes groines and other parts of our bodyes CHAP. II. Of the musculous skinne of the Head commonly called the hairy scalpe and of the Pericranium THe skinne which covers the Scull and is covered with the haire is farre more fleshy thick hard and dry than any other part of the body especially which wants haire The skinne hath almost the like condition of quality as those parts have which it doth simply cover but is as it were lost in them or growne into one with them as in the lips and forehead with the fleshy pannicle wherefore it is there called musculous in other places it adheres to the gristles as on the sides of the nosethrilles and corners of the Eyes whereupon it is there called gristlely It hath connexion with the Pericranium because joined to it it receives nerves from the first and second vertebra of the necke and from the third conjugation of the braine which are disseminated through all its substance whereby it comes to passe that the wounds contusions and impostumes that happen in or upon this skinne are not to be neglected The Pericranium but I suppose it should be the Periostium is a most thin membrane which next and immediately covers
the diversitie of their composition Wherefore hence forward concerning the substance temper and other circumstances of such parts as we shall omit you may have recourse to those things which we have written in the Demonstration of the simple and simular parts of which these organicall are composed as if any should aske of what temper the Larinx is you shall answere of a colde dry and hot and moist because it consists both of a gristlely and fleshly substance Hee which reckons up all the parts of the mouth must not omit that gristlely and membranous body which arises from the roots of the tongue which that it might be more quicke for motion that is whereby it might be more easily erected and depressed for those things which are more soft doe continually slide away but those which are too hard cannot be bended it was convenient it should be neither too hard nor too soft that it might be erected whilest we breath but depressed when wee swallow It is a principall instrument of the voyce for it cannot be well articulated unlesse the way were straite Therefore it straitens that way and the passage of the gristles of the throttle but specially the Arytenoides it is alwayes moist by a certaine native and inbred humiditie wherfore if it happen to be dried by a fever or any other like accident the speach is taken away It is bound on both sides by the common membrane of the mouth to the sides of the Arytenoides even to the backe part thereof that so like a cover it may open and shut the orifice of the throtle that none of the meat and drinke in swallowing may fall into the weazon in such aboundance as may hinder the egresse and regresse of the aire For we must not thinke that this body doth so closely shut the orifice of the throttle but that some small quantitie of moisture alwayes runnes downe by the inner sides as the walles thereof to moisten the lungs other-wise Eclegma's should be of no use in the diseases of the Chest And because that this litle body is partaker of voluntarie motion therefore according to the opinion of some there are foure muscles bestowed upon it two which may open it and two that shut it on each side one The opening muscles descend from the roote of the bone Hyoides and in their insertion growing into one they are terminated in the roote of this body that is the Epiglottis in the backe part thereof The shutting muscles in those creatures where they are found arise on the inside betweene the coate gristle thereof Truly I could never observe and finde these foure muscles in a man though I have diligently and earnestly sought for them but I have alwayes observed them in beasts Therefore some have boldly affirmed that this litle body in swallowing lyes not upon the orifice of the Throttle unlesse when it is pressed downe by the heavines of such things as are to be swallowed but that at all other times by reason of the continuall breathing it stands upright the Throttle being open There remaine as yet to be considered two small bosomes or cavities or rather fissures which nature hath hollowed in the very throttle under the Epiglottis on each side one that if by chance any of the meat or drink should fal or slip aside in the Larinx it might be there stayed reteined Beside that the Aire too violently entring should be in some sort broken by these clifts or chinkes no otherwise than the blood and spirit entring into the heart through the Auricula or Eares thereof CHAP. XVI Of the Necke and the parts thereof FIrst we will define what the neck is then prosequute the parts therof aswel proper as common especially those of which we have not as yet treated For it were superfluous to speake any more of the skin the fleshy pannicle the veines arteries nerves gullet weazon muscles ascending descending to the parts into which they are inserted alongst the necke wherefore you must not expect that we should say any thing of the neck more than to describe the Vertebrae or rack bones being the proper parts therof the ligaments aswell those proper to the neck as those which it hath in common with the head lastly the muscles aswel those it hath in common with the head chest as those of its own Therfore the neck is nothing elss then a part of the head which is conteined between the nowle bone the first vertebrae of the back First in the neck the Vertebra's must be considered we must shew what they have proper peculiar what common amongst themselves that we may the more easily shew the originall and insertion of the muscles growing out of them ending in them The neck consists of seven Vertebrae or Rack-bones in which you must consider their proper body and than the holes by which the spinall marrow passes thirdly the Apophyses or processes of the Vertebrae fourthly the holes through which the nerves are disseminated into other parts from the spinal marrow besides the perforations of the transverse productions by which the veines arteries which we cal Cervicales ascend alongst the necke lastly the connexion of these same vertebrae or Rack-bones For the first by the body of the vertebrae we understand the forepart therof upon which the gullet lyes For the hole that is not alwaies the largest in those vertebrae which are nighest the head but it is alwayes encompassed with the body of the vertebrae besides with three sorts of processes except in the first Rack-bone that is right transverse oblique By right we understand these extuberancies in the Racke-bones of the necke which are hollowed directly in the upper part of them rise up crested on each side to susteine and receive the basis of the Rack-bone which is set upon it By the oblique processes wee understand the bunchings outby which these Rack-bones are mutually knit together by Ginglymos these are seated between the righr transverse processes By the transverse we understand the protuberations next the body which devide the Vertebra or Rackbone in a straight line These processes are perforated that they may give to the before described veines arteries which entring the Spinall marrow by the holes of the nerves nourish the Racke-bones parts belonging to them Besides you must note that the perforations of the Rack-bones of the neck by which the nerves proceed from the spinall marrow to the ourward parts are under the transverse processe that is growing or made by the upper lower vertebra contrary to all the other which are in the rest of the Rack-bones For the connexioÌ of the Rack-bones you must know that all the Vertebrae of the spine have six connexions two in their own bodies and 4 in their oblique processes By the two first connexions they are so mutually articulated in their owne bodies
that each are joyned with other both above and below But by the 4 other by their oblique ascendent descendent processes on each side 2 they are so mutually inarticulate that as the fourth Rack-bone of the neck by its oblique ascendent processes is received of the descendent processes of the third Racke-bone so it receives the oblique ascendent processes of the first by its oblique descendents for alwayes the oblique ascendents are received and the descendents receive Yet wee must except the first Rack-bone of the neck which is conteined with 4 connexions by his lower oblique processes by its upper by which it receives the oblique processes both of the nowle bone of the second Rack-bone The second Vertebra or Rack-bone must also be excepted which is holden by 5 connexions that is to say foure by its oblique processes the fifth by its own body by which it is knit to the body of the third Vertebra But we must note that wheras nature hath not given a Spine to the first Rack-bone yet it hath given it a certaine bunch or extuberancy instead therof in like manner seing it makes no common passage with the second Vertebra for the passage forth of the nerve it is perforated at the sides of its body and it is made very thin on the fore side as if it were without body that it might receive the fore processe raised in the upper body of the second Racke-bone which Hippocrates calles the tooth to which the principall Ligament of the head is fastened which descends within from the hinde part of the head under the Apophyses clinoides or processes of the wedge-bone Table 20. Figure I. Sheweth all the racke-bone of the backe knit together Figure 2. Sheweth the fore and upper face of the necke c. See D. Crooke pag. 398. From A to B the seven vertebres of the necke From C to D The twelve vertebres of the chest From E to F The five rack-bones of the Loynes From G to H The Os sacrum or Holy-bone consisting commonly of 6. vertebrae From I to K The bone Coccyx or the rump-bone according to the late writers LL The bodies of the vertebrae M The transverse processes of the vertebrae N The descendent processes OO The ascendent processes PP The backward processes QQ The holes that are in the sides of the vertebrae through which the nerves are transmitted RR A gristly Ligament betwixt the vertebrae A 2 3 4 The hole whereout the marrow of the backe issueth B 2 3 The cavity which admitteth the root of the second rack-bone C 3 4 A cavity or Sinus in the same place crusted over with a gristle D 2 A prominence in the outward region of this Sinus EF 2 3. The Sinus or cavity of the first racke-bone which admitteth the 2. heads of the nowle-bone GG 2 3 4. the transverse processe of the 1. Vertebra H 1 The hole of this transverse processe I 3. The Sinus which together with the cavity of the nowle-bone marked with I maketh a common passage prepared for the nerves K 3 4 A rough place where the spine of the first racke is wanting LL 4 Two cavities of the first racke receiving the 2. bunches of the second racke marked with MN MN 5 6 The 2. bunches of the second racke which fall into the cavities of the first O 7 The appendix or tooth of the second racke P 5 A knub of this appendix crusted over with a gristle Q 6 The backside of the tooth R 6 the Sinus or cavity of the same about which a transverse Ligament is rowled containing the said tooth in the cavity of the first racke ST 6. Certaine cavities at the sides of the tooth whence the roots issue of the fore-branch of the second paire of sinews V 5 the point of the tooth X 3. An asperity or roughnesse where is a hole but not thrilled through Y 6 A cavity of the second racke which together with the cavity marked with Z maketh a hole through which the nerves doe issue Z 4 the Sinus of the first racke a 5 6 7 the double spine of the second racke b 5 6 7 the transverse processe of the second rack c 7 the hole of the said transverse processe d 6 7 the descending processe of the second rack whose cavity is marked with d in the 6. figure e 6 7 the place where the body of the second rack descendeth downward f. gg 8 the lower side of the body of the third rack at f the two eminent parts of the same at gg hi 8 the ascending processes l m 8 the two descending processes n o p q 8 the transverse processes r 8 9 the spine or backward processe st 8 the two toppes of the spine u 9 the descending processe of the third rack x 9 the ascending processe y the transverse processe of the third rack α 8 9 the hole of this transverse processe β 9 the upper hollowed part of the body of the third rack δ 9 the Sinus or cavity which maketh the lower part of a hole through which the conjugations of the nerves are led ε 7 the upper part of the same hole And by this articulation the head is bended forewards and backewards as it is moved to the sides by the articulation of the first Racke-bone with the second That processe is bound by two Ligaments the first of which being the greater and broader is externall comprehending in the compasse thereof all the upper articulation ascending from the Racke-bones to the head or rather descending from the head to them as any other Ligament going from one bone to another The other is the stronger and also encompasses the articulation mixing its selfe with the gristle which by its interposition binds together all the Racke-bones the first excepted as you may see in pulling asunder the Racke-bones of a Swine and the whole Spine or Backe-bone is tyed together and composed throughout with such Ligaments The Holy bone is composed of 4. Vertebrae or rather of five or sixe as in the figure following Besides the Rumpe-bone it receives and holds fast the Ossa Ilium or Hanch-bones and is as a Basis to all the Racke-bones placed above it whereby it comes to passe that the Racke-bones from the head to the Holy-bone grow still thicker because that which supports ought to be bigger than that which is supported There is a certaine moysture tough and fatty put between the Rack-bones as also in other joints to make them glib and slippery that so they may the better move Whilest this motion is made the Racke-bones part one from another The commodities or uses of the Spine are said to be foure The first is that it is as it were the seat and foundation of the composure and construction of the whole body as the Carkasse is in a ship The second that it is a way or passage for the marrow The third is because it containes and preserves the same The
fourth is that it serves for a wall or bulwarke to the entrailes which lye and rest upon it on the inside And because we have fallen into mention of Ligaments it will not be amisse to insert in this place that which ought to be knowne of them First therefore we will declare what a Ligament is then explaine the divers acceptions thereof and lastly prosecute their differences Therefore a Ligament is nothing else than a simple part of mans body next to a bone and Gristle the most terrestriall and which most usually arises from the one or other of them either mediatly or immediatly and in the like manner ends in the one of them or in a Muscle or in some other part whereby it comes to passe that a Ligament is without blood dry hard and cold and without sense like the parts from whence it arises although it resemble a Nerve in whitenesse and consistence but that it is somewhat harder A Ligament is taken either generally or more particularly in generall for every part of the body which tyes one part to another in which sense the skin may be called a Ligament because in containes all the inner parts in one union So the Peritonaum comprehending all the naturall parts and binding them to the backe-bone so the membrane inuesting the Ribbs that is the Pleura containing all the vitall parts thus the membranes of the braine the nerves veines arteryes muscles membranes and lastly all such parts of the body which bind together and conteine other may be called Ligaments because they binde one part to another as the nerves annexe the whole body to the braine the Arteries fasten it to the heart and the veines to the liver But to conclude the name of a Ligament more particularly taken signifies that part of the body which we have described a little before The differences of Ligaments are many for some are membranous and thin others broad othersome thicke and around some hard some soft some great some little some wholy gristlely others of a middle consistence betweene a bone and a gristle according to the nature of the motion of the parts which they binde together in quicknesse vehemency and slownesse We will shew the other differences of Ligaments as they shall present themselves in dissection CHAP. XVII Of the Muscles of the Necke THe Muscles of the necke as well proper as common are in number twenty or else twenty two that is ten or eleven on each side of which seven only move the head or the first vertebra with the head the other 3 or 4 the necke it self Of the 7 which move the head with the head the first Vertebra some extend erect it others bend and decline it others move it obliquely but all of them together in a successive motion move it circularly and the like judgement may be of the Muscles of the Necke The fourth Figure of the Muscles This Figure sheweth the cavities of the middle and lower bellies the bowels being taken out but most part of the bones and muscles remaining AB The first musclebending the necke called Longus C C The second bender of the necke called Scalenus D D D D The outward intercost all muscles E E E E The inner intercostall muscles F F F The second muscle of the chest called serratus maior G The first muscle of the shoulder-blade called sârratus minor separated from his originall H The first muscle of the arme called Pectoralis separated from his originall I The second muscle of the arme called Deltoides K The bone of the arme without flesh L The first muscle of the cubite called Biceps M The second muscle of the cubit called Brachiaus N The clavicle or coller-bone bent backward O The first muscle of the chest called subclavius P The upper processe of the shoulder-blade Q The first muscle of the head called obliquus inferior R The second muscle of the head called Complexus S The fourth muscle of the shoulder blade called Levator TV The two bellies of the fourth muscle of the bone Hyois X X a a The fist muscle of the backe whose originall is at a a. Y Y b b c c The sixt muscle of the thigh called Psoae whose originall is at c c and tendon at b b. Z Z The seaventh muscle of the thigh d the holy bone o o o the holes of the holy bone out of which the nerves doe issue e A portion of the fist muscle of the thigh arising from the share-bone f the share-bone bared k the ninth muscle of the thigh or the first circumactor The fifth Figure of the muscles in which some muscles of the head Chest arme and shoulder-blade are described I The processe of the shoulder-blade called the top of the shoulder O The fourth muscle of the arme or the greater round muscle to which Fallopius his right muscle is adjoyned which some call the lesser round muscle Q Q The sixt muscle of the arme or the upper blade-rider X The second muscle of the shoulder-blade or the Levator or heaver Z the second muscle of the chest or the greater Saw muscle Y the fifth muscle of the chest or muscle called Sacrolumbus αβ His place wherein he cleaveth fast to the longest muscle of the backe γγ the Tendons of the muscle obliquely inserted into the ribs ÎÎ the first paire of the muscles of the head or the Splinters Ch. 8. 9 their length whose beginning at 8 and insertion at 9. 10 11. the sides of this muscle 12 that distance where they depart one from the other 13 the two muscles called Complexi neare their insertion Φ the second muscle of the backe or the Longest muscle Ω the fourth muscle of the backe or the Semi-spinatus δ the shoulder-blade bare p A part of the transverse muscle of the Abdomen The sixth Figure of the muscles shewing some of the muscles of the Head Backe Chest Shoulder-blade and Arme. A D the second paire of the muscles of the head or the two Complexi the first part is at A D. B C. the second part E F the third part rising up under G and inserted at F. G the fourth part of this muscle or the right muscle of the head according to Fallopius which Vesalius made the 4. part of the 2. G G Betwixt the ribs the externall Intercostall muscles L the originall of the 2. muscle of the backe M His tendons at the racke-bone of the necke The upper O the fourth muscle of the arme or the greater round muscle O O the lower the 6 muscle of the chest or the Sacrolumbus hanging from his originall Q the sixt muscle of the arme or the upper Bladerider inverted V the third ligament of the joynt of the arme X the fourth muscle of the shoulder-blade or the heaver Z the second muscle of the Chest or the greater Saw-muscle ãâã the 3. muscle of the necke called Transuersalis Ï the 4. muscle of the necke called Spinatus
inspiration But the first of the other muscles being as many in number which contract the Chest in expiration arising from the holy-bone and the oblique processes of the loines ascends firmely and confusedly adhering with the Musculus sacer or holy-muscle which we shall describe hereafter to the roots of the twelve ribbes imparting in the ascent a small tendon to each of them by which it drawes these ribbs towards the transverse processes and by reason of its Originall it is called Sacrolumbus that is the Holy loine-muscle The second third and fourth which we said were the oblique descendent right and transverse of the Epigrastium have beene formerly described in their place But by the way you must note that these three muscles of the Epigastrium helpe expiration rather by accident than of themselves to wit by driving backe the midriffe towards the lungs by the entrailes which also they force upwards by drawing the parts into which they are inserted towards their Originall The fifth which we called the Triangulus or Triangular may be called the Compressor of the gristles which proceeding from the inner sides of the Sternon goes to all the gristles of the true ribbes this is more apparent under the Sternon in beasts than in men though it be not very obscure in them neither For the internall Intercostall muscles in my judgement they arise from the lower sides of the upper ribbe and descending obliquely from the fore part backwards are inserted into the upper side of the ribbe next under it so that they may follow the production of the fibers of the externall Intercartilaginei as the sixe internall Intercartilaginei follow the site of the externall Intercostall proceeding from behinde forwards wherefore as well the Intercostall as the Intercartilaginei every where intersect each other after the similitude of the letter X. I know some have written that the internall muscles whether intercostall or Intercartalaginei ascend from the upper sides of the lower ribbe forwards or backwards But if this were true it would follow that these muscles admitted their nerves in their taile and not in their head seeing the nerve alwayes goes under the ribbe and not above it The last muscle of the Chest that is the Diaphragma or Midriffe is sufficiently described before wherefore it remaines wee describe the muscles of the Loines These are sixe in number on each side three equall in thicknesse strength and situation one of these bends and the other two extend the Loines it is called by reason of the figure the Triangulus or Triangular which bends the Loines it ascends from a great part of the hinde side of the Hanch-bone into the transverse processes of the Loines and the last of the Chest on the inside for which cause it is made of fibers short long and indifferent answering to the nearenesse or distance of the said processes The first of the extenders is called the Semispinatus because even to the middle of its body it takes the originall from the spines of the holy-bones and Loines this with its oblique fibers ascends from all the said spines to the transverse processes as well of the Loines as Chest The other is called Sacer the Holy-muscle because it takes its originall from the Holy-bone or the sides thereof it ascends with its oblique fibers to the spines of the Loines and of the eleaven lower Rack-bones of the Chest CHAP. XIX Of the Muscles of the Shoulder-blade NOw we must describe the muscles of the extreme parts and first of the Arme taking our beginning from these of the Shoulder-blade But first that we may the better understand their description we must observe the nature and condition of the shoulder-blade Therefore the blade bone on that part which lies next unto the ribbs is somewhat hollowed wherefore on the other side it some what buncles out It hath two ribbs one above another below by the upper is ment nothing else than a border or right line which looking towards the temples is extended from the exterior angle thereof under the collar-bone even to the Processe Coracoides which this ribbe produces in the end thereof By the lower the underside which lies towards the lower belly and the short ribbs Besides in this shoulder-blade we observe the basis head and spine By the basts we understand the broader part of the shoulder-blade which lookes towards the backe-bone By the head we understand the narrower part thereof in which it receives the head of the Arme in a cavity indifferently hollow which it produces both by it selfe as also by certaine gristles which there fastened encompasse that cavity This kinde of cavity is called Glene This receives and containes the bone of the arme by a certaine strong ligament encompassing strengthening the joynt which kind of ligament is common to all other joints this ligament arises from the bottome of the cavity of the shoulder-blade and circularly encompasses the whole joynt fastening it selfe to the head of the arme there are also other ligaments besides this which encompasse strengthen this articulation By the spine is ment a processe which rising by little and little upon the gibbous part of the blade from the basis thereof where it was low and deprest becomes higher untill it ends in the Acromion or upper part thereof Nature hath made two productions in this bone that is to say the Acromion from the spine and the Coracoides from the upper side for the strengthening of the articulation of the arme and shoulder-blade that is left the arme should be easily strained upward or forwards besides it is fastened to the clavicle by the processe Acromion The muscles which move the shoulder-blade are sixe in number of which foure are proper and two common The first of the foure proper seated in the forepart ascends from the bones of five or sixe of the upper ribbs to the Coracoides which it drawes forwards and is called Serratus minor that is the Lesser saw-muscle which that you may plainely shew it is fit you pull the pectorall muscle from the collar-bone almost to the middle of the Sternon The other first opposite against it is placed on the fore side and drawes its originall from the three lower spines of the necke and the three upper of the Chest from whence it extends it selfe and ends into all the gristly basis of the shoulder-blade drawing it backwards it is called the Rhomboides The third from its action is called the Levator or the heaver or lifter up seated in the upper part it descends from the transverse processes of the foure first Vertebrae of the necke into the upper angle and spine of the blade The fourth called Trapezius or the Table-muscle is seated in the backe part and is membranous at the originall but presently becoms fleshy it arises from almost all the backe-part of the head from all the spines of the
tripartition of this branch where it toucheth the Cubit hh A branch distributed from the 4. nerve to the outward skin of the Cubite i the upper branch of the division of the 4. nerve kk A branch of i reaching to the outside of the hand ll the lower branch of the division of the 4. nerve passing through the backside of the Cubite m the 5. nerve of the arme n Branches of this nerve dispersed here and there oo A branch of the 5. nerve reaching to the inside of the hand and the fingers p. A surcle of the branch o derived to the outside of the hand and the fingers qq the 6 nerve of the arme and the course thereof under the skin rr the intercostall nerves there cut off where they are together with the ribs reflected forward ss branches on each side running backward tt Nerves attaining unto the Chest uu the commixtion of the nerves rr with the descending branch of the 6. conjugation of the braine xx Nerves from the loynes led unto this place y A branch going to the testicle here cut off z A nerve reaching to the 1. muscle of the thigh c the 1. nerve of the leg αβ A surcle of the former nerve derived to the skin at α and inserted into the muscles at β. γ the 2. nerve of the leg δδδ A nerve from the former allowed unto the skin as low as to the foot and passing along the inside of the leg ε a branch of the 2. nerve running unto the muscles ζ the 3 nerve of the leg n a surcle thereof unto the skin θ another surcle unto the muscles ãâã the 4. nerve of the leg xx the anterior propagations of the nerves proceeding from the holybone λ the end of the spinall marrow μ a branch from the 4 nerve inserted into the muscles arising from the Coxendix or hip bone ν another branch going to the skin of the thigh on the backside ξ a propagation derived to the 4. muscle of the leg and to the skin of the knee oo nerves attaining to the heads of the muscles of the foote ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the division of the 4 crurall nerve into two trunks Ï a branch from the trunke Ï dispersed into the outward skin of the leg Ï a surcle of the trunke Ï derived to the muscles ν another surcle to the skin of the leg on the foreside a branch of the trunke Ï to the skin of the inside of the leg and of the foot Ï a surcle of the trunke Ï to the hindmost skin of the leg ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã a branch of the whole trunke Ï led along to the forward part of the leg and the soot Ï the descent of the trunke Ï into the foot But to come to the originall and insertion of these muscles the one of these two which move the arme forwards called by reason of his originall the Pectorall arising from more than halfe of the Collar bone and almost all the Sternon and the 6 7. and 8 Rib goes up and fastens it selfe to the Coracoides by a membrane or a membranous tendon sufficiently strong for which cause it is said to be common to the shoulder arme and it goes into the arme betweene the muscles Deltoides and Biceps with a strong tendon composed of fibers crossing each other of which some descend from the Collar-bone and the upper part of the Sternon others ascend from the lower originall hereof that is from the 6 7 and 8 Ribs and although the action of this muscle be diverse by reason of the diversity of its fibers arising from divers places yet alwayes it drawes the arme forwards whether it be moved upwards downwards or to the Brest the other which is his companion descends from the whole lip or brow of the simous or hollow part of the Blade which it fills in the forepart of the arme neere the head thereof For the two Levatores or the Lifters up of the arme the first named Deltoides descends from almost halfe the Clavicle the processe Acromion and all the spine of the shoulder-blade into the foreside of the arme the bredth of foure fingers below the joynt It hath divers actions according to the diversity of the fibers as also every muscle hath yet howsoever it is contracted whether by the fibers from the clavicle alone or by the spinall alone or by both at once it alwayes lifts and heaves the arme upwards The other which is his associate descends from the gibbous part of the Shoulder-blade conteined betweene the upper rib therof the spine between the processes Acromion and Coracoides to the neck of the arme and this we will call the Epomis or Scapularis that is the shoulder Muscle But the first and larger of the two muscles which draw the arme backwards arises from the greatest part of the utter lip of the gibbous part of the shoulder-blade which is under the spine therof lying upon the blade it self it goes into the hind part of the arme above the neck thereof The other which is coÌtiguous to it his partner in working but lesser passes from the upper and exteriour part of the lower rib of the shoulder-blade and thence as it were in some sort extending it self upon the gibbous part therof neere unto that rib it goes into the arme This muscle seemes to be the same with the former being fleshy without even above the top of the shoulder One the lesser of these two which draw downwards enters out from the streight line of the lower Rib of the blade goes into the lower part of the arme about the neck therof The other called the Latissimus or broadest ascends from the spines of the holy-bone of the Loynes often also from the nine lower of the Chest by the lower corner of the shoulder-blade into which it is inserted by a membranous tendon as also it is into the inner part of the arme neere unto the necke by another strong tendon wherupon this muscle is called a common muscle of the shoulder and arme But when this muscle happens to be wounded the arme cannot easily be stretched forth or lifted up CHAP. XXVI The Description of the bones of the Cubit and the muscles moving them AFter these muscles follow those which bend extend the cubit but because their insertion cannot be fitly demonstrated unlesse the bones of the cubit be first described therefore first of all we will deliniate the bones themselves But verily lest this doubtful word cubit should cause obscurity first we must note that it hath a threefold significatioÌ for ofttimes it is used for al that part of the hand which lies between the arme wrest oft times for the lower bone of this part somtimes for the upper part of this bone which is turned within the Orbe or Cavity of the arme no otherwise than a cord in the wheele of a Pulley and this is called the Olecranon Here
labour first to shew the bones and the dearticulation of these of the Thigh beginning with these bones which are knit with the upper part of the holy-bone And they are two in number on each side one commonly called the Ossa Ilium each of these is composed of three bones of which one is the upper another the lower and anteriour and the third the middle and after a manner the posteriour The upper by a particular name is called the Os Ilium the hanch-bone and it is the largest and biggest having a gristlely appendix in the compasse thereof even to the connexion it hath with the other neighbouring bones whose upper part we terme the right line thereof but the basis which is adjoyned to it by Simphysis we call the lippe or brow therof because it stands both somewhat out and in after the manner of the brow But that which lies betweene the basis and straight line we name the ribbe this same upper bone hath two hollow superficies the one internall the other externall The connexion thereof by Symphysis is two-fold the one with the upper part of the holy-bone the other with that bone wee called the middle and after some sort the posteriour which taking its beginning from the narrower part of the Os Ilium makes that cavity in which the head of the thigh is received this cavity the Greekes call Cotyle the Latines Acetabulum and it is ended by the side of the hole common to it and the share-bone this middle and in some sort posteriour bone is called properly and particularly the Os Ischij or huckle-bone and containes nothing else but the forementioned cavitie but that on the hinde and lower part thereof it brings forth a processe which adjoynes it selfe to the share bone at the lower part of the common hole in which place it appeares very rough and unequall and it is called the tuberositie of the huckle-bone at whose extremity also it brings forth a little head somewhat resembling the processe of the lowerjaw called Corone The third bone named Os pubis or the share-bone flretches it selfe even to the highest part of the pecten where meeting with the like bone of the other side it is united to it by Symphysis after which manner also all these three bones are united it is reported that this bone opens in women in their travell yet hitherto I can finde no certainety thereof The Figure of the Thigh-bone A 1 2. The head of the thigh going into the cup of the hip-bone B 2 A sinus in the head of the thigh into which is inserted a round Ligament C 1 2 The conjunction of the appendix of the thigh with the bone it selfe D 1 2 3 the necke of the thigh E F the two lower heads of the thigh G 1 2 The conjunction of the lower appendix H 1 12 A sinus betwixt the two heads of the thigh K 2 A part of the lower head of the thigh from whence the first muscle of the foote doth proceede L 2 Another part from whence the second and first muscles arise M 2 Another part to which the Tendon of the fift muscle of the thigh is infixed N 1 2 A sinus of the out-ward side of the head for the fourth muscle of the legge O 2 A sinus of the inside through which the tendons doe passe P 2 A protuberation at which the said tendons are reflected Q 2. the upper processe of the thigh and betwixt Q and D is the sinus R 1 2 the union of the processe with the thigh S S 2 a rough line from the impression of the externall processes T 1 the anterior impression of the internall processes e betwixt T and V another impression higher than the former V 1 2 the fourth impression in the toppe of the processe X 3. Foure X shew the foure appendices of the thigh Y 3 Three Y shew the three heads of the thigh Z Z 3 Two processes of the thigh a 1 the interior processe of the thigh b 1 the conjunction of the processe with the thigh c c 2 a line descending obliquely from the inner processe d d 2 a line running through the length of the thigh e 2 the largenesse of the thigh in this part f 1 a roughnesse from which the eight muscle issueth g h 5 a knub of the Whirle-bone going into the sinus marked with I which is betwixt the heads of the thigh i 5 a sinus sitted for the inner head of the thigh k 5 a sinus agreeing with the externall head of the thigh l 5 the lower asperity or roughnesse m 4 the foreside of the pattell or whirle-bone rough and unequall You may perceive a manifest separation of these three bones in the Sceleton of a child for in those who are of more yeares the gristles which runne betweene these connexions turne into bones Now followes the thigh-bone the biggest of all the bones of the body it is round and so bended that it is gibbous on the exteriour and fore part thereof that so it might be the safer from externall injuries but on the hinde and inner part it is hollow or simous like to the backe of an Asse whereby the muscles might have a more commodious originall and insertion That simous part a little below the midst thereof is devided into two lines the one whereof goes to the internall tuberositie the other to the externall of the lower appendix of the same thigh These are chiefely to be observed because the oblique fibers of the vaste muscles thence take their originall Besides this bone hath two appendices in the ends thereof as easily appeares in a childs thigh the upper appendix makes the round head of the thigh it selfe which as every other appendix seated upon a long necke is received in the cavitie of the hanch-bone by Enarthrosis it is staied and fastened there by two sorts of ligaments of which the one is common proceeding from the muscles which descend from above about the necke thereof the other is proper which is twofold that is one membranous and broad proceeding from the whole cavity of the orbe or cuppe descending about all the head of the thigh above the necke thereof the other thicke and round descending from the second cavity of the Cotyle it selfe which is extended even to the common hole at the top of the head thereof Besides under this head that bone hath two processes the one great and thicke the other little and short The greater seated in the hinde part is called the great Trochanter the lesser situate in the inner part is named the little Trochanter But you must note that the great Trochanter on the higher and hinde part thereof which lookes towards the head of this bone makes a certaine small sinus or bosome into which the twin muscles and others whereof we shall hereafter speake are implanted we must also consider the multitude of holes encompassing this necke betweene the head and
and two vaste muscles into the fore part of the thigh even to the whirle-bone of the knee But we must note that these foure last muscles make a common thicke and broad tendon with which they couer the Patella or whirle-bone and all the fore dearticulation of the knee that they cannot be separated without tearing wherefore we must thinke that this tendon serves the knee for a ligament now all these muscles performing their action together extend the legge The five hinde muscles follow to be spoken of of which three arise from the tuberositie of the huckle-bone going into the inner part the fourth from the middle of the Pubis called Biceps that is the two headed muscle into the outside of the legge Of the internall one passing froÌ the forementioned tuberositie descends ligamentous even into the midst of the thigh and then becomming fleshy is inserted by its tendon after the manner we formerly mentioned The other being slender passing forth also from the same place with its tendon is inserted with the tendon of the long muscle and ends in the inner part of the legge which with its companion it drawes inwardly and brings to the other which same thing it performes in the thigh by the helpe of the three headed muscle The third being the inner or hinder descends from the middle part of the share-bone with a broad and slender ligament and is inserted with a round tendon into the inner part of the legge after the manner of the fore-mentioned The fourth called Biceps takes one of the two heads of which it consists from the last mentioned tuberositie the other from the outer line of the thigh but is inserted into the externall part of the legge as we formerly said The fifth and last called the Popliteus descends obliquely fleshly from the externall condyle or knot of the thigh into the inner and hinder part of the legge at the joyning thereof to the shinne-bone the action thereof is to draw the legge after a manner inwards CHAP. XXXVIII Of the Bones of the Foote THe Order of Anatomy requires that we now prosecute the muscles moving the foote but because we should in vaine deliver their insertion the disposition and condition of the bones of the foote not being first known wherefore it first behoves us to set forth their description Therefore the bones of the foote are sixe and twenty in number distinguished into three ranks that is the bones of the Tarsus or Instep are seven these of the Pedium the afterwrest or backe of the foote five and those of the toes foureteene Of the seven bones of the instep there are 4. named and 3. unnamed The first of the named immediately following the bones of the legge is called Astragalus the pasterne or ankle-bone This hath three connexions one as we said before in the upper and broader part with the bones of the legge of which it is received the other in the lower and hinde part by which it receives the upper and inner processe of the bone of the heele the third on the foreside by which it is received in the cavitie of the Os naviculare or Scaphoides that is the boate-like-bone By the first connexion the foote is extended and bended by the second it is moved with the heele to the sides the two first connexions are by Diarthrosis the last by Synarthrosis But it is strengthened by strong and broade ligments descending and ascending from one bone into another also they are strengthened by membranes muscles and tendons descending to the foote above and under these joints But this bone hath 3. processes as 3. feete fastened to the bone of the heele of which the first and least is under the outer anckle the bigger which Galen saith makes a round head fastened on a long necke lookes towards the fore part of the foote over against the great toe and the next toe to it the middlemost is at the heele behinde the legge-bone I passe over in silence many other things as the smoothnesse and asperity or roughnesse of the bone which I had rather you should learne by ocular inspection than by booke The second bone lying under this is called the Calcaneum or heele-bone being the biggest of all the bones of the foote upon which all the body relies when we go It hath two upper processes the one great the other little The great is received in the hinde and outer processe of the Astragalus the lesser is received on the inside in the 3. processe of the same bone which we said had a round head fastened to a long neck Besides it is round on the hinde part and much disioyned from the legge-bone but on the fore and longer part it is knit by Synarthrosis to the Die-bone whose lower and inner part it seemes to receive the superficies thereof is wholy unequall and rising up with many swellings On the inner side it makes as it were a channell so to give way as well to the vessels as tendons going to the sole of the foote and toes Lastly we must consider the holes by which the vessels passe into that bone to give it nourishment by reason of which vessels the fracture of this heele-bone is very dangerous because of the pressing and contusion of the vessels as Hippocrates shewes For the ligaments of this heele or heele-bone they are such as these of the Astragalus to wit tendons membranes and ligaments properly so called comming from one bone to another The third bone of the foote is named Scaphoides or boate-like from the resemblance it hath to a boate for on that part which lookes towards the posterne bone it is hollow but on that part which is next the three Innominata or namelesse bones which it sustaines and of which it is received as it in the cavity thereof receives the head of the Astragalus it is gibbous like the bottome of a boate The connexions thereof are by Synarthrosis and they are strengthened by the fore-mentioned ligaments this same bone is arched on the upper part but somewhat hollowed or flatted below the inner part ends in a point like the prow of a ship but the outer obtuse like the sterne of a shippe The fourth bone of these which have names is called the Cuboides from the resemblance of a Die although that similitude be very obscure On the fore part it sustaines the toes which by a certaine proportion to the fingers of the hand may be called the Ring and little toes but it is sustained on the hinde part with the backe part of the heele on the inner side it is joyned with the boat-like-bone and that namelesse bone which sustaines the middle toe on the outside it produces a rising like the backe of an Asse which on the lower part is extended transversly all the length thereof at the two sides of this eminency or rising there are two small cavities in the forme of a channell
so that unlesse nature had otherwise provided a sufficient receptacle for the head of this bone as by the ligameÌts of the neighbouring Muscles it would otherwise have bin in perpetuall danger of dislocation Thus the Arme-bone is fastened to the shoulder-blade Gynglymos when the bones mutually receive each other such like composition hath the Cubit and Arme-bone or more straitly as by synarthrosis wheÌ the bones are more straitly knit so that they can performe no motions in the body Of this Articulation there are also 3 kinds that is Gomphysis as when one bone so receives another as a Pin is fastened in the hole made by a peircer thus the teeth are fastened in the Iawes Sutura like a Saw or teeth of a combe as the bones of the scul are mutually knit together or as scales or tiles are laid after which manner the stony bones are fastened to these of the Synciput Harmonis which is by interposition of a simple line which parts bones abutting one upon another as the bones of the Nose An Epitome or briefe recitall of all the Muscles of mans body As I have formerly reckoned up the bones so here I have decreed to recite the muscles of mans body Wherefore in the face we first meet with the broad or skin muscle arising from the flshy pannicle covering the whole necke almost all the face Then follow 4 perteining to the upper eye-lids In the Orbs of the eyes lye 14 that is 7 in each Orbe of which 4 are called right two oblique and one pyramidall Then succeed 4 of the nose two externall on each side one and two internall these draw it together and the other open it After these come the ten muscles of the lower Iaw of which two are called the Crotaphitae or Temporall two Masseteres or Grinders two round which seeme to me rather to perteine to the lips than to this Iaw two litle ones hid in the mouth arising from the winged processe of the wedge-bone two openers of the mouth being nervous or tendinous in their midst Then follow the 8 muscles of the lips that is 4 of the upper and as many of the lower shutting and opening the mouth The tongue with his ten muscles is hid as it were in the den of the mouth Wherfore the muscles of the whole face are 51. In the fore part of the neck are found the muscles of the bone Hyoides throtle now 8 muscles hold the bone Hyoides as equally ballanced of which there are 2 upper arising from the Chin 2 on the sides from the processe Styloides perforated in their midst through which the 2 openers of the mouth in that part nervous do passe 2 arise from the SternoÌ lastly 2 from the upper rib of the shoulder-blade to the Coracoides which also in their midst are nervous in which place the two Mastoidei lye upon them The Throtle composed of three gristles hath eighteene or twenty muscles of which sixe or eight are common and twelue proper Of the common there are two above two below and two at the sides of the first gristle to which wee may adde these two which serve for the opening of the Epiglottis which are alwayes found in great foure footed beasts for to presse downe the Epiglottis The proper are twelue which almost all of them come from the second gristle so to be inserted into the first and third of which some are before others behinde the Thyroides Besides these there are the Mastoidei which bend the head But in the backe part of the Necke there are twelue muscles also appointed for to move the head so that in all there are fourteene muscles serving for the motion of the head the two fore Mastoidei and the twelue hinde Muscles that is to say the two Splenij two Complexi foure Right and so many oblique which are very short so that they passe not beyond the first and second Vertebra The Necke hath eight Muscles of which two are called the long lying before upon the bodyes of the Vertebrae the two Scaleni which are at the sides the two Spinati which runne alongst the Spine the two transverse which goe to the transverse processes of the Chest The Chest hath 81 Muscles of which some are on the fore part some on the hinde others on the sides they are all combined or coupled together except the Midriffe Now of these there are the two Subclavij the two great Saw-muscles which proceed from the basis of the shoulder-blade the foure litle Rbomboides or square muscles that is two above and two below the two Sacrolumbi the two binders of the Gristles within the Chest Besides there are twenty and two externall and as many internall Intercostall muscles twenty foure Intercartilaginei that is twelue externall and as many internall so that the Intercostall and Intercartilaginei are 68 which with the twelue before mentioned make the number of 80 Muscles Adde to these the Midriffe being without an associate and you shall have the number formerly mentioned to wit 81. But also if you will adde to these the Muscles of the lower belly I will not much gainsay it because by accident they helpe inspiration and exspiration Wherefore of the eight muscles of the Epigastrium there are foure Oblique of which two are descendent and so many ascendent two right to which you may adde the two Assisting or Pyramidall muscles which come from the share-bone if it please you to separate them from the head of the right muscles There are sixe or eight Muscles of the Loynes of which two bend the loines which are the triangular the two Semispinati two Sacri two are in the midst of the backe which for that cause we may call the Rachitae or Chine-muscles Now that hereafter we may severally and distinctly set downe the muscles of the extreme parts will we come to the privities Where for the use of the Testicles there are two Muscles called the Cremasteres or Hanging Muscles At the roote of the yard or Perinaeum there are foure others partly for the commodious passing of the urine and seed and partly for erecting the yarde The Sphincter Muscle is seated at the Necke of the Bladder At the end of the right Gut are three Muscles two Levatores Ani or Lifters up of the fundament and one Sphincter or shutting Muscle Now let us prosequute the Muscles of the Extremities or Limbs But it will be sufficient to mention onely the Muscles of one side because seeing these parts of the body are double those things which are said of the one may be applyed to the other Wherefore the muscles of the Arme beginning with these of the shoulder-blade at the least are 42. for there are 4 of the shoulder-blade of the Arme properly or particularly so called seven or eight and there are three foure or five proper muscles of the Cubite that is appointed for the performance of the motions thereof in the
not obscurely be gathered by the writings of Galen But beware you be not deceived by the forementioned signes For sometimes in large Aneurismaes you can perceive no pulsation neither can you force the blood into the Artery by the pressure of your fingers either because the quantity of such blood is greater than which can be contayned in the ancient receptacles of the Artery or because it is condensate and concrete into Clods whereupon wanting the benefit of ventilation from the heart it presently putrifies Thence ensue great paine a Gangren and mortification of the part and lastly the death of the Creature The End of the Seventh Booke OF PARTICULAR TVMORS AGAINST NATVRE THE EIGHT BOOKE The Preface BEcause the Cure of diseases must be varied according to the variety of the temper not onely of the body in generall but also of each part thereof the strength figure forme site and sence thereof being taken into consideration I thinke it worth my paines having already spoken of Tumors in Generall if I shall treate of them in particular which affect each part of the body beginning with those which assayle the head Therefore the Tumor either affects the whole head or else onely some particle thereof as the Eyes Eares Nose Gumms and the like Let the Hydrocephalos and Physocephalos be examples of those tumors which possesse the whole head CHAP. I. Of an Hydrocephalos or watry tumor which commonly affects the heads of Infants THe Greekes call this disease Hydrocephalos as it were a Dropsie of the Head by a waterish humor being a disease almost peculiar to Infants newly borne It hath for an externall cause the violent compression of the head by the hand of the Midwife or otherwise at the birth or by a fall contusion and the like For hence comes a breaking of a veine or Artery and an effusion of the blood under the skinne Which by corruption becomming whayish lastly degenerateth into a certen waterish humor It hath also an inward cause which is the abundance of serous and acride blood which by its tenuity and heat sweats through the Pores of the vessells sometimes betweene the Musculous skinne of the head and the Pericranium sometimes betweene the Pericranium and the skull and sometimes betweene the skull and the membrane called Dura mater and otherwhiles in the ventricles of the braine The signes of it contained in the space betweene the Musculous skinne and the Pericranium are a manifest tumor without paine soft and much yeeelding to the pressure of the fingers The Signes when it remayneth betweene the Pericranium and the skull are for the most part like the forenamed unlesse it be that the Tumor is a little harder and not so yeelding to the finger by reason of the parts betweene it and the finger And also there is somewhat more sence of paine But when it is in the space betweene the skull and Dura mater or in the ventricles of the Braine or the whole substance thereof there is dullnesse of the sences as of the sight and hearing the tumor doth not yeeld to the touch unlesse you use strong impression for then it sincketh somewhat downe especially in infants newly borne who have their sculls almost as soft as waxe and the junctures of their Sutures laxe both by nature as also by accident by reason of the humor conteined therein moistening and relaxing all the adjacent parts the humor conteined here lifts up the Scull somewhat more high especially at the meetings of the Sutures which you may thus know because the Tumor being pressed the humor flyes backe into the secret passages of the braine To conclude the paine is more vehement the whole head more swollen the forehead stands somewhat further out the eye is fixt and immoveable and also weepes by reason of the serous humor sweating out of the braine Vesalius writes that hee saw a girle of two yeares old whose head was thicker than any mans head by this kinde of Tumor and the Scull not bonie but membranous as it useth to be in abortive birthes and that there was nine pound of water ran out of it Aâucrasis tells that he saw a child whose head grew every day bigger by reason of the watery moisture conteined therein till at length the tumor became so great that his necke could not beare it neither standing nor sitting so that hee died in a short time I have observed and had in cure foure children troubled with this disease one of which being dissected after it died had a braine no bigger than a Tennis Ball. But of a Tumor and humor conteined within under the Cranium or Scull I have seene none recover but they are easily healed of an externall Tumor Therefore whether the humor lye under the Pericranium or under the musculous skin of the head it must first be assailed with resolving medicines but if it cannot be thus overcome you must make an incision taking heede of the Temporall Muscle and thence presse out all the humor whether it resemble the washing of flesh newly killed or blackish blood or congealed or knotted blood as when the tumor bath beene caused by contusion then the wound must be filled with dry lint and covered with double boulsters and lastly bound with a fitting ligature CHAP. II. Of a Polypus being an eating disease in the Nose THe Polypus is a Tumor of the Nose against nature commonly arising from the Os Ethmâides of spungye bone It is so called because it resembles the fect of a Sea Polypus in figure and the flesh thereof in consistence This Tumor stops the Nose intercepting and hindering the liberty of speaking and blowing the Nose Celsus saith the Polypus is a caruncle or Excrescence one while white another while reddish which adheres to the bone of the Nose and sometimes fills the Nosthrils hanging towards the lipps sometimes it descends backe through that hole by which the spirit descends from the Nose to the throtle it growes so that it may he seene behinde the Vvula and often strangles a man by stopping his breath There are five kinds thereof the first is a soft membrane long and thin like the relaxed and depressed Vvula hanging from the middle gristle of the nose being filled with a Phlegmaticke and viscide humor This in exspiration hangs out of the Nose but is drawne in and hid by inspiration it makes one snaffle in their speech and snort in their sleepe The second hath hard flesh bred of Melancholy blood without adustion which obstructing the nosthrils intercepts the respiration made by that part The third is flesh hanging from the Gristle round and soft being the off-spring of Phlegmaticke blood The fourth is an hard Tumor like flesh which when it is touched yeelds a sound like a stone it is generated of Melancholike blood dryed being somewhat of the nature of a Scirrhus confirmed and without paine The fifth is as it were composed of many cancrous ulcers
either Or serving the principall as The Weason Lungs gullet Stomacke Gutts Bladder Or neither The Eares Nose Feete Hands and other of the same kinde From their proper essence from whence they are called Simple wounds When there is no complication of any other disease or symptome besides Or compound When there is a complication of some one or more diseases which unlesse they be taken away wee must not hope for to cure the wound From their quantity according to which they are called Great Long Broad Deepe Indifferent Little Short Narrow Super ficiarie From their figure according to which they are named Straight Oblique Cornered CHAP. II. Of the causes of Wounds ALL things which may outwardly assayle the body with force and violence may be counted the causes of wounds which are called greene and properly bloody These things are either animate or inanimate The animate as the bitings and prickings of beasts The Inanimate as the stroake of an arrow sword clubb gunne stone a dagger and all such like things From the variety of such like causes they have divers names for those which are made by sharpe and pricking things are called punctures those caused by cutting things are called wounds or gashes and those which are made by heavy and obtuse things are named Contusions or wounds with Contusions CHAP. III. Of the signes of Wounds WOunds are first knowne by sight and by the signes drawne from thence The Chirurgion ought first and chiefely to consider what wounds are cureable and what not what wounds will scarce admit of cure and what may be easily cured for it is not the part of a prudent Chirurgion to promise cure in a deadly or dangerous and difficult wound Least he may seeme to have killed him whom not the unsufficiencie of the Art but the greatnesse of the wound hath slaine But when the wound is dangerous but yet without despaire of recovery it belongs to him to admonish the Patients friends which are by of the present danger and doubtfull state of the wound that if Art shall be overcome by the greatnesse thereof hee shall not be thought ignorant of the Art neither to have deceived them But as this is the part and duty of a good and prudent Chirurgion so it is the tricke of a cheating and jugling knave to enlarge small wounds that so he may seeme to have done a great cure when it is nothing so But it is agreeable to reason that the Chirurgion professing the disease easie to be cured will thinke himselfe in credit bound by such promises and his duty and therefore seeke all meanes for the quicke recovery of the patient leât that which was of its owne nature small may by his negligence become great Therefore it is expedient he should know what wounds are to be accounted great This as Galen saith is three wayes to be knowne The first is by the magnitude and principallity of the part affected for thus the wounds of the Braine Heart and of the greater vessells though small of themselves yet are thought great Then from the greatnesse of the solution of continuity for which cause wounds may be judged great in which much of the substance of the part is lost in every dimension though the part be one of these which are accounted servile Then from the malignitie through which occasion the wounds of the joynts are accounted great because for the most part they are ill conditioned CHAP. IIII. Of Prognostickes to be made in VVounds THose Wounds are thought dangerous wherein any large Nerve Veine or Artery are hurt From the first there is feare of convulsion but from the other large effusion of the veinous or arterious blood whence the powers are debilitated also these are judged evill which are upon the arme pitts groines leskes joynts and betweene the fingers and likewise those which hurt the head or taile of a Muscle They are least dangerous of all other which wound onely the fleshy substance But they are deadly which are inflicted upon the Bladder Braine Heart Liver Lungs Stomacke and small guts But if any Bone Gristle Nerve or portion of the cheeke or prepuce shall be cut away they cannot bee restored Contused wounds are more difficult to cure than those which are onely from a simple solution of continuity for before you must thinke to heale them up you must suppurate and clense them which cannot be done in a short time Wounds which are round and circular are so much the worse for there can be no unity unlesse by an angle that is a meeting together of two lines which can have no place in round wounds because a circular figure consists of one oblique line Besides wounds are by so much thought the greater by how much their extremes and lipps are the further dis-joyned which happens to round Wounds Contrary to these are cornered wounds or such as are made alongst the fibers as such as may bee easily healed Wounds may be more easily healed in young men than in old because in them nature is more vigorous and there is a greater plenty of fruitefull or good blood by which the losse of the flesh may be the better and more readily restored which is slowlier done in an old body by reason their blood is smaller in quantity and more dry and the strength of nature more languide Wounds received in the Spring are not altogether so difficult to heale as those taken in Winter or Summer For all excesse of heate and cold is hurtfull to them it is ill for a convulsion to happen upon a Wound for it is a signe that some Nervous body is hurt the braine suffering together therewith as that which is the originall of the Nerves A Tumor comming upon great Wounds is good for it shewes the force of nature is able to expell that which is harmefull and to ease the wounded part The organicall parts wholly cut off cannot againe be united because a vitall part once severed and plucked from the trunke of the body cannot any more receive influence from the heart as from a roote without which there can bee no life The loosed continuity of the Nerves Veines Arteries and also the bones is sometimes restored not truely and as they say according to the first intention but by the second that is by reposition of the like but not of the same substance The first intention takes place in the fleshie parts by converting the Alimentary bloud into the proper substance of the wounded part But the second in the spermatique parts in which the lost substance may be repaired by interposition of some heterogeneous body which nature diligent for its owne preservation substitutes in place of that which is lost for thus the body which restores and agglutinats is no bone but a Callus whose originall matter is from an humor somewhat grosser than that from whence the bones have their originall and beginning This humor when it
alimentary juice to the braine wanting marrow that is blood to nourish it as we have formerly shewed in our Anatomie But from hence proceeds the effluxe of blood running betweene the scull and membraines or else betweene the membraines and braine the blood congealing there causeth vehement paine and the eyes become blinde vomitting is caused the mouth of the stomacke suffering together with the braine by reason of the Nerves of the sixt conjugation which runne from the braine thither and from thence are spread over all the capacitie of the ventricle whence becomming a partaker of the offence it contracts it selfe and is presently as it were overturned whence first these things that are conteined therein are expelled and then such as may flow or come thither from the neighbouring and communne parts as the Liver and Gall from all which choler by reason of its naturall levity and velocity is first expelled and that in greatest plenty and this is the true reason of that vomiting which is caused and usually followes upon fractures of the scull and concussions of the Braine Within a short while after inflammation seizes upon the membranes and braine it selfe which is caused by corrupt and putrid blood proceeding from the vessels broken by by the violence of the blow and so spread over the substance of the braine Such inflammation communicated to the heart and whole body by the continuation of the parts causes a feaver But a feaver by altering the braine causes Doting to which if stupidity succeed the Patient is in very ill case according to that of Hippocrates Stupidity and doting are ill in a wound or blow upon the head But if to these evills a sphacell and corruption of the braine ensue together with a ãâã difficulty of breathing by reason of the disturbance of the Animall facâ⦠which from the braine imparts the power of moving to the muscles of the Chest the instruments of respiration then death must necessarily follow A great part of these accidents appeared in King Henry of happy memory a little before he dyed He having set in order the affaires of France and entred into amitie with the neighbouring Princes desirous to honour the marriages of his daughter and sister with the famous and noble exercise of Tilting and hee himselfe running in the Tilt-yard with a blunt lance received so great a stroake upon his brest that with the violence of the blow the visour of his helmet flew up and the trunchion of the broken Lance hit him above the left eye-brow and the musculous skinne of the fore-head was torne even to the lesser corner of the left eye many splinters of the same trunchion being strucke into the substance of the fore mentioned eye the bones being not touched or broken but the braine was so moved and shaken that he dyed the eleaventh day after the hurt His scull being opened after his death there was a great deale of blood found betweene the Dura and Pia Mater poured forth in the part opposite to the blow at the middle of the suture of the hinde part of the head and there appeared signes by the native colour turned yellow that the substance of the braine was corrupted as much as one might cover with ones thumbe Which things caused the death of the most Christian King and not onely the wounding of the eye as many have falsly thought For wee have seene many others who have not dyed of farre more greevous wounds in the eye The history of the Lord Saint Iohns is of late memory he in the Tilt-yarde made for that time before the Duke of Guises house was wounded with a splinter of a broken Lance of a fingers length and thicknesse through the visour of his Helmet it entring into the Orbe under the eye and peircing some three fingers bredth deepe into the head by my helpe and Gods favour hee recovered Valeranus and Duretus the Kings Physitions and Iames the Kings Chirurgion assisting me What shall I say of that great and very memorable wound of Prancis of Loraine the Duke of Guise He in the sight of the Citty of Bologne had his head so thrust thorough with a Lance that the point entring under his right eye by his nose came out at his necke betweene his eare and the vertebrae the head or Iron being broken and left in by the violence of the stroke which stuck there so firmely that it could not be drawn or plucked forth without a paire of Smiths pincers But although the strength violence of the blow was so great that it could not be without a fracture of the bones a tearing and breaking of the Nerves Veines Arteries and other parts yet the generous Prince by the favour of God recovered By which you may learne that many die of small wounds and other recover of great yea very large and desperate ones The cause of which events is chiefly and primarily to be attributed to God the author and preserver of mankinde but secondarily to the variety and condition of temperaments And thus much of the commotion or conclussion of the braine whereby it happens that although all the bone remaines perfectly whole yet some veines broken within by the stroake may cast forth some bloud upon the membranes of the braine which being there concreate may cause great paine by reason whereof it blindes the eyes if so be that the place can be found against which the paine is and when the skinne is opened the bone looke pale it must presently be cut out as Celsus hath written Now it remaines that we tell you how to make your prognostickes in all the forementioned fractures of the scull CHAP. X. Of Prognostickes to be made in fractures of the scull VVEE must not neglect any wounds in the head no not these which cut or bruise but onely the hairy scalpe but certainely much lesse these which are accompanied by a fracture in the scull for oft times all horride symptomes follow upon them and consequently death it selfe especially in bodies full of ill humors or of an ill habite such as are these which are affected with the Lues venerea leprosie dropsie Pthisicke and consumption for in these simple wounds are hardly or never cured for union in the cure of wounds but this is not performed unlesse by strength of nature and sufficient store of laudible blood but those which are sicke of hecticke feavers and consumptions want store of blood and those bodies which are repleate with ill humors and of an ill habite have no affluxe or plenty of laudible blood but all of them want the strength of nature the reason is almost the same in those also which are lately recovered of some disease Those wounds which are brused are more difficult to cure than those which are cut When the scul is broken than the continuity of the flesh lying over it must necessarily be hurt broken unlesse it be in a Resoâitus
take heed of the over light chiefely untill such time as the most feared and maligne symptomes are past For a too great light dissipates the spirits encreases paine strengthens the feaver and symptomes Hippocrates wholy forbids wine therefore the patient in steed thereof must drinke Barly water faire water boyled and tempered with Iulep of Roses syrupe of Violets vinegar and the like water wherein bread crummes have beene steeped water and sugar with a little juyce of Lemons or pomecitron added thereto and such like as the abilitye and taste of the patient shall require Let him continue such drinkes until he be free from maligne symptomes which usually happen within foureteene dayes His meat shall be pappe ptisan shunning Almond milkes for Almonds are sayd to fill the head with vapours and cause paine stued damaske Prunes Raisons and Currance seasoned with sugar and a little cinamon which hath a wonderful power to comfort the stomack and revive and exhilarate the spirits Chickens Pidgeons Veale Kid Leverets birds of the fields Pheasons blacke-birds Turtles Partridges Thrushes Larkes and such like meates of good digestion boiled with lettuce purslaine sorrell borage buglosse succory endive and the like are thought very convenient in this case If he desire at any time to feed on these meates roasted he may only dipping them in verjuice in the acide juices of Oranges Citrons Lemons or Pomegranets sometimes in one and sometimes in another according to his taste and ability If any have a desire to eate fish he must make choyce of Troutes Gudgions Pikes and the like which live in running and cleare waters and not in muddy hee shall eschew all cold sallets and pulse because they flye up and trouble the head it will be convenient after meate to use common drige powder or Aniseed Fennell-seed or Coriander comfits also conserve of Roses or Marmilate of Quinces to shut up the orifice of the Ventricle lest the head should bee offended with vapoures arising from thence Children must eate often but sparingly for children cannot fast so long as those which are elder because their naturall heate is more strong wherefore they stand in neede of more nourishment so also in winter all sorts of people require more plentifull nourishment for that then their stomackes are more hot than in Summer When the foureteenth day is past if neither a feaver nor any thing else forbid hee may drinke wine moderately and by little and little encrease his dyet but that respectively to each ones nature strength and custome He shall shunne as much as in him lyes sleepe on the day time unlesse it happen that a Phlegmon seaze upon the braine or Meninges For in this case it will bee expedient to sleepe on the day time especially from morning till noone for in this season of the day as also in the spring blood is predominant in the body according to the opinion of Hippocrates For it is so vulgarly knowne that it need not be spoken that the blood when wee are awake is carryed into the habite and surface of the body but on the contrary by sleepe it is called into the noble parts the Heart and Liver Wherefore if that the blood by the force of the Sunne casting his beames upon the earth at his rising is carryed into the habite of the body should againe bee more and more diffused by the strength and motion of watching the inflammation in the braine and Meninges would be much encreased Wherefore it will bee better especially then to stay by sleepe the violence of the blood running into the habite of the body when it shall seeme to rage and more violently to affect that way Watching must in like manner be moderate for too much depraves the temper of the braine and of the habit of the whole body it causes crudities paines and heavinesse of the head and makes the wounds dry and maligne But if the patient cannot sleepe by reason of the vehemencie of the inflammation of the braine and Meninges Galen wishes to wash besmeare and annoint the head nose temples and eares with refrigerating and humecting things for these stupifie and make drowsie the Braine and membranes thereof being more hot than they ought to be Wherefore for this purpose let the temples bee anointed with Vnguentum populeon or Vnguentum Rosatum with a little rose vinegar or oxycrate Let a spunge moistened in the decoction of white or blacke poppie seed of the rinds of the rootes of Mandrages of the seedes of Henbane lettuce purslaine plantaine night-shade and the like He may also have a broath or barly creame into which you may put an emulsion made of the seedes of white poppye or let him have a potion made with ⥠j. or ⥠iss of the syrupe of poppie with ⥠ij of lettuce water Let the patient use these things 4 houres after meate to procure sleepe For sleepe doth much helpe concoction it repaires the effluxe of the triple substance caused by watching aswageth paine refresheth the weary mitigates anger and sorrow restores the depraved reason so that for these respects it is absolutely necessary that the patient take his naturall rest If the patient shall bee plethoricke let the plenitude be lessened by blood-letting purging and a slender diet according to the discretion of the Phisition who shall oversee the cure But we must take heed of strong purgations in these kindes of wounds especially at the beginning lest the feaver inflammation paine and other such like symptomes be increased by stirring up the humors Phlebotomie according to Galens opinion must not onely be made respectively to the plenty of blood but also agreeable to the greatnesse of the present disease or that which is to come to divert and draw backe that humor which flowes downe by a way contrary to that which is impact in the part and which must be there evacuated or drawne to the next Wherefore for example if the right side of the head be wounded the Cephalicke veine of the right arme shall be opened unlesse a great Plethora or plenitude cause us to open the Basilica or Median yet if neither of them can be fitly opened the Basilica may bee opened although the body is not plethoricke The like course must be observed in wounds of the left side of the head for that is farre better by reason of the straightnesse of the fibers than to draw blood on the opposite side in performance whereof you must have diligent care of the strength of the patient still feeling his pulse unlesse a Physition be present to whose judgement you must then commit all that businesse For the pulse is in Galens opinion the certainest shewer of the strength Wherefore we must consider the changes and inequalities thereof for as soone as we finde it to become lesser and more slow when the fore-head beginnes to sweate a little when he feeles a paine at his heart when he is taken
with a desire to vomit or goe to stoole or with yawning and when hee shall change his colour and his lips looke pale then you must stop the blood as speedily as you can otherwise there will be danger lest hee poure forth his life together with his blood Then he must bee refreshed with bread steeped in wine and put into his mouth and by rubbing his temples and nosethrilles with strong vinegar and by lying upon his backe But the part shall bee eased and freed from some portion of the impact and conjunct humor by gently scarifying the lippes of the wound or applying of Leaches But it shall bee diverted by opening these veines which are nighest to the wounded part as the Vena Puppis or that in the middest of the forehead or of the temples or these which are under the tongue besides also cupping-glasses shal be applied to the shoulders sometimes with scarification sometimes without neither must strong and long frictions with course clothes of all the whole body the head excepted be omitted during the whole time of the cure for these will be available though but for this that is to draw backe and dissipate by insensible transpiration the vapours which otherwise would ascend into the head which matters certainly in a body that lyes still and wants both the use and benefit of accustomed exercise are much increased But it shall bee made manifest by this following and notable example how powerfull blood-letting is to lessen and mitigate the inflammation of the Braine or the membranes thereof in wounds of the head I was lately called into the suburbs of Saint German there to visite a young man twenty eight yeeres old who lodged there in the house of Iohn Martiall at the signe of Saint Michaell This young man was one of the houshold servants of Master Doucador the steward of the Lady Admirall of Brion He fell downe headlong upon the left Bregma upon a marble pavement whence he received a contused wound without any fracture of the scull and being he was of a sanguine temperature by occasion of this wound a feaver tooke him on the seaventh day with a continuall delirium and inflammation of phlegmonous tumor of the wounded Pericranium This same tumor possessing his whole head and necke by continuation and sympathy of the parts was growne to such a bignesse that his visage was so much altred that his friends knew him not neither could he speake heare or swallow any thing but what was very liquide Which I observing although I knew that the day past which was the eight day of his disease he had foure saucers of blood taken from him by Germaine Agace Barber-surgion of the same suburbs yet considering the integrity and constancie of the strength of the patient I thought good to bleed him againe wherefore I drew from him foureteene saucers at that one time when I came to him the day after and saw that neither the feaver nor any of the fore mentioned symptomes were any whit remitted or aswaged I forthwith tooke from him foure saucers more which in all made two twenty the day following when I had observed that the symptomes were no whit lessened I durst not presume by my owne onely advice to let him the fourth time blood as I desired Wherefore I brought unto him that most famous Physition Doctor Violene who as soone as he felt his pulse knowing by the vehemencie thereof the strength of the Patient and moreover considering the greatnesse of the inflammation and tumor which offered its selfe to his sight hee bid mee presently take out my Lancet and open a veine But I lingred on set purpose and told him that hee had already twenty two saucers of blood taken from him Then sayd he Grant it be so and though more have beene drawne yet must we not therefore desist from our enterprise especially seeing the two chiefe Indications of blood-letting yet remaine that is the greatnesse of the disease and the constant strength of the Patient I being glad of this tooke three saucers more of blood hee standing by and was ready to take more but that he wished mee to differ it untill the after noone wherefore returning after dinner I filled two saucers more so that in all this young man to his great benefit lost twenty seaven saucers of blood at five times within the space of foure dayes Now the ensuing night was very pleasing to him the feaver left him about noone the tumor grew much lesse the heat of the inflammation was aswaged in all parts except in his eyelids and the lappes of his eares which being ulcerated cast forth a great quantitie of Pus or matter I have recited this history purposely to take away the childish feare which many have to draw blood in the constant strength of the patient and that it might appeare how speedy and certaine a remedy it is in inflammations of the head and braine Now to returne from whence we digressed you must note that nothing is so hurtfull in factures and wounds of the head as venery not onely at that time the disease is present but also long after the cure thereof For great plenty of spirits are conteined in a small quantity of seed the greatest part thereof flowes from the braine hence therefore all the faculties but chiefly the Animall are resolved whence I have divers times observed death to ensue in small wounds of the head yea when they have beene agglutinated and united All passions of the minde must in like sort be avoided because they by contraction and dissipation of the spirits cause great trouble in the body and minde Let a place be chosen for the Patient as farre from noise as can be as from the ringing of bells beatings and knocking 's of Smithes Coopers and Carpenters and from high-wayes through which they use to drive Coaches for noyse encreases paine causes a feaver and brings many other symptomes I remember when I was at Hisdin at the time that it was beseiged by the forces of Charles the fifth that when the wall beaten with the Cannon the noise of the Ordinance caused grievous torment to all those which were sicke but especially those that were wounded on their heads so that they would say that they thought at the discharging of every Cannon that they were cruelly strucken with staves on that part which was wounded and verily their wounds were so angred herewith that they bledde much and by their paine and feavers encreased were forced with much sighing to breathe their last Thus much may serve to be spoken of the cure in generall now we will out of the monuments of the ancients treate of the particular CHAP. XV. Of the particular cure of Wounds of the head and of the musculous skinne LEt us beginne with a simple wound for whose cure the Chirurgion must propose one onely scope to wit Vnion for unlesse the wound pierce to the scull it is
Goldsmith who dwelt neere the Austine Friers For he having used many medicines of diverse Physitions and Chirurgions in vaine when he was almost blinde he applying a Seton by mine advice began by little and little to see better according to the quantity of the matter which was evacuated untill at length he perfectly recovered his sight But at last growing wearie of the Seton which he had worne for a yeere although matter came dayly forth thereof yet he would have it taken forth and healed up but this way of evacuation being shut up and the humor againe beginning to flow into his eyes so that he was in danger to become blinde hee called me and made me againe to apply the Seton in his necke Whereby recovering his former soundnesse and perfection of sight he yet weares the Seton I also once freed by this kinde of remedy by the appointment of the most learned Physition Hollerius a certaine young man of twenty yeeres old from the falling sickenesse who before had many fits thereof the Ichorous humors the feeders of this disease being by this meanes as it is most probable drawne away and evacuated Wherefore seeing a Seton is of this use I have thought good in this place to set downe in writing and by figure the manner of making thereof for the behoofe of young practitioners Wish the patient to sit on a low stoole and to bend downe his head that so the skinne and fleshy pannicle may be relaxed then must you with your fingers plucke up and sever the skinne from the muscles and take hold of as much hereof as you can with your pincers not touching the muscles of the necke for feare of a convulsion and other symptomes you shall then twitch the skinne which is held in the pincers most hard when you shall thrust the hot Iron through the holes made in the midst of them that also the nerves being so twitched the dolorificke sense may the lesse come to the part The wound must be made or burnt in long wayes and not twharting that so the matters may be the better evacuated by the straight fibers But the cautery or hot Iron must have a three or else a foure-square point and that sharpe that so it may the more easily and speedily enter Then keeping the pincers immoveable let him draw through the passage made by the cautery a needle thred with a three or foure doubled threed of Cotton or rather a skeane of silke moistned in the white of an egge and oyle of Roses then after you have applyed pledgets dipped in the same medicine binde up the part with a convenient ligature The day following the necke must be annointed with oyle of Roses and the pledgets dipped in the former medicine applyed for some dayes after But it will bee convenient to moisten the Seton with a digestive made of the yolke of an Egge and oyle of Roses untill the ulcer cast forth much matter then you shall annoint the Cotton thred with this following remedie â terebinthinae ven ⥠iiij syrupirosat absinthij an ⥠ss pulveris Ireos diacrydij agarici trochiscati Rhei an ⥠ss incorporentur omnia simul siat medicamentum Which you shall use so long as you intend to keepe open the ulcer For it hath a facultie to draw the humors from the face and clense without biting A figure of the Pincers actuall Cautery and Needle used in making a Seten I have found not long since by experience that the apertion made with a long thicke Triangular needle of a good length like to a large Pack-needle is lesse painefull than that which is performed with the actuall cautery which I formerly mentioned Wherefore I would advise the young Chirurgion that hee no more use the foresayd actuall cauterie I have here given you the figure of the Needle The Figure of a Triangular Needle CHAP. XXV Of Wounds of the Cheeke SEeing a wound of the cheeke seemes to require a suture it must have a dry suture as they terme it least that the scarre should become deformed For that deformity is very greevous to many as to women who are highly pleased with their beauties Therefore you shall spread two peeces of new cloath of an indifferent finenesse and proportionable bignesse with this ensuing medicine â pulveris mastichini sanguinis Draconis thuris farinae volatilis tragacantha contusae gypsi picis sarcocollae an Êij nigraÊiss albumina ovorum quae sufficiant fiat medicamentum Apply the peices of cloath spread with this on each side of the wound one some fingers breadth asunder and let it alone till it be hard dryed to the skinne Then you shall so draw them together with your needle and thred that the flesh by their sticking may also follow and bee mutually adjoyned as you may see it here exprest The wound shall be agglutinated by this meanes together with the use of fit medicines pledgets ligatures But all the ligatures and stayes which shall be used for that purpose must be fastened to the patients night-lappe But when the wound is great and deep and the lips thereof are much distant the on from the other there can be no use of such a dry suture Wherefore you must use a three or foure square needle that so it may the more readily and easily enter into the flesh being thred with a waxed thred and with this you must thrust through the lips of the wound and leave the needle sticking in the wound and then wrappe the thred to and againe over the ends thereof eight or ten times just after that manner which women use to fasten a needle with thred in it upon their sleeves or Tailors to their hatts or capps that they may not lose them The needle thus fastened shall bee there untill the perfect agglutination of the wound this kind of suture is used in the wounds of the lips as also in hare-lips for so we commonly call lips which are cleft from the first conformation in the wombe by the error of the forming faculty But such a suture will helpe nothing to agglutination if there lye or remaine any skin betweene the lips of the wound Wherefore you shall cut away whatsoever thereof shall be there other-wise you must expect no union Other kinde of sutures are of no great use in wounds of these parts for out of the necessity of eating and speaking they are in perpetuall motion wherefore a thrid would cut the flesh for which reason you shall take up much flesh with such Needles mentioned in this last described kinde of Suture as this following figure shewes The figure of the suture fit for cloven or Hare lips as also the dilineation of the Needle about whose ends the thrid is wrapped over and under to and againe To this purpose I will recite a history to the end that if any such thing happen to come to your hands you may doe the like A certaine
of Reeds some are blunt headed others have piles or heads of Iron Brasse Lead Tinne Horne Glasse Bone In figure for that some are round others cornered some are sharpe pointed some barbed with the barbs standing either to the point or shafts or else acrosse or both wayes but some are broad aad cut like a Chissell For their bignesse some are three foote long some lesse For their number they differ in that because some have one head others more But they varie in making for that some of them have the shaft put into the head others the head into the shaft some have their heads nailed to the shaft others not but have their heads so loosely set on that by gentle plucking the shaft they leave their heads behind them whence dangerous wounds proceede But they differ in force for that some hurt by their Iron onely others besides that by poyson wherewith they are infected You may see the other various shapes here represented to you in the following Figure The Figures of divers sorts of Arrowes CHAP. XVII Of the difference of the wounded parts THe Wounded parts are eyther fleshy or bony some are neare the joynts others seated upon the very joynts some are principall others serve them some are externall others internall Now in wounds where deadly signes appeare its fit you give an absolute judgement to that effect least you make the Art to be scandalled by the ignorant But it is an inhumane part and much digressing from Art to leave the Iron in the wound it is sometimes difficult to take it out yet a charitable and artificiall worke For it is much better to try a doubtfull remedy than none at all CHAP. XVIII Of drawing forth Arrowes YOu must in drawing forth Arrowes shun incisions and dilacerations of Veines and Arteries Nerves and Tendons For it is a shamefull and bungling part to doe more harme with your hand than the Iron hath done Now Arrowes are drawne forth two wayes that is either by extraction or impulsion Now you must presently at the first dressing pull forth all strange bodies which that you may more easily and happily performe you shall set the Patient in the same posture as hee stood when he received his wound and hee must also have his Instruments in a readinesse chiefely that which hath a slit pipe and toothed without into which there is put a sharpe iron style like the Gimblets we formerly mentioned for the taking forth of Bullets but that it hath no scrue at the end but is larger and thicker so to widen the pipe that so widened it may fill up the hole of the Arrowes head where into the shaft was put and so bring it forth with it both out of the fleshy as also out of the bony parts if so bee that the end of the shaft be not broken and left in the hole of the head That also is a fit Instrument for this purpose which opens the other end toothed on the outside by pressing together of the handle You shall finde the Iron or head that lies hid by these signes there will be a certaine roughnesse and inequalitie observable on that part if you feele it up and downe with your hand the flesh there will be bruised livid or blacke and there is heavinesse and paine felt by the patient both there and in the wound A deliniation of Instruments fit to draw forth the heads of Arrowes and Darts which are left in the wound without their shafts A hooked Instrument fit for to draw forth strange bodies as peices of Maile and such other things as it can catch hold of which may also bee used in wounds made by Gunshot But if by chance either Arrowes Darts or Lances or any winged head of any other weapon bee run through and left sticking in any part of the body as the Thigh with a portion of the shaft or staffe slivered in peices or broken off then it is fit the Chirurgion with his cutting mullets should cut off the end of the staffe or shaft and then with his other mullets plucke forth the head as you may see by this Figure CHAP. XIX How Arrowes broken in a wound may be drawne forth BVt if it chance that the weapon is so broken in the wound that it cannot bee taken hold on by the formerly mentioned Mullets then must you draw or plucke it out with your Crane or Crowes bill and other formerly described Instruments But if the shaft be broken neare the head so that you cannot take hold thereof with your Cranes bill then you shall draw it forth with your Gimblet which we described before to draw forth bullets for if such a Gimblet can be fastened in Bullets it may farre better take hold of wood But if the head be barbed as usually the English arrowes are then if it may be conveniently done it will be very fitting to thrust them through the parts For if they should be drawne out the same way they went in there would bee no small danger of breaking or tearing the Vessells and Nerves by these hooked barbes Wherefore it is better to make a section on the other side whither the head tended and so give it passage forth if it may bee easily done for so the wound will bee the more easily clensed and consolidated But on the the contrary if the point tend to any bone or have many muscles or thicke flesh against the head thereof as it happens sometimes in the Thighes Legges and Armes then you must not thrust the head thorough but rather draw it out the same way it came in dilating the wound with fit Instruments and by skill in Anatomie shunning the larger Nerves and Vessells Therefore for this purpose put a hollow Dilater into the wound and therewith take hold of both the barbes or wings of the head and then take fast hold of the head with your Cranes-bill and so draw them forth all three together A Dilater hollowed on the inside with a Cranes-bill to take hold of the barbed head CHAP. XX. What to be done when an Arrow is left fastned or sticking in a bone BVt if the weapon be so depact and fastned in a bone that you cannot drive it forth on the other side neither get it forth by any other way than that it entred in by you must first gently moove it up and downe if it sticke very fast in but have a speciall care that you doe not breake it and so leave some fragment thereof in the bone then take it forth with your Crowes bill or some other fit Instrument formerly described Then presse forth the blood and suffer it to bleed somewhat largely yet according to the strength of the Patient and nature of the wounded part For thus the part shall be eased of the fulnesse and illnesse of humors and lesse molested with inflammation putrefaction and other symptomes which are customarily feared When the weapon is drawne forth and the
handsomely fashioned and wrapped about with cotten or a linnen ragge so to avoyd paine Therefore you shall hold the spatherne in one hand and reduce and order it with the other The bone being restored directories or tents of a convenient bignesse shall be put into the nose which tents shall bee made of sponge or flaxe or a peece of a beasts or sheeps lungs For these things are soft and doe not onely hinder the bones of the Nose that they fall no more but also lift them up higher And then the Nose shall be in some sort stayed with boulsters on each side even untill the perfect agglutination of the bones lest the figure and straitnesse should be vitiated and spoyled I have oft times put golden silver and leaden pipes into fractured noses and fastned them with a thred to the Patients night cap which by one and the same means kept the bones from being again deprest gave the matter free passage forth and nothing hindred the breathing In the mean time we must see that we do not presse the Nose with too strait binding unlesse peradventure some other thing perswade lest they become eyther too wide too flat or crooked If any wound accompany the fracture that shall bee cured after the same manner as the wounds of the head The fracture restored the following medicine which hath a facultie to repell and represse the defluxion to strengthen and keep the part in its due posture and to dry up and waste the matter which hath alreadie fallen downe shall bee applyed to the Nose and all the other dry parts â thuris mastiches boli armeniae sanguinis draconis an ⥠ss aluminis rochae resinae pini an Ê ij pulverisentur subtilissimè Or else â farinae volatilis ⥠ss albuminum ovorum quantum sufficit incorporentur simul fiat medicamentum Neither shall you use any other art to cure the cartilagineous part of the nose being fractured Wherefore Hippocrates termes that solution of continuitie that there happens A fracture as if it were in a bone because hee could finde no other name more fitly to expresse it for a gristle next to a bone is the hardest of all the parts of our bodie A Callus uses to grow in fractured noses unlesse something hinder within the space of twelve or fifteene dayes CHAP. VII Of the Fracture of the lower Jaw THe lower Jaw runnes into two as it were horns or tops the one whereof ends sharpe and receives a tendon from the temporall muscle the other ends blunt and round under the mammillarie processe and it is there implanted in a small cavitie it is joyned together in the middle of the chin by Symphysis and is marrowie within The Fracture which happens thereto is restored by putting your fingers into the Patients mouth and pressing them on the inside and outside that so the fractured bones put together may be smoothed and united But if they be broken wholly athwart so that the bones lye over each other extension must be made on both sides on contrary parts upwards and downwards whereby the bones may be composed and joyned more easily to one another The teeth in the meane while if they be eyther shaken or removed out of their sockets must be restored to their former places and tyed with a gold or silver wyar or else an ordinary threed to the next firme teeth untill such time as they shall be fastened and the bones perfectly knit by a Callus To which purpose the ordered fragments of the fractured bone shall bee stayed by putting a splint on the outside made of such leather as shoe soales are made the midst thereof being divided at the Chin and of such length and breadth as may serve the Jaw then you shall make ligation with a ligature two fingers broad and of such length as shall be sufficient divided at both the ends and cut long-waies in the midst thereof that so it may engirt the chin on both sides Then there will be foure heads of such a ligature so divided at the ends the two lower whereof being brought to the crown of the head shall bee there fastened and sowed to the Patients night-cap The two upper drawne athwart shall likewise be sowed as artificially as may bee to the cap in the nappe of the necke It is a most certaine signe that the Jaw is restored and well set if the teeth fastened therein stand in their due ranke and order The patient shall not lye downe upon his broken jaw lest the fragments of the bones should againe fall out and cause a greater defluxion Unlesse inflammation or some other grievous symptome shall happen it is strengthned with a Callus within twentie dayes for that it is spongious hollow and full of marrow especially in the midst thereof yet sometimes it heales more slowly according as the temper of the patient is which takes also place in other fractured bones The agglutinating and repelling medicine described in the former chapter shall be used as also others as occasion shall offer it selfe The Patient must be fed with liquid meats which stand not in need of chewing untill such time as the Callus shall grow hard lest the scarce or ill-joyned fragments should fly insunder with the labour of chewing Therefore shall hee bee nourished with water-grewell ponadoes cullasses barley creames gellies brothes reare egges restaurative liquors and other things of the like nature CHAP. VIII Of the Fracture of the Clavicle or Collar-bone AS the nature and kinde of the fractured Clavicle shall bee so must the cure and restoring thereof bee performed But howsoever this bone shall be broken alwaies the end fastened to the shoulder and shoulder-blade is lower than that which is joyned to the chest for that the arme drawes it downe-wards The collar-bone if broken athwart is more easily restored and healed than if it be cloven long-wayes For everie bone broken athwart doth more easily returne into its former state or seat whiles you lift it up on this or that side with your fingers But that which is broken schidacidon or into splinters or long-waies is more difficultly joyned and united to the ends and fragments for those peeces which were set will be plucked asunder even by the least motion of the armes and that which was knit with the shoulder will fall downe to the lower part of the breast The reason of which is the Collar-bone is not moved of its selfe but consents in motion with the arme In restoring this or any other fracture you must have a care that the bones ride not one over another neyther be drawn nor depart too far in sunder therfore it will be here convenient that one servant draw the arme backwards and another pull the shoulder towards him the contrarie way for so there will be made as I may so terme it a counter-extension While which is in doing the Surgeon with his fingers shall restore the fracture pressing downe
is betweene prone and supine for so the Wand shall lye directly under the Ell as we have read it observed by Hippocrates The reason is for that by a supine figure or situation both the bone and muscles are perverted for first for the bone the Apophysis styloides and Olecranum of the Cubit ought to be in an equall plaine and to be seated each against other which is not so in a supine figure as wherein the Processus styloides of the Cubit is set against the inner processe of the arme bone But in muscles for that like as the insertion and site of the head of a muscle is such also is the site of the belly thereof and lastly such the insertion of the tayle thereof but by a supine figure the muscles arising from the inner processe of the arme bone and bending the cubit shall have their tayle placed in an higher and more exteriour site In the interim you must not omit but that the Patients arme may with as little paine as possibly you can be bended and extended now and then lest by the too long rest of the tyed up part and the intermission of its proper function the bones of the joynt may be sowdred together by the interposition and as it were glue of the defluxion which fals abundantly into the joynt of the Ell-bow and neighbouring parts whence the stiffenesse and unmoveablenesse thereof as if there were a Callus growne there from whence it may happen that the arme thereafter may neither be bended nor extended which I have observed to have happened to many Whereof also Galen makes mention and cals this kinde of vitiated conformation Ancyle and Ancylosis If a wound also associate a fracture of the arme then see that you put about it plates of Latin or Past-bord and make a convenient Ligature and that the fragments of the bones be kept in the same state wherein they were set and restored Moreover let him lay his arme upon a soft pillow or cushion as the following Figure shewes you The figure of a fractured Arme with a wound bound up and seated as is fit CHAP. XIX Of the fracture of a Hand THe bones of the Wrest and After-wrest may bee broken but in Hippocrates opinion chiefly by that kind of fracture which is called a Sedes now if they shal happen to be broken this shal be the maner of restoring them Let the Patient lay forth his hand upon some even and smooth table then let your servant stretch forth the broken bones the work-master restore them thus extended and put them in their proper seats But being restored they must be kept in their places by such remedies as are used in other fractures to wit cerates compresses linnen clothes and splints Now the fractured fingers shall be tyed or bound to their neighbours that so they may the more easily as bound to a stake be kept in that state wherein they have been put by the hand of the Workeman But these bones seeing they are of a rare and spongie nature are in a short time and easily strengthened or knit by a Callus These things being done the hollownesse or palme of the hand shall be filled with a Tennis ball for thus the broken bones shall not only be more easily kept in their places but also the fingers themselves shall be kept in a middle posture that is not wholly open nor quite shut If they be kept in any other figure the ensuing Callus will either deprave or quite abolish that action of the hand wherby we take hold of any thing The case stands otherwise with the fractured Toes for they shall bee kept straight and even out lest they should hinder our going or standing CHAP. XX. Of the fracture of a Thigh IT is a hard thing to bring the fragments of the broken thigh together to be set by reason of the large and strong muscles of that part which whilest they are drawne backe towards their originall by a motion both naturall and convulsive they carry together with them the fragment of the bone whereinto they are inserted Therefore when as the fracture of this bone shall be restored the Patient must lye upon his back with his legge stretched forth and the Surgeon must strongly and with great force extend the thigh but if he alone shall not be able sufficiently to extend it he shall imploy two other strong attendants by whose joynt-helpe the fragments may be fitted and set each against other For this purpose when as the strength of the hand was not sufficient the Ancients used an Instrument called a Glossocomium whereof this is the figure The figure of a Glossocomium or Extender In stead of this Glossocomium you may make use of my pulley for Hippocrates in this bone when it is broken doth approve of extension so great that although by the greatnesse of the extension the ends of the fragments be somewhat distant a-sunder an emptie space being left betweene yet notwithstanding would hee have ligature made For it is not here as it is in the extensions of other bones whereas the casting about of Ligatures keeps the muscles unmoveable but here in the extended thighes the deligation is not of such force as that it may stay and keepe the bones and muscles in that state wherein the Surgeon hath placed them For seeing that the muscles of the thigh are large and strong they overcome the ligation and are not kept under by it The Surgeon in setting it shall also consider that the thigh-bone is hollowed on the inner side but gibbous on the outside therefore it must be set in its native figure Otherwise if anie unmindefull of this consideration would have it straight he shall make his Patient halt all his life after wherefore this inner and native hollownesse must be filled up and preserved by putting in a compresse or boulster spread over with unguentum rosatum or the like glutinous thing that it may not fall off for thus also the ligation shall the more faithfully keep the fragments of the bone in their places Moreover compresses shall be applied to the more slender and lesse protuberating parts of the thigh as those which are next the ham and knee that so the whole ligation may be alike and consequently the more firme Now ligatures as we formerly noted are ordained for three things The first is that the bones may bee kept in that state wherein they were set untill they be strengthened by a Callus The second is to hinder defluxion which easily fals into the broken and luxated parts both by reason of paine as also by weaknesse The third is to stay and hold fast the splints and medicines which are applied Inflammation is hindred by repressing and hindring the blood and other humours ready to flow downe from entring into the part and by pressing those humors which are preternaturally contained in the part into the neighbouring parts above and below
weak fomentation and the short time of using one doth attract but not discusse but a longer and stronger wastes the flesh Besides also you must have regard to the temper and habit of the Patient for fomentations used to plethorick bodies draw superfluous humors to the part The Ancients bid that the ligatures be loosed everie third day untill their seventh day but after the seventh on everie seventh day but hereof nothing can be certainly and perpetually decreed For according to the accidents the Patients must be dressed sooner or later more often or seldome renuing the ligatures and the rest of the dressing Therefore if no symptome urge I would have none of these things which are done to the Patient at the first dressing to be moved unlesse as slowly and seldome as you may For you hinder the knitting of the bone if you never so little move the ends of the fragments thereof for as you see wood is joyned together by glue and pewter with sowder so the fragments of bones are by the providence of nature glued and sowdred together by a Callus Wherefore broken bones have very much need of rest to the generating of a Callus otherwise the matter thereof flowing downe quickly flowes away and nothing is done You may much helpe forwards the generation of a Callus which is begunne about the thirteenth or fifteenth day by applying an emplaister made with the white of an egge having the powder of red rose leaves and wheat floure mixed therewith and other Catagmatick plaisters which shall hereafter be described in speaking of the fracture of a legge CHAP. XXI Of the fracture of the Thigh nigh to the joynt or the upper or lower head of the bone A Fracture sometimes happens at the joynt of the hip in the neck of the thigh-bone as I once observed in an honest matron I being called to her when I had observed the hurt Thigh to be shorter than the whole with the outward prominencie of the Ischium which at the first sight I supposed to proceede from the head of the thigh bone I presently perswaded my selfe it was a dislocation and no fracture I then therefore extended the bone and forced as I thought the head thereof into its cavitie The equalitie of both the legges in bignesse which followed upon this extension encreased my perswasion that it was a dislocation The next day I visited her the second time and found her in great paine her hurt legge the shorter and her foot wrested inwards Then I loosed all her ligatures and perceived such a prominencie as I did formerly Wherefore I ende voured againe to force in the head of the bone as I formerly did But as I was busied therein I heard a little crackling and also I considered that there was no cavitie nor depression in the joynt by which signes I certainly perswaded my selfe that the bone was broken and not dislocated Neyther only such kinde of Fractures but also the separation of the appendix or head of this bone from its place may induce one to thinke it a dislocation which thing hath sometimes deceived some heedlesse Surgeons who have not dreamt of the divulsion or separation of the appendix from the top of the Thigh-bone but have judged it only a dislocation Then therefore that I may returne to my former narration I set the bone and joyned the fragments together layd thereupon splints with compresses made ligations with a rowler having two heads wrapped about the joynt and the bodie crosse-wise and I defended her foote with a Case that none of the clothes might presse it I fastened a rope to a poste and so let it come downe into the midst of the bed and tyed many knots thereon for the better taking hold and lifting up her selfe the which thing you must alwaies doe in fractures and dislocations of the thigh and legge that so your Patients may have some stay whereby they may succour themselves with their hands as oft as they desire to rise or lift themselves up in their beds or goe to stoole as also that they may give perspiration and as it were ventilation to the loynes buttocks rumpe and other parts compressed and wearied with long lying for want wherof they are molested with heat and paine whence ulcers arise which oft-times torment the Patient with such tormenting heate and paine that he is even consumed by a fever watchings and want of rest This opportunitie of raising the bodie out of the bed is by so much the more needfull in this place by how much the fracture is nearer the joynt for there it is more dangerous than in the midst of the thigh and consequently more difficult to dresse and heale for that the part is bloodlesse and by reason of the multitude of the nerves tendons and ligaments which are obnoxious to many maligne symptomes But the Surgeon must have diligent care in this kinde of fracture and must looke often that the bone which is set doe not fall forth againe which easily happens here by any light stirring of the bodie the like occasion for that the thigh hath but one onely bone Therefore as oft as the Bandages shal be loosed and the fracture dressed hee shall attentively view the figure of the bone and the magnitude of the affected part comparing it with the sound for the set and composed fragments of the broken bone can scarce fall asunder but that the one must lye upon the other But before it be knit the part must be extended and restored to its state that so the Patient may not halt during the residue of his life For I have read it written in Avicen that scarce any doe so well recover a fractured thigh that they doe not halt thereof therefore the Patient must be carefull that hee move himselfe or his bodie as little as hee can Many of the Ancients have set downe the time of the consolidation of this bone to bee fiftie dayes but as I formerly sayd there can bee no certaine or determinate time hereof But in what time soever this bone shall bee knit the Patient must not stand or goe thereon presently upon it for that there remaines a weakenesse in the part a long time after so that the Patients are forced to use Crutches to goe withall in the meane space while they recover more strength CHAP. XXII Of the Fracture of the Patella or whirle-bone of the Knee THe Whirle-bone of the knee is oft times contused but not so frequently broken yet when that happens it goes into two or three peeces sometimes long-wise sometimes athwart Sometimes it is broken in the midst and some-whiles shivered into many splinters and all these eyther with or without a wound The signes are impotencie in going a hollownesse in that place and a sensible separation of the fragments of the hurt part and the crackling of these parts under your hand It is set after this manner Wish the Patient
as it is fitting and in the meane space you must forbid the Patient to speake or needlesly to open his mouth Wherefore he must abstaine from hard meats and such as require much chewing untill his paine be quite passed and use only spoone-meats as Barley-creames ponadoes jellies cullasses brothes and the like CHAP. X. Of restoring the Jaw dislocated forwards but on one side THe Patient must be placed on a lowe seate so that hee may be under the Surgeon then your servant standing at his back shall hold his head firme and steddie that it may not follow the Surgeon drawing extending and doing other things necessarie for restoring it Then the Surgeon putting his thumb between the grinders shall presse down the Jaw and gently drawing it aside force it into its cavitie in the meane while also the Patient as much as in him lyes shall helpe forwards the Surgeons endevour in opening his mouth as little as he can lest the muscles should bee extended and hee shall only gape so wide as to admit the Surgeons thumbe for so the temporall muscles shall be restored to their place and favour the restitution If hee open his mouth as wide as hee can they will be extended after a convulsive manner if on the contrarie he shut his teeth too close there will be no passage for the Surgeons Thumbe unto his grinding teeth Some there bee which affirme that the Jaw-bone may sometimes be dislocated towards the hinde part and that then the mouth is so close shut that the Patient cannot open it nor gape and that the lower ranke of teeth stands further in and nearer the throat than the upper Now for restoring it the Patients head must be straitly holden behinde whilst the Surgeon the meane while putting both his thumbs into the Patients mouth holding his other fingers without under the parties chin hee shall by shaking it draw it to him or forwards and so restore it to its place For my own part I confesse I never saw this kinde of Luxation and I easily perswade my selfe that it can scarce ever happen for the reason I gave in the former Chapter But neverthelesse if it by any meanes chance to happen yet can it not be a perfect Luxation but an imperfect one the Jaw being onely but a little thrust backe to the throat to those mammillarie additaments And then it may easily be restored by lifting or drawing forth the Jaw and suddenly forcing it from below upwards CHAP. XI Of the Luxation of the Collar-bone AS the Collar-bones may be broken wrested and crooked so also they may be dislocated Now they are dislocated either against the sternum or against the shoulder-blade or acromion thereof yet both these kinds of dislocations are very rare by reason of the strait and firme connexion which the Collar-bone hath with the foresaid parts but chiefly where it is joyned to the sternum it can scarce be deprest for that it is as it were underpropt with the first rib But it may be dislocated inwardly outwardly and side-wise and according to this varietie there must be divers waies to restore it yet generally the Collar-bone is put into its place by moving or extending the arme But if need require the Patient shall be layd upon the ground with his face upwards a Tray with the bottome upwards a hard stuffed Cushion or the like thing being put under his shoulders for thus it wil so come to passe that the shoulder and chest will stand so forth that presently by lifting up by pressing downe or drawing forth the arme forwards or backwards as the bone shal be flowne out to this or that part you may restore it for thus the prominencie may bee forced into its cavitie But it will be requisite to binde it up and lay boulsters thereon and to give it rest as if it were fractured Galen writes that when hee was five and thirtie yeares old whilst he exercised himselfe in the place of Exercise his Collar-bone was so farre separated from the Acromion that there was the space of three fingers betweene them And that this Luxation was restored in fortie dayes space by so strait and strong a Ligation that he perceived the motion of the beating arteries under the bone But you shall finde verie few who will suffer such strain ligation so long though it be never so necessarie Verily this kinde of Luxation is hard to be known but farre more difficult to be healed I have known many Surgeons deceived who have taken the Luxation of the Collar-bone for the dislocation of the top of the shoulder For then the Epomis or toppe of the shoulder swels and the place from whence the Collar-bone is flowne is depressed with a manifest cavity with vehement paine inflammation and impotencie of lifting up or otherwise moving the arme or performing other actions which are done by the helpe of the shoulder Certainly if this bone when it is dislocated be not set the Patient shall be lame during his life so that hee shall not bee able neyther to put his hand to his head nor mouth CHAP. XII Of the Luxation of the Spine or Back-bone THe Backe-bone consists of many bony vertebrae like rowles or wheeles mutually joynted or knit together by their smoothnesse and circular forme conspiring to an aptnesse of moving or bending forwards For if it should consist of one bone we should stand continually with the trunk of our bodies immoveable as thrust thorough with a stake The vertebrae have a hole passing through the midst of them whereby the marrow passing this way out from the braine as by a pipe may serve for the generation of the sensitive and motive nerves and their distribution into all parts beneath the head For which purpose it is perforated with many holes on the sides through each whereof certaine conjugations of the nerves passe forth into the rest of the body and veines and arteries passe in for the propagation of nourishment and life The whole exteriour face of the Spine is rough and as it were armed with foure sorts of apophyses or processes whereof some stand up others downe some direct others transverse Wherefore from these thornie and sharpe processes the whole hath acquired the name of the Spina The vertebrae the further from the neck they are the greater they grow so that those which are the lowest are the largest for it is agreeable to reason that that which beares should be bigger than that which is borne Hence we see that the Holy-bone is placed under the rest as a foundation The side processes of the Rack-bones of the Chest besides the benefit of defending the spinall marrow shut up therein from externall injuries have also another which is they firme and fasten the bones of the ribbs by a strong tye There lyes a gristle and a âough and as it were albuminous humor betweene the vertebrae which makes them as also all the other
joynts of the bodie slipperie and fit for motion the Spine is flexible with notable agilitie forwards onely but not backewards for that so there would be continuall danger of breaking the Hollow ascendent veine and the great descending arterie running thereunder Therefore the dearticulations of the vertebrae mutually strengthned with strong ligaments doe looke more backewards I have thought good to premise these things of the nature of the Spine before I come to the Dislocations happening thereto I willingly omit divers other things which are most copiously delivered by Galen content only to adde thus much That there is nothing to bee found in the whole structure of Mans bones which more clearly manifests the industrie of Gods great workmanship than this composure of the Spine and the vertebrae thereof CHAP. XIII Of the Dislocation of the Head THe head stands upon the necke knit by dearticulation to the first vertebra thereof by the interposition of two processes which arise from the basis thereof neare the hole through which the marrow of the braine passes downe into the backe bone and they are received by fit cavities hollowed in this first vertebra These processes sometimes fall out of their cavities and cause a dislocation behinde whereby the spinall marrow is too violently and hard compressed bruised and extended the chin is fastened to the breast and the Patient can neyther drinke nor speake wherefore death speedily followes upon this kinde of Luxation not through any fault of the Surgeon but by the greatness of the disease refusing all cure CHAP. XIV Of the Dislocation of the vertebrae or Racke-bones of the necke THe other vertebrae of the necke may bee both dislocated and strained Dislocation verily unlesse it be speedily helped brings sudden death for by this meanes the spinall marrow is presently opprest at the verie originall thereof and the nerves there-hence arising suffer also together therewith and principally those which serve for respiration whereby it commeth to passe that the animal spirit cannot come and disperse its selfe into the rest of the bodie lying thereunder hence proceede sudden inflammation the squinsie and a difficultie or rather a defect of breathing But a straine or incomplete Luxation brings not the like calamitie by this the vertebrae a little moved out of their seats are turned a little to the hinde or fore part then the necke is wrested aside the face lookes blacke and there is difficultie of speaking and breathing Such whether dislocation or straine is thus restored The Patient must be set upon alowe seat and then one must leane and lye with his whole weight upon his shoulders and the meane while the Surgeon must take the Patients head about his eares betwixt his hands and so shake and move it to everie part untill the vertebra be restored to its place We may know it is set by the sudden ceasing of the pain which before grievously afflicted the Patient and by the free turning and moving his head neck everie way After the restoring it the head must be inclined to the part opposite to the Luxation and the neck must bee bound up about the dearticulation of the shoulder but yet so that the ligature bee not too strait lest by pressing the weazon and gullet it straiten the passages of breathing and swallowing CHAP. XV. Of the Dislocated Vertebrae of the Back THe Rack bones of the backe may bee dislocated inwards outwards to the right side and to the left We know they are dislocated inwards when as they leave a depressed cavitie in the spine outwardly when they make a bunch on the backe and wee know they are luxated to the right or left side when as they obliquely bunch forth to this or that side The vertebrae are dislocated by a cause eyther internall or externall as is common to all other Luxations the internall is eyther the defluxion of humors from the whole bodie or any part to them and their ligaments or else a congestion proceeding from the proper and native weakenesse of these parts or an attraction arising from paine and heat The externall is a fall from high upon some hard bodie a heavie and bruising blow much and often stooping as in Dressers and Lookers to Vineyards and Paviers decrepite old men and also such as through an incureable dislocation of the Thigh-bone are forced in walking to stoope downe and hold their hand upon their thigh But a vertebra cannot be forced or thrust inwards unlesse by a great deale of violence and if it at any time happen it is not but with the breaking of the tyes and ligaments for they will breake rather than suffer so great extension Such a dislocation is deadly for that the spinall marrow is exceedingly violated by too strait compression whence proceeds dulnesse and losse of sense in the members lying thereunder Neyther is restitution to bee hoped for because wee cannot through the belly force it into its place the urine is then supprest as also the excrements of the belly sometimes on the contrarie both of them breake forth against the Patients minde the knees and legges grow cold their sense and motion being lost Such things happen more frequently when the spine is luxated inwards than when it is dislocated outwards for that the nerves thence arising runne and are carried more inwardly into the bodie Besides the pressed Spinall marrow becomes inflamed and that being inflamed the parts of the same kinde and such as are joyned thereto are also inflamed by consent whence it happeneth that the bladder cannot cast forth the urine Now where the sinewes are pressed they can no more receive the irradiation of the animal facultie Hence followes the deprivation of the sense and motion in the parts whereto they are carried therefore the contained excrements doe no more provoke to expulsion by their troublesome sense neither are pressed to keep them in thence proceeds their suppression and hence their breaking forth against their wils But the spine outwardly dislocated scarce causes any compression of the marrow or nerves CHAP. XVI How to restore the Spine outwardly dislocated THe vertebrae outwardly dislocated when as they stand bunching forth then it is fit to lay and stretch forth the Patient upon a table with his face downe-wards and straitly to binde him about with towels under the arm-pits about the flanks and thighes And then to draw and extend as much as we can upwards and downe-wards yet without violence for unlesse such extension be made restitution is not to be hoped for by reason of the processes and hollowed cavities of the vertebrae wherby for the faster knitting they mutually receive each other Then must you lye with your hands upon the extuberancie and force in the prominent vertebrae But if it cannot be thus restored then will it bee convenient to wrap two pieces of wood of foure fingers long and one thick more or lesse in linnen clothes and
the braines substitute But when divers vertebrae are dislocated at once it must of necessity be forced only into an obtuse angle or rather a semicircle by which compression it certainly suffers but not so as that death must necessarily ensue thereof Hereto may seeme to belong that which is pronounced by Hippocrates A circular moving of the vertebrae out of their places is lesse dangerous than an angular CHAP. XIX Of the Dislocation of the Rumpe THe Rumpe oft times is after a sort dislocated inwards by a violent fall upon the buttocks or a great blow in this affect the Patient cannot bring his heele to his buttockes neither unlesse with much force bend his knee Going to stoole is painefull to him neyther can he sit unlesse in a hollow chaire That this as it were dislocation may bee restored you must thrust your finger in by the Fundament even to the place affected as we have said in a fracture then must you strongly raise up the bone and with your other hand at the same time joyne it rightly on the outside with the neighbouring parts lastly it must be strengthened with the formerly mentioned remedies and kept in its place Now it will bee recovered about the twentieth day after it is set During all which time the Patient must not goe to stoole unlesse sitting upon a hollow seat lest the bone as yet scarce well recovered should fall againe out of its place CHAP. XX. Of the Luxation of the Ribs THe Ribs may by a great and bruising stroake bee dislocated and fall from the vertebrae whereto they are articulated and they may bee driven inwards or side-waies Of which kinde of Luxation though there be no particular mention made by the Ancients yet they confesse that all the bones may fall or be removed from their seats or cavities wherin they are received and articulated The signe of a Rib dislocated and slipped on one side is a manifest inequality which here makes a hollownesse and there a bunching forth but it is a signe that it is driven in when as there is only a depressed cavitie where it is knit and fastened to the vertebrae Such dislocations cause divers symptomes as difficulty of breathing the hurt rib hindring the free moving of the chest a painfulnesse in bowing downe or lifting up the bodie occasioned by a paine counterfeiting a pleurisie the rising or puââing up of the musculous flesh about the rib by a mucous and flatulent humor there generated the reasons whereof we formerly mentioned in our Treatise of Fractures To withstand all these the dislocation must bee forthwith restored then the puffing up of the flesh must bee helped Wherefore if the dislocated Rib shall fall upon the upper side of the vertebrae the Patient shall be set upright hanging by his armes upon the toppe of some high doore or window then the head of the rib where it stands forth shal be pressed downe untill it be put into its cavity Againe if the rib shall fall out upon the lower side of the vertebra it will be requisite that the Patient bend his face do ãâã wards setting his hands upon his knees then the dislocation may be restored by pressing or thrusting in the knot or bunch which stands forth But if the luxated rib fall inwards it can no more be restored or drawn forth by the hand of the Surgeon than a vertebra which is dislocated towards the inside for the reasons formerly delivered CHAP. XXI Of a Dislocated shoulder THe shoulder is easily dislocated because the ligaments of its dearticulation are soft and loose as also for that the cavitie of the shoulder-blade is not very deepe and besides it is every where smooth and polite no otherwise than that of the shoulder-bone for that it is herein received Adde hereunto that there is no internall ligament from bone to bone which may strengthen that dearticulation as is in the legge and knee Wherein notwithstanding we must not thinke nature defective but rather admire Gods providence in this thing for that this articulation serves not onely for extension and bending as that of the Elbow but besides for a round or circular motion as that which carries the arme round about now up then downe according to each difference of site The shoulder-bone which Hippocrates cals the Arme-bone may be dislocated foure manner of waies upwards downe-wards or into the Arme-pit forwards and outwards but never backwards or to the hinde part For seeing that there the cavitie of the blade-bone which receives the head of the arm-bone which Hippocrates cals a Joynt lyes and stands against it who is it that can but imagin any such dislocation In like sort it is never dislocated inwardly for on this part it hath the flesh of a strong muscle termed Deltoides lying over it besides also the backe and acromion of the Blade and lastly the anker-like or beake-like processe all which foure hinder this joynt from slipping inwards Now Hippocrates saith that he hath only seene one kinde of Dislocation of this bone to wit that which is downe-wards or to the arme-pit and certainly it is the most usuall and frequent wherefore we intend to handle it in the first place When the shoulder is dislocated down-wards into the Arme-pit a depressed cavitie may bee perceived in the upper part of the joynt the acromion of the Blade shewes more sharpe and standing forth than ordinarie for that the head of the shoulder-bone is slipt downe and hid under the arme-pit causing a swelling forth in that place the Elbow also casts it selfe as it were outwards and stands further off from the ribs and though you force it yet can you not make it to touch them the Patient cannot lift up his hand to his care on that side neyther to his mouth nor shoulder Which signe is not peculiar to the luxated shoulder but common to it affected with a contusion fracture inflammation wound abscesse scirrâus or any defluxion upon the nerves arising out of the vertebrae of the neck and sent into the arme also this arme is longer than the other Lastly which also is common to each difference of a luxated shoulder the Patient can move his arme by no kinde of motion without sense of paine by reason of the extended and pressed muscles some also of their fibres being broken There are sixe wayes to restore the shoulder luxated down-wards into the arme-pit The first is when it is performed with ones fist or a towell The second with a clew of yarne which put under the arme-pit shall be thrust up with ones heele The third with ones shoulder put under the Arme-hole which maner together with the first is most fit for new and easily to be restored luxations as in those who have loose flesh and effeminate persons as children eunuches and women The fourth with a ball put under the Arme-pit and then the Arme cast over a piece of wood held upon two
mens shoulders or two standing posts The fifth with a Ladder The sixth with an Instrument called an Ambi. Wee will describe these sixe waies and present them to your view CHAP. XXII Of the first manner of setting a Shoulder which is with ones fist FIrst let one of sufficient strength placed on the opposite side firmly hold the Patient upon the joynt of the Shoulder lest he move up and downe with his whole bodie at the necessarie extension working and putting it in then let another taking hold of his arme above the elbow so draw and extend it downe-wards that the head thereof may be set just against its cavitie hollowed in the blade-bone Then at last let the Surgeon lift and force up with his fist the head of the bone into its cavitie Here this is chiefly to be observed that in fresh luxations especially in a bodie soft effeminate moist and not over corpulent that it sometimes comes to passe that by the only meanes of just extension the head of the bone freed from the muscles and other particles wherewith it was as it were intangled will betake it selfe into its proper cavitie the muscles being by this meanes restored to their place and figure and drawing the bone with them as they draw themselves towards their heads as it were with a sudden gird or twitch wherefore in many whilest we thought no such thing it sufficed for restitution only to have extended the arme But if the Luxation bee inveterate and the hand cannot serve then must the Patients shoulder be fastned to a Poste with the forementioned Ligature or else committed to ones charge who may stand at his backe and hold him fast Then the arme shall presently be tyed about a little above the elbow with a fillet whereto a cord shall be fastened which being put or fastened to the Pulley shall be drawne or stretched forth as much as need shall require Lastly the Surgeon with a towell or such like Ligature fastened about his necke and hanging down and so put under the Patients arme-pit neare to the Luxation shall raising himselfe upon his feete with the whole strength of his necke lift up the shoulder and also at the same time bringing his arme to the Patients breast shall set the head of the shoulder-bone forced with both his hands into its cavitie as you may see by this ensuing figure An expression of the first manner of putting a Shoulder into Joynt Then must you cover all the adjacent parts with a medicine made ex farina volatili bolo armenio myrtillis pice resina alumine beaten into powder and mixed with the white of an egge Then must the hollownesse under the arm be filled with a clew of Woollen or Cotton yarne or a linnen cloth spred over with a little oyle of Roses or Myrtles a little vinegar and unguentum rosatum or infrigidans Galeni lest it sticke to the haires if there be any there The part must afterwards be bound up with a ligature consisting of two heads of some five fingers breadth and two ells long more or lesse according as the bodie shall require The midst thereof shall be put immediately under the arme-pit and then crossed over the lame shoulder and so crossing it as much as shal be fit it shall be wrapped under the opposite arme And lastly the arme shall be layd upon the breast and put in a scarfe in a middle figure almost to right angles so that by lifting up the hand hee may almost touch his sound shoulder lest the bone newly set may fall out againe neyther shall the first dressing be stirred untill foure or five daies be past unlesse the greatnesse of some happening symptome divert us from this our purpose CHAP. XXIII Of the second manner of restoring a Shoulder that is with the heele when as the Patient by reason of paine can neither sit nor stand THe Patient must be layd with his backe on the ground upon a Cover-lid or Mat and a clew of yarne or leathern-ball stuffed with tow or cotton of such bignesse as may serve to fill up the cavitie must be put under his arm-pit that so the bone may straight-wayes the more easily be forced by the heele into its cavitie Then let the Surgeon sit beside him even over against the luxated shoulder and if his right shoulder be luxated he shall put his right heele to the ball which filled up the arme-pit but if the left then the left heele then let him forthwith draw towards him the Patients arme taking hold thereof with both his hands and at the same instant of time strongly presse the arme-pit with his heele Whilst this is in doing one shall stand at the Patients backe who shall lift up his shoulder with a towell or some such thing fitted for that purpose and also with his heele presse downe the top of the shoulder-blade another also shall sit on the other side of the Patient who holding him shall hinder him from stirring this way or that way at the necessary extension in setting it as you may see it exprest by the following figure The expression of the second manner of restoring a Shoulder CHAP. XXIV Of the third manner of restoring a Shoulder SOme one who is of a competent height and strength shall put the sharpe part of the toppe of his shoulder under the Patients arme-pit and also at the same time shall somewhat violently draw his arme towards his owne breast so that the Patients whole bodie may as it were hang thereby In the meane time another for the greater impression shall lay his weight on the luxated shoulder shaking it with his whole bodie Thus the shoulder drawne downe-wards by the one which stands under the arme-hole and moved and shaken by the other who hangs upon it may bee restored into its seat by the helpe of the Surgeon concurring therewith and with his hand governing these violent motions as the following figure shews The figure of the third manner of putting a Shoulder into Joynt CHAP. XXV Of the fourth manner of restoring a dislocated Shoulder YOu must take a perch or piece of Wood somewhat resembling that which the Water-bearers of Paris use to put on their shoulders some two inches broad and some sixe foote long in the midst hereof let there bee fastened a clew of yarne or ball of sufficient bignesse to fill up the cavitie of the arme-hole Let there be two pins put in one on each side of the ball each alike distant there-from with which as with stayes the shoulder may be kept in and upon the ball that it slip not away from it Let two strong men taller than the Patient eyther by nature or art put this perch upon their shoulders then let the Patient put his arme-pit upon that place where the ball stands up the Surgeon must be ready to pull his hanging arme downe-wards Thus the Patient shall as it were hang on the perch with his shoulder and so
the head of the bone shall bee forced into its cavitie as this ensuing Figure declares wherein you may see the perch or yoake with the two woodden pins and ball fastened in the midst delineated by its selfe The figure of the fourth manner of restoring the Shoulder CHAP. XXVI Of the fifth manner of putting the Shoulder into joynt which is performed by a Ladder YOu may also restore a Shoulder dislocated into the Arme-pit by the helpe of a Ladder after the following manner Let some round body as a ball or clew of yarne which as we formerly said may serve to fill the Arme-pit be fastened upon one of the upper steps of a Ladder at the foot of the Ladder set a low stoole whereupon let the Patient mount then binde both his legges and also his sound arme behind his back lest when you are about your operation he hinder and spoyle all you doe by laying his hand or setting his foote upon the Ladder Then let his Arme be presently put over the step of the Ladder and his Arme-pit put upon the there fastened bal the Patient in the meane while being wished to come with his whole body as neare unto the steps of the Ladder as he is able for otherwise besides that there is no other hope of restoring the Luxation there would bee no small danger of breaking the shoulder-bone Also let him take heede that he put not his head betweene the steps Then his Arme bound above the Elbow with filleââing or some other ligature fit for that purpose shall be drawne downe by the hand of some that assist you and at the same time let the stoole be plucked from under his feet so that hee may hang upon the Ladder Thus by this meanes the head of the Shoulder will bee restored by its selfe the endeavour of the Surgeon assisting and pressing downe the shoulder-blade and moving it to and againe The bone being set the stoole which a little before was plucked from under the Patients feet shall be put there againe that he may with the more ease and lesse paine pull backe his Arme from the step of the Ladder For if he should lift it high up to draw it over there would be danger lest being newly set and not well stayed the head of the bone might fall out againe I have thought good to have all these things here expressed that you may learne this operation as if you see it done before you The delineation of the fifth manner of restoring a Shoulder I have not thought fit in this place to omit the industrie of Nicholas Picart the Duke of Guise his Surgeon who being called to a certaine Countrey-man to set his Shoulder being out of joynt and finding none in the place besides the Patient and his wife who might assist him in this worke hee put the Patient bound after the forementioned manner to a Ladder then immediately hee tyed a staffe at the lower end of the Ligature which was fastened about the Patients arme above his Elbow then put it so tyed under one of the steps of the Ladder as low as he could and got astride thereupon and sate thereon with his whole weight and at the same instant made his wife to plucke the stoole from under his feet which being done the bone presently came into its place as you may see by the following figure Another figure expressing the fourth manner of restoring a dislocated Shoulder Another figure to the same purpose If you have never a Ladder you may use a peece of Wood layd a-crosse upon two Posts Also you may use a doore as the other figure shewes wherein you must observe a flat piece of Wood or spatula with strings thereat whose use shal be showne in the following Chapter CHAP. XXVII The sixth manner of restoring a Shoulder luxated into the Arme-pit HIppocrates writes that this is the best way of all to restore a dislocated Shoulder You must take a woodden spatula of some foure or five fingers breadth and some two fingers thicknesse or lesse but some yard or thereupon long the one end thereof must bee narrow and thin with a round head standing up and lightly hollowed that put under the Arme-pit it may receive part of the head of the shoulder-bone the which for that purpose must not bend towards the ribs but to the top of the Shoulder This upper part of the spatula must bee wrapped about with a linnen or woollen ragge or some such soft thing that it may be the softer and hurt the lesse and then it must be so thrust under the Arme-pit that it may throughly penetrate into the inner part betweene the ribs and the head of the Shoulder-bone There must besides in this spatula be two holes in three severall places each alike distant from other through which let soft strings be put whereby it may be tyed to the arme stretched all the length thereof even to the fingers in one place a little below the head of the shoulder-bone in another a little above the elbow and the third at the wrest that so they may hold it firme Therefore let the distances of the holes bee fitted to this purpose but principally you must have a care of this that the upper part of the spatula reaching beyond the head of the arme enter even to the innermost Cavity of the arme-pit then a crosse pin or piece of wood must be made fast through two postes or a frame well fastened thereto and therupon the Arme with the spatula must be so put over that the pin may be under the arme-pit the body weighing one way and the arme another which being done the arme must be drawn down one way and the body another about the pin Now this crosse pin must bee put on such a height that the patient may stand on tipp-toes Now this is the very best way of restoring a shoulder In stead of two posts or a frame you may make shift with a ladder doore beds postes and such like things as shall bee there present I have heard Henry Arvet a very good surgeon of Orleans say that he never attempted this manner of putting into joint a shoulder dislocated into the arme-pit without good successe unlesse by chance which also is noted by Hippocrates that the flesh is growne into the cavity and the head of the bone hath made it selfe another cavity in the place whereinto it is fallen for in this case the bone will either not bee restored or else not remaine in its place but fall backe notwithstanding into the new hollowed cavity which serves it in stead of its naturall socket or cavity But I must here admonish young Surgeons that if the bone be not restored at the first endeavour and onset that they doe not despaire and presently desist from their entended operation but they must winde about and gently move the joint for so at the length it will bee more easily moved and enter into the
naturall cavity When it is in it must bee bound up with compresses and rowlers after the forementioned manner To the former figures I have thought good to adde this which expresseth the maner of restoring a shoulder luxated into the arme-pit with a spatula after the manner of Hippocrates This spatula fastened with an iron pin to the standing frame may be turned lifted up and pressed downe at your pleasure A. shewes the wooden spatula B. The frame or standing postes Hippocrates his Glossocomium termed Ambi. For the more certaine use of this instrument the patient must sit upon a seate which must be somewhat lower than the standing frame that so the spatula which is thrust into the arme-pit may be the more forcibly deprest so to force in the head of the shoulder-bone the patients feete must also be tyed that hee may not raise himselfe up whilest the Surgeon endevours to restore it Now he shall then endevour to restore it when he shall have bound the stretched forth arme of the dislocated shoulder unto the spatula thrust the one end therof under the slipped forth head of the shoulder bone as wee have formerly shewed for then by pressing downe the other end of the spatula which goes to the hand the bone is forced into its cavity You must diligently observe the wooden spatula which therefore I have caused to be expressed by it selfe which Hippocrates calleth Ambi whose head is a little hollowed where it is noted with this letter B. The whole spatula is marked with this letter A. with three strings hanging thereat provided for the binding of the arme that it may be kept steddy as you may perceive by the ensuing figure The figure of an Ambi fitted to a dislocated shoulder There are other additions to this Ambi whose figure I now exhibited to your view by the invention of Nicholas Picart the Duke of Lorrain's Surgion the use and knowledge whereof bestowed upon mee by the inventor himselfe I would not envie the studious reader Another figure of an Ambi with the additaments AA Shew the two eares as it were stops made to hold and keep in the top of the shoulder lest it should slippe out when it is put into the frame or supporter BB. The frame or supporter whereon the Ambi rests CC. The pin or axeltree which fastens the Ambi to the supporter DD. Screw-pinnes to fasten the foote of the supporter that it stirre not in the operation EE The holes in the foote of the supporter whereby you may fasten the screw-pins to the floore CHAP. XXVIII How to restore a shoulder dislocated forewards IT is seldome that the shoulder is luxated towards the foreside yet there is nothing so stable and firme in our bodies which may not be violated by a violent assault so that those bones doe also fall out of joint whose articulations are strengthened for the firmer connexion with fleshly nervous gristly and bony stayes or barres This you may perceive by this kinde of dislocated shoulder strengthened as it were with a strong wall on every hand to wit the Acromium and the end of the collar bone seeming to hinder it as also the great and strong muscles Epomis and Biceps Hippocrates shut up within the strait bounds of the lesser Asia never saw this kinde of dislocation which was observed fivetimes by Galen I professe I have seene it but once and that was in a certaine Nun which weary of the Nunnery cast her selfe downe out of a window and bore the fall and weight of her body upon her elbow so that her shoulder was dislocated forewards This kinde of dislocation is knowne by the depravation of the conformation or figure of the member by the head of the shoulder wrested out towards the breast as also the patient cannot bend his elbow It is restored by the same meanes as other luxations of other parts to wit by strait holding extending and forcing in Therefore the patient must bee placed upon the ground with his face upwards and then you must extend the shoulder otherwise than you doe when it is luxated into the arme-pit For when it falleth into the arme-hole it is first drawne forewards then forced upwards untill it bee brought just against the cavity whereinto it must enter But in this kinde of luxation because the toppe of the shoulder is in the fore parts of the dearticulation shut up with muscles opened both to the outer as also to the inner part you must worke to the contrary to wit to the hinde part But first of all you must place a servant at the backe of the patient who may draw backe a stronge and broade Bandage cast about the arme-pit such as is the Carchesius which consists of two contrary and continued strings lest that when the arme shall be extended the shoulder follow also you must put a clew of yarne to fill up the armepit Then must you extend the arme casting another ligature a little above the elbow and in the interim have a care that the head thereof fall not into the arme-pit which may be done both by putting the forementioned clew under the arme and drawing the head another way then must you permit by slacking your extension the joint freed from the encompassing muscles to be drawne and forced into its cavity by the muscles forcible recoiling as with an unanimous consent into themselves and their originals for thus it will easily bee restored and such extension onely is sufficient thereto CHAP. XXIX Of the shoulder luxated outwardly THe dislocation also of the shoulder to the outward parts seldom happens but yet if it may at any time happen the extension of the arme will bee very difficult but yet more difficult towards the outward part than towards the inward there is a depressed cavity perceived towards the chest but externally a bunching forth to wit in that part from whence the head of the shoulder-bone is fled For the restoring hereof the patient must bee laid flat on his belly and the elbow must be forcibly drawne contrary to that whereto it is fled to wit inwardly to the breast and also the standing forth head of the arm-bone must bee forced into its cavity for thus it shall bee easily restored But into what part soever the shoulder-bone is dislocated the arme must be extended and drawne directly downewards After the restitution fitting medicines shall be put about the joint Let there bee somewhat put into the arme-pit which may fill it up and let compresses or boulsters bee applyed to that part to which the luxated bone fell then all these things shall be strengthened and held fast with a strong and broad two headed ligature put under the armepit and so brought acrosse upon the joint of the shoulder and thence carried unto the opposite arme-pit by so many windings as shall be judged requisite Then the arme must be put and carried in a scarfe
to right angles which figure must be observed not onely in every luxation of the shoulder but in each fracture of the arme also for that it is lesse painefull and consequently such as the arme may stand the longest therein without moving CHAP. XXX Of the shoulder dislocated upwards THe head of the shoulder also may sometimes bee luxated into the upper part Which when it happens it shewes it selfe by bunching forth at the end of the Collar bone the hollowness of the arme-pit is found larger than usuall the elbow flyes further from the ribs than when it fell downewards now the arme is wholly unable to performe the usuall actions It is fit for the restitution of such a luxation that the Surgeon stoope downe and put his shoulder under the patients arme and then stand up as high as he can upon his feete and therewithall presse downe the head of the shoulder-bone into the cavity or else make some other to doe it Otherwise it is fit to lay the Patient upon his backe on the ground and whilest some one extends the affected arme by drawing it downe-wards the Surgeon with his owne hand may force downe the head of the bone into its cavity The operation performed the same things shall bee done as in other luxations compresses being applyed to that part whereto the bone flew and it being also bound up with ligatures Now you may understand in these foure forementioned kindes of dislocations that the bone which was luxated is restored by the sound which shall bee heard as you force it in by the restitution of the accustomed actions which are perceived by the bending extending and lifting it up by the mitigation of the paine and lastly by the collation and comparing of the affected arme with the sound and by its similitude and equality therewith CHAP. XXXI Of the dislocation of the Elbow THe Elbow may also be foure manner of wayes dislocated to wit inwardly outwardly upwards and downewards By the part which is inwards I meane that which lookes towards the center of the body when as the arme is placed in a naturall site to wit in a middle figure betweene prone and supine I make the outward part that which is contrary thereto By the upper part I meane that which is towards the heaven and by the lower that which is next to the earth and by how much the joint of the elbow consists of more heads and cavities than that of the shoulder by so much when it is luxated it is the more difficultly set and it is also more subject to inflammation and to grow hard thereupon as Hippocrates saith Now the joint of the elbow is more difficultly dislocated than that of the shoulder and more hardly set for that the bones of the cubit and arme doe receive and enter each other by that manner of articulation which is termed Ginglymus as wee have formerly more at large treated in our Anatomy and a little before in our treatise of fractures The Elbow is therefore dislocated for that the processes thereof are not turned about the shoulder-bone in a full orbe and by an absolute turning Wherefore if at any time the cubit be bended more straitly and closely than that the inner processe can retaine its place and station in the bottom of its sinuâ the hinde processe falleth out and is dislocated backwards But when as the foreprocesse is extended more violently and forced against the bottom of its cavity it flyes and departs out of its place as beaten or forced thence and this kinde of luxation is farre more difficultly restored than the former adde hereunto that the utter extremitie of the cubite which is called Olecranum is the higher but the other inner is the lower whence it is that every one can better and more easily bend than extend their cubits Therfore such a dislocation is caused by a more violent force than that which is made to the inner side The signe of this luxation is the arme remaines extended neither can it be bended for the inner processe stayes in the externall cavity which is hollowed in the bottom of the shoulder-bone which formerly was possessed by the inner part of the Olecranum which thing makes the restitution difficult for that this processe is kept as it were imprisoned there But when it falleth out dislocated to the fore part the arme is crooked neither is it extended and it is also shorter than the other But if the elbow bee fallen out of its place according to the other manner of dislocations to wit upwards or downewards the naturall figure thereof is perverted for the arme is stretched forth but little notwithstanding bended towards that part from whence the bone went that is figured after a middle manner betweene bending and extending thereof What kinde soever of dislocation shall befall it the action of the Elbow will either not bee at all or certainely not well untill that it be restored to its former place there is a swelling in the part wherinto it is flowne and a cavity there from whence it is fled which also happens in the dislocations of all other parts Furthermore one dislocation of the Elbow is compleat and perfect another imperfect The latter as it easily happens and through a small occasion so it is easily restored but on the contrary a perfect as it hardly happens and not unlesse with great violence so it is not so easily restored againe especially if that you doe not prevent inflammation for being inflamed it makes the restitution either difficult or wholly impossible principally that which falleth outwards CHAP. XXXII How to restore the Elbow dislocated outwardly YOu may know that the elbow is dislocated outwardly if at any time you shall observe the arme to be distended and not able to be bended Wherefore you must forth with undertake the restitution thereof for feare of defluxion and inflammation which the bitternesse of pain usually causeth upon what part soever the luxation happen There is one manner of restoring it which is you must cause one to hold hard and steddy the patients arme a little under the joint of the shoulder and in the meane while let the Surgeon draw the arme taking hold thereof with his hand and also force the shoulder-bone outwards and the eminency of the cubit inwards but let him by little and little draw and extend the arme wresting it gently this way and that way that he may bring back the bone which fell out into its cavity I have thus expressely delivered this that the young Surgeon may understand that the arme must not be bended for the restoring of this kinde of dislocation for restitution cannot so be hoped for because by this kind of luxation the inner processe of the cubit possesseth the place of the exteriour processe in the cavity of the shoulder-bone Wherefore whilest the arme is bended or crooked the cubit is onely lifted up and not drawne into its seat But
vessels cast it forth that cure is not unprofitable which having used medicines respecting the whole body applyes astringent medicines to the shaved crown as Empl. contra rupturam which may streighten the veines and as it were suspend the phlegme useth cupping and commands frictions to bee made towards the hinde part of the head and lastly maketh a Seton in the necke There are some who cauterize the toppe of the crowne with a hot iron even to the bone so that it may cast a scaile thus to divert and stay the defluxion For locall medicines a Collyrium made with a good quantity of rosewater with a little vitrioll dissolved therein may serve for all CHAP. XII Of the Ophthalmia or inflammation of the Eyes AN Ophthalmia is an inflammation of the coate Adnata and consequently of the whole eye being troublesome by the heate rednesse beating renitency and lastly paine It hath its originall either by some primitive cause or occasion as a fall stroake dust or small sand flying into the eyes For the eye is a smooth part so that it is easily offended by rough things as saith Hippocrates lib. de carnibus Or by an antecedent cause as a defluxion falling upon the eyes The signes follow the nature of the materiall cause for from blood especially cholerike and thin it is full of heat rednesse and paine from the same allayed with phlegme all of them are more remisse But if a heavinesse possess the whole head the original of the disease proceeds therfrom But if a hot pain trouble the forehead the disease may be thought to proceed from some hot distemper of the Dura water or the pericranium but if in the very time of the raging of the disease the patient vomit the matter of the disease proceeds from the stomacke But from whence soever it commeth there is scarce that paine of any part of the body which may be compared to the paine of the inflamed eyes Verily the greatnesse of the inflammation hath forced the eyes out of their orbe and broken them asunder in divers Therefore there is no part of Physicke more blazed abroad than for sore eyes For the cure the Surgeon shall consider and intend three things diet the evacuation of the antecedent and conjunct cause and the overcomming it by topicke remedies The diet shall bee moderate eschewing all things that may fill the head with vapours and those things used that by astriction may strengthen the orifice of the ventricle and prohibite the vapours from flying up to the head the patient shall bee forbidden the use of wine unlesse peradventure the disease may proceed from a grosse and viscide humour as Galen delivers it The evacuation of the matter flowing into the eye shall bee performed by purging medicines phlebotomy in the arm cupping the shoulders and neck with scarification and without and lastly by frictions as the Physitian that hath undertaken the cure shall thinke it fit Galen after universall remedies for old inflammations of the eyes commends the opening of the veines and arteryes in the forehead and temples because for the most part the vessels therabouts distended with acride hot and vaporous blood cause great vehement paines in the eye For the impugning of the conjunct cause divers topick medicines shall be applyed according to the four sundry times or seasons that every phlegmon usually hath For in the beginning when as the acride matter flowes downe with much violence repercussives doe much conduce ãâã and tempred with resolving medicines are good also in the encrease â aq ros et plantag an ⥠ss mucagin gum Tragacanth Êii album ovi quod sufficit fiat collyrium let it bee dropped warme into the eye and let a double cloth dipped in the same collyrium bee put upon it Or â mucag. sem psil cydon extractae in aq plant an ⥠ss aq solan lactis muliebris an ⥠i. trochise alb rha â i. fiat collyrium use this like the former The veins of the templesmay be streighteneâ by the following medicine â bol arm sang drac mast an ⥠i. ss alb ovi aquae ros acet an ⥠i. tereb lot ol cidon an ⥠ss fiat defensivum You may also use ungde Bolo empl diacal or contrarupturam dissolved in oyle of myrtles and a little vineger But if the bitternesse of the paine be intolerable the following cataplasme shall be applyed â medul pomor sub ciner coctorum ⥠iii. lactis muliebris ⥠ss let it be applyed to the eye the formerly prescribed collyrium being first dropped in Or â mucag sem psil cidon an ⥠ss micae panis albi in lacte infusi ⥠ii aquae ros ⥠ss fiat cataplasma The bloud of a turtle Dove Pigeon or Hen drawne by opening a veine under the wings dropped into the eye asswageth paine Baths are not onely anodine but also stay the defluxion by diverting the matter thereof by sweats therefore Galen much commends them in such defluxions of the eyes as come by fits In the state when as the paine is either quite taken away or asswaged you may use the following medicines â sarcocol in lacte muliebri nutritae Êi aloës lotain aq rofar â ii trochis alb rha Êss sacchar cand Êii aquae ros ⥠iii. fiat collyrium Or â sem faeniculi fanug an Êii flo chamae melil an m. ss coquantur in aq com ad ⥠iii. colaturae adde tuthiae praep sareoc nutritae in lacte muliebri an Êi ss sacchari cand ⥠ss fiat collyrium ut artis est In the declination the eye shall be fomented with a carminative decoction and then this collyrium dropped thereinto â nutritaeÊii aloës myrrh an Êi aq ros euphrag an ⥠ii fiat collyrium ut artis est CHAP. XIII Of the Proptosis that is the falling or starting forth of the eye and of the Phthisis and Chemosis of the same THe Greekes call that affect Proptosis the Latines procidentia or Exitus oculi when as the eye stands and is cast out of the orbe by the occasion of a matter filling and lifting up the eye into a greater bignesse and largenesse of substance The cause of this disease is sometimes externall as by too violent strayning to vomit by hard labour in child-birth by excessive and wondrous violent shouting or crying out It sometimes happeneth that a great and cruell paine of the head or the too strait binding of the forehead and temples for the easing thereof or the palsie of the muscles of the eye give beginning to this disease Certainely sometimes the eye is so much distended by the defluxion of humors that it breakes in sunder and the humours thereof are shed and blindenesse enfues thereof as I remember befell the sister of Lewis de Billy merchant dwelling at Paris near S. Michael's bridg The cure shall be diversified according to the causes
out of the ureter bladder and passage of the urine now will we briefly shew the manner of taking of greater stones out of the bladder which is performed by incision and iron instruments and I will deliver the practice thereof first in children then in men and lastly in women First therefore let the Surgeon take the boy upon whom it is determined the worke shall be performed under the arme holes and so give him five or sixe shakes that so the stone may descend the more downewards to the neck of the bladder The must you cause a strong man sitting upon a high seat to lay the child upon his backe with his face from himward having his hips lying upon his knees The child must lye somewhat high that he may breathe the freelier let not the nervous parts be too much stretched but let all parts be loose and free for the drawing forth of the stone Furthermore it is fit that this strong man the childs legges being bended backe wish the child that putting his legs to his hams that he draw them up as much as he can let the other be sure he keep them so for this site of the child much conduceth to well performing of the worke Then let the Surgeon thrust two of the fingers of his left hand as farre into the childs fundament as hee is able but let him with his other hand presse the lower belly first wrapping a cloth about his hand that so the compression may be the lesse troublesome and lest inflammation should happen rather by this meanes than by the incision Now the compression hath this use to cause the stone descend out of the bottome of the bladder into the neck thereof under the os pubis whither after it is arrived it must be there kept as it were governed by the command of your hand lest it should slide from that place whereto you have brought it These things thus done nothing now remaineth but that the Surgeon with a wound some two fingers breadth distant from the fundament cut through all the flesh even to the stone on the left side of the perinaeum But in the interim let him beware that he hurt not the intestinum rectum for it may and usually doth happen that whilest the stone is brought out of the bottome of the bladder to the neck thereof this gut is doubled in now if it bee cut with your incision knife it commeth to passe that the excrements may sometimes come out at the wound and the urine by the fundament which thing hath in many hindred the agglutination and consolidation of the wound yet in some others it hath done little harme because in this tender age many things happen which may seeme to exceed nature the incision being made the stone must bee plucked forth with the instrument here expressed Hookes to pull stones forth of childrens bladders The stone being drawne out a small pipe shall be put into the wound and there kept for some space after for reasons hereafter to bee delivered then his knees shall bee bound together for thus the wound will the sooner close and bee agglutinated The residue of the cure shall be performed by reducing the generall cure of wounds to the particular temper of the childs age and the peculiar nature of the child in cure CHAP. XLII How to cut men for the taking out of the stone in the bladder SEing wee cannot otherwise helpe such men as have stones in their bladders we must come to the extreme remedy to wit cutting But the patient must first be purged and if the case require draw somebloud yet must you not immediately after this or the day following hasten to the work for the patient cannot but be weakened by purging bleeding Also it is expedient for some daies before to foment the privities with such things as relaxe and soften that by their yeelding the stone may the more easily be extracted Now the cure is thus to be performed The patient shall be placed upon a firm table or bench with a cloth many times doubled under his buttocks and a pillow under his loynes back so that he may lie halfe upright with his thighs lifted up and his legs and heels drawn back to his buttocks Then shall his feet be bound with a ligature of three fingers breadth cast about his ankles and with the heads thereof being drawn upwards to his neck and cast about it and so brought downewards both his hands shall bee bound to his knees as the following figure sheweth The figure of a man lying ready to be cut for the stone The patient thus bound it is fit you have foure strong men at hand that is two to hold his armes and other two who may so firmely and straightly hold the knee with one hand and the foot with the other that he may neither move his limmes nor stirre his buttocks but be forced to keep in the same posture with his whole body Then the Surgeon shall thrust into the urenary passage even to the bladder a silver or iron and hollow probe annoynted with oyle and opened or slit on the out side that the point of the knife may enter thereinto and that it may guide the hand of the workman and keep the knife from piercing any farther into the bodies lying there-under The figure of this probe is here exprest Probes with slits in their ends He shall gently wrest the probe being so thrust in towards the left side and also he who standeth on the patients right hand shall with his left hand gently lift up his Cods that so in the free and open space of the left side of the perinaeum the Surgeon may have the more liberty to make the incision upon the probe which is thrust in and turned that way But in making this incision the Surgeon must be carefull that he hurt not the seame of the perinaeum and fundament For if that seame bee cut it will not be easily consolidated for that it is callous and bloudlesse therefore the urine would continually drop forth this way But if the wound be made too neare the fundament there is danger lest by forcible plucking forth of the stone he may break some of the haemorrhoide veins whence a bleeding may ensue which is scarce to be stopped by any meanes or that hee may rend the sphincter muscle or body of the bladder so that it can never be repaired Therefore it must be made the space of two fingers from the fundament according to the straightnesse of the fibres that so it may be the more easily restored afterwards Neither must the incision thus made exceed the bignesse of ones thumbe for that it is afterwards enlarged by putting in the Crowes beake and the dilater but more by the stone as it is plucked forth But that which is cut is neither so speedily nor easily healed up as that which is torne Then
feavers we open a veine to breathe out that bloud which is heated in the vessels and cooling the residue which remaines behind The fift is to prevent imminent diseases as when in the Spring and Autumne we draw bloud by opening a veine in such as are subject to spitting of bloud the squinancie pleurisie falling sicknesse apoplexie madnesse gout or in such as are wounded for to prevent the inflammation which is to be feared Before bloud letting if there bee any old excrements in the guts they shall bee evacuated by a gentle glyster or suppository lest the mesaraicke veines should thence draw unto them any impuritie Bloud must not be drawne from ancient people unlesse some present necessity require it lest the native heat which is but languid in them should be brought to extreme debility and their substance decay neither must any in like sort be taken from children for feare of resolving their powers by reason of the tendernesse of their substance rareness of their habit The quantity of bloud which is to be let must bee considered by the strength of the patient and greatnesse of the disease therefore if the patient bee weake and the disease require large evacuation it will bee convenient to part the letting of bloud yea by the interposition of some dayes The veine of the forehead being opened is good for the paine of the hind part of the head yet first we foment the part with warme water that so the skin may be the foster and the bloud drawne into the veines in greater plenty In the squinancie the veines which are under the tongue must be opened assant without putting any ligatures about the neck for feare of strangling Phlebotomie is necessary in all diseases which stop or hinder the breathing or take away the voice or speech as likewise in all contusions by a heavie stroake or fall from high in an apoplexie squinancie and burning feaver though the strength be not great nor the bloud faulty in quantity or quality bloud must not be let in the height of a fever Most judge it fit to draw bloud from the veines most remote from the affected and inflamed part for that thus the course of the humours may be diverted the next veines on the contrary being opened the humours may be the more drawne into the affected part and so increase the burden and paine But this opinion of theirs is very erroneous for an opened veine alwaies evacuates and disburdens the next part For I have sundry times opened the veines and arteries of the affected part as of the hands feet in the Gout of these parts of the temples in the Megrim whereupon the paine alwayes was somewhat asswaged for that together with the evacuated bloud the malignitie of the Gout and the hot spirits the causers of the head-ach or Megrim were evacuated For thus Galen wisheth to open the arteries of the temples in a great and contumacious defluxion falling upon the eyes or in the Megrim or head-ach CHAP. LX. How to open a veine and draw bloud from thence THE first thing is to seat or place the patient in as good a posture as you can to wit in his bed if he be weak but in a chaire if strong yet so that the light may fall directly upon the veine which you intend to open Then the Surgeon shall rub the arme with his hand or a warme linnen cloth that the bloud may flow the more plenitfully into the vein Then he shall bind the veine with a ligature a little above the place appointed to be opened and hee shall draw back the bloud upwards towards the ligature from the lower part and if it be the right arme he shall take hold thereof with his left hand but if the left then with his right hand pressing the veine in the meane time with his thumbe a little below the place where you meane to open it lest it should slip away and that it may bee the more swolne by forcing up the bloud Then with his naile hee shall marke or designe the place to be opened and shall annoint it being so marked with butter or oyle whereby the skin may be relaxed and the lancet enter more easily and therefore the section may be the lesse painefull He shal hold his lancet between his thumb and fore finger neither too neer nor too far from the point he shall rest his other three fingers upon the patients arme that so his hand may be the more steddy lesse trembling Then shall he open the vein with an incision agreeable to the magnitude of the vessell the indifferent thicknesse of the conteined bloud somewhataslant diligently avoiding the artery which lies under the basilica the nerve or tendon of the two-headed muscle which lyes under the Median veine But for the Cephalicke it may be opened without danger As much bloud as is sufficient being drawne according to the minde of the Physician he shall loose the ligature and laying a little boulster under hee shall with a ligature bind up the wounded part to stay the bleeding the ligation shall be neither too strait nor loose but so that the patient may freely bend and extend his arme wherefore whilest that is in doing he must not hold his arme streight out but gently bended otherwise he cannot freely bend it The figure of a Lancet to let bloud withall CHAP. LXI Of Cupping-glasses or ventoses CUpping-glasses are applyed especially when the matter conjunct and impact in any part is to be evacuated and then chiefly there is place for sacrification after the cupping-glasses yet they are also applyed for revulsion and divertion for when an humour continually flowes down into the eyes they may be applyed to the shoulders with a great flame for so they draw more strongly and effectually They are also applyed under womens breasts for to stop the courses flowing too immoderately but to their thighes for to provoke them They are also applyed to such as are bit by venemous beasts as also to parts possessed by a pestiferous Bubâ or Carbuncle so to draw the poyson from within outwards For as Celsus saith a Cupping-glasse where it is fastned on if the skin be first scarified drawes forth bloud but if it bee whole then it draws spirit Also they are applyed to the belly when any grosse or thick windinesse shut up in the guts or membraines of the muscles of the Epigaâtrium or lower belly causing the Collick is to bee discussed Also they are fastned to the Hypocondry's when as flatulency in the liver or spleene swels up the entraile lying thereunder or in too great a bleeding at the nose Also they are set against the Reines in the bottome of the belly whereas the ureters run downe to draw downe the stone into the bladder when as it stops in the middle or entrance of the ureter You shall make choice of greater and lesser Cupping-glasses according
Antidotes inwardly and applyed them outwardly for the most part escaped and recovered their health for that kind of Pestilence tooke its originall of the primitive and solitary default of the Aire and not of the corruption of the humours The like event was noted in the hoarsenesse that we spake of before that is to say that the patients waxed worse and worse by purging and phlebotomie but yet I doe not disallow either of those remedies if there be great fulnesse in the body especially in the beginning and if the matter have a cruell violence whereof may bee feared the breaking in unto some noble part For wee know that it is confirmed by Hypocrates that what disease soever is caused by repletion must be cured by evacuation and that in diseases that are very sharpe if the matter do swell it ought to be remedied the same day for delay in such diseases is dangerous but such diseases are not caused orinflicted upon mans body by reason or occasion of the pestilence but of the diseased bodies and diseases themselves commixed together with the Pestilence therefore then peradventure it is lawfull to purge strongly and to let a good quantity of bloud lâst that the pestilent venome should take hold of the matter that is prepared and so infect it with a contagion whereby the Pestilence taketh new and farregreater strength especially as Celsus admonisheth us where he saith that By how much the sooner those sudden invasions doe happen by so much the sooner remedies must be used yea or rather rashly applyed therefore if the veines swell the face waxe fiery red if the arteries of the temples beat strongly if the patient can very hardly breathe by reason of a weight in his stomacke if his spittle be bloudy then ought he to bee let bloud without delay for the causes before mentioned It seems best to open the liver veino on the left arme whereby the heart and the spleene may be better discharged of their abundant matter yet bloud-letting is not good at all times for it is not expedient when the body beginneth to waxe stiffe by reason of the comming of a Feaver for then by drawing backe the heat and spirits inwardly the outward parts being destitute of bloud waxe stiffe and cold therefore bloud cannot bee letten then without great losse of the strength and perturbation of the humours And it is to be noted that when those plethoricke causes are present there is one Indication of bloud-letting in a simple pestilent Feaver and another in that which hath a Bubo idest a Botch or a Carbuncle joined ther with For in one or both of these being joyned with a vehement strong burning Feaver bloud must be letten by opening the veine that is nearest into the tumour or swelling against nature keeping the straightness of the fibres that this being open the bloud might be drawn more directly from the part affected for all and every retraction of putrefied bloud unto the noble parts is to be avoyded because it is noysome and hurful to nature and to the patient Therefore for example sake admit the patient be plethoricke by repletion which is called Advasa idest unto the vessels and Advires idest unto the strength and there withall he hath a tumour that is pestilent in the parts belonging unto his head or necke the bloud must bee let out of the cephalick or median veine or out of one of their branches dispersed in the arme on the grieved side But if through occasion of fatte or any other such like cause those veines doe not appeare in the arme there bee some that give counsell in such a case to open the veine that is betweene the fore-finger and the thumbe the hand being put into warme water whereby that veine may swell and be filled with bloud gathered thither by meanes of the heate If the tumour be under the arme-hole or about those places the liver veine or the median must be opened which runneth alongst the hand if it be in the groine the veine of the hamme or Saphena or any other veine above the foote that appeareth well but alwaies on the grieved side And phlebotomie must bee performed before the third day for this disease is of the kind or nature of sharpe diseases because that within foure and twenty houres it runneth past helpe In letting of bloud you must have consideration of the strength You may perceive that the patient is ready to swoune when that his forehead waxeth moyst with a small sweate suddenly arising by the aking or paine at the stomacke with an appetite to vomit and desire to goe to stoole gaping blacknesse of the lippes and sudden alteration of the face unto palenesse and lastly most certaincly by a small and slow pulse and then you must lay your finger on the veine and stop it untill the patient come to himselfe againe either by nature or else restored by art that is to say by giving unto him bread dipped in wine or any other such like thing then if you have not taken bloud enough you must let it goe againe and bleed so much as the greatnesse of the disease or the strength of the patient will permit or require which being done some one of the Antidotes that are prescribed before will be very profitable to be drunk which may repaire the strength and infringe the force of the malignity CHAP. XXV Of purging medicines in a pestilent disease IFyou call to minde the proper indications purging shall seeme necessary in this kinde of disease and that must bee prescribed as the present case and necessity requireth rightly considering that the disease is sudden and doth require medicines that may with all speede drive out of the body the hurtfull humour wherein the noy some quality doth lurke and is hidden which medicines are diverse by reason of the diversity of the kinde of the humour and the condition or temperature of the patient For this purpose sixe graines of Scammonie beaten into powder or else tenne graines are commonly ministred to the patient with one dram of Treacle Also pils may be made in this forme Take of Treacle and Mithridate of each one dram of Sulphur vivum finely powdred halfe a dram of Diagridium foure graines make thereof Pils Or Take three drams of Aloes of Myrrhe and Saffron of each one dram of white Hellebore and Asarabacca of each foure scruples make thereof a masse with old Treacle and let the patient take foure scruples thereof for a dose three houres before meate Ruffus his pils may be profitably given to those that are weake The ancient Physicians have greatly commended Agarick for this disease because it doth draw the noysome humours out of all the members and the vertues thereof are like unto those of Treacle for it is thought to strengthen the heart and to draw out the malignity by purging To those that are strong the weight of two drams may be given and to those that
unlesse the spots appeare before If the patient fluxe at the mouth it must not bee stopped when the spots and pustles doe all appeare and the patient hath made an end of sweating it shall be convenient to use diureticke medicines for by these the remnant of the matter of the spots which happely could not all breath forth may easily be purged and avoyded by urine If any noble or gentlemen refuse to be anointed with this unguent let them be enclosed in the body of a Mule or Horse that is newly killed and when that is cold let them bee layed in another untill the pustles and eruptions doe breake forth being drawne by that naturall heat For so Mathiolus writeth that Valentinus the sonne of Pope Alexander the sixt was delivered from the danger of most deadly poyson which he had drunke CHAP. XXX Of a pestilent Bubo or Plague-sore APestilent Bubo is a tumor at the beginning long and moveable and in the state and full perfection copped and with a sharp head unmoveable and fixed deepely in the glandules or kernells by which the braine exonerates it selfe of the venemous and pestiferous matter into the kernells that are behind the eares and in the neck the heart into those that are in the arm-holes and the liver into those that are in the groine that is when all the matter is grosse and clammy so that it cannot be drawn out by spots and pustles breaking out on the skinne and so the matter of a Carbuncle is sharpe and so fervent that it maketh an Eschar on the place where it is fixed In the beginning while the Bubo is breeding it maketh the patient to feele as it were a cord or rope stretched in the place or a hardened nerve with pricking pain shortly after the matter is raised up as it were into a knob and by little and little it groweth bigger and is enflamed these accidents before mentioned accompanying it If the tumour be red and encrease by little and little it is a good and salutary signe but if it be livid or black and come very slowly unto his just bignesse it is a deadly signe It is also a deadly signe if it encrease sodainely and come unto his just bignesse as it were with a swift violence and as in a moment have all the symptomes in the highest excesse as paine swelling and burning Buboes or Sores appeare sometimes of a naturall colour like unto the skinne and in all other things like unto an oedematous tumour which notwithstanding will sodainely bring the patient to destruction like those that are livide and black wherefore it is not good to trust too much to those kindes of tumours CHAP. XXXI Of the cure of Buboes or Plague-sores SO soon as the Bubo appeares apply a Cupping-glasse with a great flame unto it unlesse it be that kinde of Bubo which will suddenly have all the accidents of burning and swelling in the highest nature but first the skinne must be anointed with the oyle of lillies that so it being made more loose the Cupping-glasse may draw the stronger and more powerfully it ought to sticke to the part for the space of a quarter of an houre be renewed and applyed again every three quarters of an houre for so at length the venom shall be the better drawn forth from any noble part that is weak and the work of suppuration or resolution whichsoever nature hath assaied will the better and sooner bee absolved and perfected which may bee also done by the application of the following ointment Take of Uuguentum Dialthaea one ounce and a halfe oile of Scorpions halfe an ounce of Mithridate dissolved in Aquavitae halfe a dramme this liniment will very well relaxe and loosen the skin open the pores thereof spend forth portion of that matter which the Cupping-glasse hath drawne thither in stead thereof mollifying fomentations may bee made and other drawing and suppurating medicines which shall be described hereafter A Vesicatory applied in a meet place below the Bubo profits them very much but not above as for example If the Bubo be in the throat the Vesicatory must be applied unto the shoulder-blade on the same side if it be in the arme-holes it must be applied in the midst of the arme or of the shoulder-bone on the inner side if in the groin in the midst of the thigh on the inner side that by the double passage that is open for to draw out the matter the part wherein the venome is gathered together may be the better exonerated Spurge Crow-foot Arsemart Beare-foot Bridny the middle barke of Travellers-joy the rindes of Mullet Flammula or upright Virgins-bower are fit for raising blisters If you cannot come by those simple medicines you may apply this which followeth which may be prepared at all times Take Cantharides Pepper Euphorbium Pellitory of Spain of each halfe a dram of soure leaven two drammes of Mustard one dramme and a little Vinegar the vinegar is added thereto to withhold or restraine the vehemency of the Cantharides but in want of this medicine it shall suffice to drop scalding oyle or water or a burning candle or to lay a burning coale on the place for so you may raise blisters which must ptesently be cut away and you must see that you keep the ulcers open flowing as long as you can by applying the leaves of red coleworts Beetes or Ivie dipped in warme water and anointed with oyle or fresh butter Some apply Cauteties but Vesicatories work with more speed for before the Eschar of the Cauteries will fall away the patient may dye therefore the ulcers that are made with Vesicatories will suffice to evacuate the pestilent venome because that doth worke rather by its quality than its quantity Let the abscesse bee fomented as is shewed before and then let the medicine following which hath vertue to draw be applied Fill a great onion being hollowed with Treacle and the leaves of Rue then roast it under the hot Embers beat it with a little Leaven and a little Swines grease and so apply it warme unto the abscesse or sore let it be changed every sixe houres Or Take the roots of Marsh-mallowes and Lillies of each halfe a pound of Line Foenugreek and Mustard seeds of each halfe an ounce of Treacle one dramme ten Figges and as much Hâgges grease as shall suffice make thereof a cataplasme according to Art Or take of Onions and Garlicke roasted in the embers of each three ounces bruise them with one ounce of sower leaven adding thereto Unguentum Basilicon one ounce Treacle one dramme Mithridate halfe a dramme of old Hogs greace one ounce of Cantharides in pouder one scruple of Pigeons dung two drams beat them and mixe them together into the forme of a cataplasme Hereunto old Rennet is very profitable for it is hot and therfore attractive being mixed with old Leaven and Basilicon you ought to use these untill the abscesse be
portion of the nostrils from the nose it cannot bee restored or joyned againe for it is not in men as it is in plants For plants have a weake and feeble heate and furthermore it is equally dispersed into all the substance of the plant or tree neither is it easie to be consumed or wasted for when the boughes or branches of trees are broken torne or cut away they live neverthelesse and will grow againe when they are set or grafted neither is there any seate for the heart rightly prepared in them from whence the heat must necessarily run and disperse it selfe continually into all the parts thereof But contrariwise the separated parts of more perfect living creatures as of men are incontinently deprived of life because they have their nourishment life sense and whole sustentation not of themselves by faculties flowing or comming unto them from some other parts neither are they governed by their own heat as plants but by a borrowed heat so that above or beside the naturall faculty of the liver another vitall faculty commeth unto it from the heart Wherefore in stead of the nose cut away or consumed it is requisite to substitute another made by Art because that nature cannot supply that defect this nose so artificially made must be of gold silver paper or linnen clothes glewed together it must bee so coloured counterfeited and made both of fashion figure and bignesse that it may as aptly as is possible resemble the natural nose it must be bound or stayed with little threeds or laces unto the hinder part of the head or the hatte Also if there be any portion of the upper lip cut off with the nose you may shadow it with annexing some such thing that is wanting unto the nose and cover it with the haire on his upper lippe that he may not want any thing that may adorne or beautifie the face Therefore I have thought it necessary to set downe the figure or forme of both these kindes The forme of a nose artificially made both alone by it selfe and also with the upper lip covered at it were with the haire of the beard There was a Surgeon of Italy of late yeares which would restore or repaire the portion of the nose that was cut away after this manner Hee first scarified the callous edges of the maimed nose round about as is usually done in the cure of hare-lips then he made a gash or cavity in the muscle of the arme which is called Biceps as large as the greatnesse of the portion of the nose which was cut away did require And into that gash or cavity so made he would put that part of the nose so wounded bind the patients head to his arm as if it were to a poast so fast that it might remain firme stable and immoveable and not leane or bow any way and about forty dayes after or at that time when he judged the flesh of the nose was perfectly agglutinated with the flesh of the arm he cut out as much of the flesh of the arme cleaving fast unto the nose as was sufficient to supply the defect of that which was lost then he would make it even bring it as by licking to the fashion forme of a nose as near as art would permit in the mean while he did feed his patient with ponadoes gellies all such things as were easie to be swallowed digested And he did this work of curing the place where the flesh was so cut out only with certain balmes agglutinative liquors A younger brother of the family of St. Thoan being weary of a silver nose which being artificially made he had worn in the place of his nose that was cut off went to this Chirurgian into Italy by the means of the fore-named practice he recovered a nose of flesh againe to the great admiration of all those that knew him before This thing truly is possible to be done but it is very difficult both to the patient suffering and also to the Chirurgian working For that the flesh that is taken out of the arme is not of the like temperature as the flesh of the nose is also the holes of the restored nose cannot be made as they were before CHAP. III. Of the Placing of teeth artificially made in stead of those that are lost or wanting IT often times happeneth that the fore teeth are moved broken or stricken out of their places by some violent blow which causeth deformity of the mouth and hinders plain pronunciation Therfore when the jaw is restored if it were luxated or fractured and the gums brought unto their former hardnesse other teeth artificially made of bone or Ivory may bee put in the place of those that are wanting and they must bee joyned one fast unto another and also so fastened unto the naturall teeth adjoyning that are whole and this must chiefly bee done with a thread of gold or silver or for want of either with a common thread of silke or flaxe as it is declared at large by Hippocrates and also described in this figure following The figure of teeth bound or fastned together CHAP. IIII. Of filling the hollownesse of the Pallat. MAny times it happeneth that a portion or part of the bone of the pallat being broken with the shot of a gun or corroded by the virulency of the Lues venerea falls away which makes the patients to whom this happeneth that they cannot pronounce their words distinctly but obscurely and snuffling therefore I have thought it a thing worthy the labour to shew the meanes how it may be helped by art It must be done by filling the cavity of the pallat with a plate of gold or silver a little bigger than the cavity its selfe is But it must bee as thick as a French Crowne and made like unto a dish in figure and on the upper side which shall be towards the braine a little spunge must bee fastened which when it is moistened with the moysture distilling from the brain will become more swolne and puffed up so that it will fill the concavity of the pallat that the artificiall pallat cannot fall down but stand fast and firme as if it stood of it selfe This is the true figure of those instruments whose certain use I have observed not by once or twice but by manifold triall in the battel 's fought beyond the Alpes The figure of plates to fill or supply the defects of the Pallat. The figure of another plate for the Pallat on whose upper side there is a button which may be turned when it is put into the place with a small Ravens bill like this whose figure is here expressed CHAP. V. How to helpe such as cannot speake by reason of the losse of some part of the tongue CHance gave place and authority to this remedy as to many other in our art A certaine man dwelling in a village named Yvoy le Chastean being
pierce the wombe so do they equally and in like manner penetrate the tunicle Chorion And it is carried this way being a passage not only necessary for the nutriment and conformation of the parts but also into the veines diversly woven and dispersed into the skin Chorion For thereby it commeth to passe that the seed it selfe boileth and as it were fermenteth or swelleth not onely through occasion of the place but also of the bloud and vitall spirits that flow unto it and then it riseth into the bubbles or bladders like unto the bubbles which are occasioned by the raine falling into a river or channell full of water These three bubbles or bladders are certain rude or new formes or concretions of the three principall entrals that is to say of the liver heart and braine All this former time it is called seed and by no other name but when those bubbles arise it is called an embrion or the rude forme of a body untill the perfect conformation of all the members on the fourth day after that the veine of the navell is formed it sucketh grosser bloud that is of a more fuller nutriment out of the Cotylidons And this bloud because it is more grosse easily congeales curdles in that place where it ought to prepare the liver fully absolutely made For then it is of a notable great bignesse above all the other parts therfore it is called parenchyma because it is but only a certain congealing or concretion of bloud brought together thither or in that place From the gibbous part thereof springeth the greater part or trunke of the hollow veine called commonly vena cava which doth disperse his small branches which are like unto haires into also the substance thereof and then it is divided into two branches whereof the one goeth upwards the other downwards unto all the particular parts of the body In the meane season the Arteries of the navell suck spirituous bloud out of the eminences or Cotylidons of the mothers arteries whereof that is to say of the more servent and spirituous bloud the heart is formed in the second bladder or bubble being endued with a more fleshy sound and thicke substance as it behooveth that vessell to bee which is the fountaine from whence the heate floweth and hath a continuall motion In this the vertue formative hath made two hollow places one on the right side another on the left In the right the root of the hollow veine is infixed or ingraffed carrying thither necessary nutriment for the heart in the left is formed the stamp or roote of an artery which presently doth divide it selfe into two branches the greater whereof goeth upwards to the upper parts and the wider unto the lower parts carrying unto all the parts of the body life and vitall heat CHAP. X. Of the third bubble or bladder wherein the head and the braine is formed THe farre greater portion of the seede goeth into this third bubble that is to say yeelding matter for the conformation of the braine and all the head For a greater quantity of seede ought to goe unto the conformation of the head and braine because these parts are not sanguine or bloudy as the heart and liver but in a manner without bloud bonie marrow cartilaginous nervous and membranous whose parts as the veines arteries nerves ligaments panicles and skinne are called spermaticke parts because they obtaine their first conformation almost of seede onely although that afterwards they are nourished with bloud as the other fleshy and musculous parts are But yet the bloud when it is come unto those parts degenerateth and turneth into a thing somewhat spermatick by vertue of the assimulative faculty of those parts All the other parts of the head forme and fashion themselves unto the forme of the braine when it is formed and those parts which are situated and placed about it for defence especially are hardened into bones The head as the seate of the senses and mansion of the minde and reason is situated in the highest place that from thence as it were from a lofty tower or turret it might rule and governe all the other members and their functions and actions that are under it for there the soule or life which is the rectresse or governesse is situated and from thence it floweth and is dispersed into all the whole body Nature hath framed these three principall entrals as proppes and sustentations for the weight of all the rest of the body for which matter also shee hath framed the bones The first bones that appeare to bee formed or are supposed to be conformed are the bones called ossa Illium connexed or united by spondils that are betweene them then all the other members are framed proportioned by their concavities hollownesses which generally are seaven that is to say two of the eares two of the nose one of the mouth and in the parts beneath the head one of the fundament and another of the yard or conduit of the bladder and furthermore in women one of the necke of the wombe without the which they can never bee made mothers or beare children When all these are finished nature that shee might polish her excellent worke in all sorts hath covered all the body and every member thereof with skinne Into this excellent work or Microcosmos so perfected God the author of nature and all things infuseth or ingrafteth a soule or life which St. Augustine proveth by this sentence of Moses If any man smite a woman with child so that there by she be delivered before her naturall time and the child bee dead being first formed in the wombe let him die the death but if the child hath not as yet obtained the full proportion and conformation of his body and members let him recompence it with mony Therefore it is not to bee thought that the life is derived propagated or taken from Adam or our parents as it were an haereditary thing distributed unto all mankinde by their parents but we must believe it to be immediately created of God even at the very instant time when the child is absolutely perfected in the lineaments of his body and so given unto it by him So therefore the rude lumpes of flesh called molae that engender in womens wombes and monsters of the like breeding and confused bignesse although by reason of a certaine quaking and shivering motion they seeme to have life yet they cannot bee supposed to bee endued with a life or a reasonable soule but they have their motion nutriment and increase wholly of the naturall and infixed faculty of the wombe and of the generative or procreative spirit that is engraffed naturally in the seed But even as the infant in the wombe obtaineth not perfect conformation before the thirtieth day so likewise it doth not move before the sixtieth day at which time it is most commonly not perceived by women by reason of the smallnesse of
the intestines or guts is voyded by the fundament The second commeth from the liver and it usually is three-fold or of three kinds one cholericke whereof a great portion is sent into the bladder of the gall that by sweating out there hence it might stirre up the expulsive faculty of the guts to expell and exclude the excrements The other is like unto whay which goeth with the bloud into the veines and is as it were a vehicle thereto to bring it unto all the parts of the body and into every Capillar veine for to nourish the whole body and after it hath performed that function it is partly expelled by sweate and partly sent into the bladder and so excluded with the urine The third is the melancholicke excrement which being drawn by the milt the purer and thinner part thereof goeth into the nourishment of the milt and after the remnant is partly purged out downe-wards by the haemorrhoidall veines and partly sent to the orifice of the stomacke to instimulate and provoke the appetite The last commeth of the last concoction which is absolved in the habit of the body and breatheth out partly by insensible transpiration is partly consumed by sweating and partly floweth out by the evident and manifest passages that are proper to every part as it happeneth in the braine before all other parts for it doth unloade it selfe of this kinde of excrement by the passages of the nose mouth eares eyes pallat bone and sutures of the scull Therefore if any of those excrements bee stayed altogether or any longer than it is meete they should the default is to bee amended by diet and medicine Furthermore there are other sorts of excrements not naturall of whom wee have entreated at large in our booke of the pestilence When the infant is in the mothers wombe untill hee is fully and absolutely formed in all the liniments of his body hee sends forth his urine by the passage of the navell or urachus But a little before the time of childe-birth the urachus is closed and then the man childe voydeth his urine by the conduit of the yard and the woman childe by the necke of the wombe This urine is gathered together and contained in the coate Chorion or Allantoides together with the other excrements that is to say sweat such whayish superfluities of the menstruall matter for the more easie bearing up of the floting or swimming childe But in the time of child-birth when the infant by kicking breaketh the membranes those humous runne out which when the mydwifes perceive they take it as a certaine signe that the childe is at hand For if the infant come forth together with those waters the birth is like to be more easie and with the better successe for the necke of the wombe and all the genitalls are so by their moisture relaxed and made slippery that by the endeavour and stirring of the infant the birth will be the more easie and with the better successe contratiwise if the infant bee not excluded before all these humours bee wholly flowed out and gone but remaineth as it were in a dry place presently through drinesse the necke of the wombe and all the genitalls will be contracted and drawne together so that the birth of the childe will bee very difficult and hard unlesse the necke of the wombe to amend that default be anointed with oile or some other relaxing liquor Moreover when the childe is in the wombe he voideth no excrements by the fundament unlesse it be when at the time of the birth the proper membranes and receptacles are burst by the striving of the infant for hee doth not take his meat at the mouth wherefore the stomacke is idle then and doth not execute the office of turning the meats into Chylus nor of any other concoction wherefore nothing can goe downe from it into the guts Neither have I seldome seene infants borne without any hole in their fundament so that I have beene constrained with a knife to cut in sunder the membrane or tunicle that grew over and stopped it And how can such excrements be engendered when the child being in the wombe is nourished with the more laudable portion of the menstruall blood therefore the issue or child is wont to yeeld or avoyd two kindes or sorts of excrements so long as he is in the womb that is to say sweat and urine in both which he swimmes but they are separated by themselves by a certaine tunicle called Allantoides as it may be seene in kids dogges sheepe and other brute beasts for as much as in mankinde the tunicle Chorion and Allantoides or Farciminalis be all one membrane If the woman be great of a man childe she is more merry strong and better coloured all the time of her child bearing but if of a woman childe she is ill coloured because that women are not so hot as men The males begin to stirre within three moneths and an halfe but females after if a woman conceive a male child she hath all her right parts stronger to every work wherefore they do begin to set forwards their right foot first in going when they arise they leane on the right arme the right dug will sooner swell and waxe hard the male children stirre more in the right side than in the left and the female children rather in the left than in the right side CHAP. XIII With what travell the Childe is brought into the world and of the cause of this labour and travell WHen the naturall prefixed and prescribed time of child-birth is come the childe being then growne greater requires a greater quantity of food which when he cannot receive in sufficient measure by his navell with great labour and striving hee endeavoureth to get forth therefore then free is moved with a stronger violence and doth breake the membranes wherein he is contained Then the wombe because it is not able to endure such violent motions nor to sustaine or hold up the childe any longer by reason that the conceptacles of the membranes are broken asunder is relaxed And then the childe pursuing the aire which hee feeleth to enter in at the mouth of the wombe which then is very wide and gaping is carried with his head downewards and so commeth into the world with great pain both unto it selfe and also unto his mother by reason of the tenderness of his body also by reason of the extension of the nervous necke oâ⦠mothers wombe and separation of the bone called Os Ilium from the bone calâ⦠Os sacrum For unlesse those bones were drawne in sunder how could not onely twinnes that cleave fast together but also one childe alone come forth at so narrow a passage as the necke of the wombe is Not onely reason but also experience confirmeth it for I have opened the bodies of women presently after they have died of travell in childe-birth in whom I have found the
bones of Ilium to bee drawne the breadth of ones finger from Os sacrum and moreover in many unto whom I have been called being in great extremity of difficult and hard travell I have not onely heard but also felt the bones to crackle and make a noise when I laid my hand upon the coccyx or rumpe by the violence of the distention Also honest matrons have declared unto me that they themselves a few daies before the birth have felt and heard the noise of those bones separating themselves one from another with great paine Also a long time after the birth many doe feele great paine and ache about the region of the coccix and Os sacrum so that when nature is not able to repaire the dissolved continuity of the bones of Ilium they are constrained to halt all the dayes of their life after But the bones of the share called Ossa pubis I have never seene to be separated as many do also affirme It is reported that in Italy they break the coccyx or rumpe in all maidens that when they come to bee married they may beare children with the lesser travaile in childe-birth but this is a forged tale for that bone being broken is naturally and of its owne accord repaired and joyned together again with a Callus whereby the birth of the childe will be more difficult and hard CHAP. XIV Of the situation of the infant in the wombe REASON cannot shew the certain situation of the infant in the wombe for I have found it altogether uncertaine variable and divers both in living and dead women in the dead by opening their bodies presently after they were dead and in the living by helping them by the industry of my hand when they have beene in danger of perishing by travell of child-birth for by putting my hand into the womb I have felt the infant comming forth sometimes with his feet forwards sometimes with his hands and sometimes with his hands and feet turned backwards and sometimes forwards as the figure following plainely describeth I have often found them comming forth with their knees forwards and sometimes with one of the feet and sometimes with their belly forwards their hands and feet being lifted upwards as the former figure sheweth at large Sometimes I have found the infant comming with his feet down-wards striding awide and sometimes headlong stretching one of his armes downward out at length and that was an Hermaphrodite as the figure following plainly declareth One time I observed in the birth of twinnes that the one came with his head forwards and the other with his feet according as here I have thought good to describe them In the bodies of women that died in travaile of childe I have sometimes found children no bigger than if they had beene but foure moneths in the wombe situated in a round compasse like a hoope with their head bowed downe to the knees with both their hands under the knees and their heeles close to their buttockes And moreover I protest before God that I found a childe being yet alive in the body of his mother whom I opened so soone as shee was dead lying all along stretched out with his face upwards and the palmes of his hands joyned together as if he were at prayer CHAP. XV. Which is the legitimate and naturall and which the illegitimate or unnaturall time of childe birth TO all living creatures except man the time of conception and bringing forth their young is certaine and definite but the issue of man commeth into the world sometimes in the seventh sometimes in the eighth and sometimes which is most frequent in the ninth moneth sometimes in the tenth moneth yea sometimes in the beginning of the eleventh moneth Massurius reports that Lucius Papyrius the Pretor the second heire commencing a suit gave the possession of the goods away from him seeing the mother of the childe affirmed that she went thirteen moneths therewith being there is no certaine definite time of child-birth The child that is borne in the sixt moneth cannot be long lived because that at that time all his body or members are not perfectly finished or absolutely formed In the seventh moneth it is proved by reason and experience that the infant may be long lived But in the eight moneth it is seldome or never long lived the reason thereof is as the Astronomers suppose because that at that time Saturne ruleth those coldnesse and drynesse is contrary to the originall of life but yet the phisicall reason is more true for the physitians say that the childe in the wombe doth often times in the seaventh moneth strive to bee set at liberty from the inclosure of the wombe and therefore it contendeth and laboureth greatlie and so with labouring and striving it becommeth weak that all the time of the eight moneth it cannot recover his strength again whereby it may renew his accustomed use of striving and that some by such labouring and striving hurt themselves and so dye Yet some strong and lusty women are thought to bring forth their children being lively and strong on the eight moneth as Aristotle testifieth of the Aegyptians the Poets of the inhabitants of the Isle of Naxus and many of the Spaniards Furthermore I cannot sufficiently marvaile that the wombe which all the time of childe-bearing is so closed together that one can scarce put a probe into it unlesse it be happely by reason of superfoetation or when it is open for a short time to purge it selfe that presently before the time of childe-birth it should gape and waxe so wide that the infant may passe through it and presently after it to close againe as if it had never been opened But because that the travell of the first time of childe-birth is wont to be very difficult and grievous I thinke it not unmeet that all women a little before the time of their first travell anoint and relaxe their privie parts with the unguent here described â sper ceti ⥠ii ol amygd dul ⥠iv cerae alb medul cervin ⥠iii. axung ans gallin an ⥠i. tereb venet ⥠ii make thereof an ointment to anoint the thighes share privie parts and genitalls Furthermore it shall not bee unprofitable to make a trusse or girdle of most thinne and gentle dog-skinne which being also anointed with the same unguent may serve very necessarily for the better carrying of the infant in the wombe Also bathes that are made of the decoction of mollifying herbs are also very profitable to relaxe the privie parts a little before the time of the birth That is supposed to bee a naturall and easie birth when the infant commeth forth with his head forwards presently following the flux of the water and that is more difficult when the infant commeth with his feet forwards all the other wayes are most difficult Therefore Mid-wives are to be admonished that as often as they shall perceive the infant to be comming
with a little swelling with a knife or lancet so breaking and opening a way for them notwithstanding that a little fluxe of blood will follow by the tension of the gummes of which kind of remedy I have with prosperous and happy successe made tryall in some of mine owne children in the presence of Feureus Altinus and Cortinus Doctors of Physick and Guillemeau the Kings Chirurgian which is much better and more safe than to doe as some nurses doe who taught onely by the instinct of nature with their nailes and scratching breake and teare or rent the childrens gummes The Duke of Nevers had a sonne of eight moneths old which died of late and when wee with the Physitians that were present diligently sought for the cause of his death we could impute it unto nothing else than to the contumacious hardnesse of the gums which was greater than was convenient for a childe of that age for therefore the teeth could not breake forth nor make a passage for themselves to come forth of which our judgement this was the tryall that when we cut his gummes with a knife we found all his teeth appearing as it were in an array ready to come forth which if it had bin done when he lived doubtlesse he might have beene preserved The End of the twenty fourth Booke OF MONSTERS AND PRODIGIES THE TWENTY FIFTH BOOK THE PREFACE WEe call Monsters what things soever are brought forth contrary to the common decree and order of nature So wee terme that infant monstrous which is borne with one arme alone or with two heads But we define Prodigies those things which happen contrary to the whole course of nature that is altogether differing and dissenting from nature as if a woman should bee delivered of a Snake or a Dogge Of the first sort are thought all those in which any of those things which ought and are accustomed to bee according to nature is wanting or doth abound is changed worne covered or defended hurt or not put in his right place for somtimes some are born with more fingers than they should other some but with one finger some with those parts devided which should be joyned others with those parts joyned which should bee devided some are borne with the privityes of both sexes male and female And Aristotle saw a Goate with a horne upon her knee No living creature was ever borne which wanted the Heart but some have beene seene wanting the Spleene others with two Spleenes and some wanting one of the Reines And none have bin known to have wanted the whole Liver although some have bin found that had it not perfect and whole and there have beene those which wanted the Gall when by nature they should have had it and besides it hath beene seene that the Liver contrary to his naturall site hath lien on the left side and the Spleene on the right Some women also have had their privities closed and not perforated the membranous obstacle which they call the Hymen hindering And men are sometimes borne with their fundaments eares noses and the rest of the passages shut and are accounted monstrous nature erring from its entended scope But to conclude those Monsters are thought to portend some ill which are much differing from their nature CHAP. I. Of the cause of Monsters and first of those Monsters which appeare for the glory of God and the punishent of mens wickednesse THere are reckoned up many causes of monsters the first whereof is the glory of God that his immense power may be manifested to those which are ignorant of it by the sending of those things which happen contrary to nature for thus our Saviour Christ answered the Disciples asking whether he or his parents had offended who being born blind received his sight from him that neither he nor his parents had committed any fault so great but this to have happened onely that the glory and majesty of God should be divulged by that miracle and such great workes Another cause is that God may either punish mens wickednesse or shew signes of punishment at hand because parents sometimes lye and joine themselves together without law and measure or luxuriously and beastly or at such times as they ought to forbeare by the command of God and the Church such monstrous horrid and unnaturall births doe happen At Verona Anno Dom. 1254. a mare foaled a colt with the perfect face of a man but all the rest of the body like an horse a little after that the warre betweene the Florentines and Pisans began by which all Italy was in a combustion The figure of a Colt with a mans face About the time that Pope Julius the second raised up all Italy and the greatest part of Christendome against Lewis the twelfth the King of France in the yeere of our Lord 1512. in which yeere upon Easter day neere Ravenna was fought that mortall battell in which the Popes forces were overthrowne a monster was borne in Ravenna having a horne upon the crowne of his head and besides two wings and one foot alone most like to the feet of birds of prey and in the knee thereof an eye the privities of male and female the rest of the body like a man as you may see by the following figure The figure of awinged Monster The third cause is an abundance of seed overflowing matter The fourth the same in too little quantity and deficient The fift the force and efficacy of imagination The sixt the straightnesse of the wombe The seaventh the disorderly site of the party with childe and the position of the parts of the body The eighth a fall straine or stroake especially upon the belly of a woman with child The ninth hereditary diseases or affects by any other accident The tenth the confusion and mingling together of the seed The eleventh the craft and wickednesse of the divell There are some others which are accounted for monsters because they have their originall or essence full of admiration or doe assume a certaine prodigious forme by the craft of some begging companions therefore we will speak briefly of them in their place in this our treatise of monsters CHAP. II. Of monsters caused by too great abundance of seed SEeing wee have already handled the two former and truely finall causes of monsters we must now come to those which are the matereall corporeall and efficient causes taking our beginning from that we call the too great abundance of the matter of seed It is the opinion of those Philosophers which have written of monsters that if at any time a creature bearing one at once as man shall cast forth more seed in copulation than is necessary to the generation of one body it cannot be that onely one should bee begot of all that therefore from thence either two or more must arise whereby it commeth to passe that these are rather judged wonders because they happen seldome and contrary to common custome Superfluous parts
into one it maketh one with the parts encreased more than is fit eithâ⦠greatnesse or number but if it bee as it were cloven into divers parts it caâ⦠more than one at one birth CHAP. IV. Of Hermaphrodites of Scrats ANd here also we must speake of Hermaphrodites because they draw the cause of their generation and conformation from the plenty and abundance of seed and are called so because they are of both sexes the woman yeelding as much seed as the man For hereupon it commeth to passe that the forming faculty which alwaies endeavours to produce something like it selfe doth labour both the matters almost with equall force and is the cause that one body is of both sexes Yet some make foure differences of Hermaphrodites the first of which is the male Hermaphrodite who is a perfect and absolute male and hath onely a slit in the Perinaeum not perforated and from which neither urine nor seed doth flow The second is the female which besides her naturall privity hath a fleshy and skinny similitude of a mans yard but unapt for erection and ejaculation of seed and wanteth the cod and stones the third difference is of those which albeit they beare the expresse figures of members belonging to both sexes commonly set the one against the other yet are found unapt for generation the one of them onely serving for making of water the fourth difference is of those who are able in both sexes and throughly performe the part both of man and woman because they have the genitalls of both sexes compleat and perfect and also the right breast like a man and the left like a woman the lawes command those to chuse the sexe which they will use and in which they will remaine and live judging them to death if they be found to have departed from the sexe they made choice of for some are thought to have abused both and promiscuously to have had their pleasure with men and women There are signes by which the Physitians may discerne whether the Hermaphrodires are able in the male or female sexe or whether they are impotent in both these signes are most apparent in the privities and face for if the matrix be exact in all its demensions and so perforated that it may admit a mans yard if the courses flow that way if the haire of the head bee long slender and soft and to conclude if to this tender habite of the body a timide and weake condition of the minde be added the female sexe is predominant and they are plainely to bee judged women But if they have the Perinaeum and fundament full of haires the which in women are commonly without any if they have a yard of a convenient largenesse if it stand well readily and yeeld seed the male sexe hath the preheminence and they are to be judged men But if the conformation of both the genitalls be alike in figure quantity and efficacy it is thought to be equally able in both sexes although by the opinion of Aristotle those who have double genitals the one of the male the other of the female the one of them is alwaies perfect the other imperfect The figure of Hermaphrodite twinnes cleaving together with their backes Anno Dom. 1486. In the Palatinatâ at the village Robach neere Heidelberg there were twinnes both Hermaphrodites borne with their backs sticking together The effigies of an Hermaphrodite having foure hands and feet The same day the Venetians and Genoeses entred into league there was a monster borne in Italy having foure armes and feet and but one head it lived a little after it was baptized Iames Ruef a Helvetian Chirurgian saith hee saw the like but which besides had the privities of both sexes whose figure I have therefore here set forth CHAP. V. Of the changing of Sexe AMatus Lusitanus reports that in the village Esquina there was a maid named Maria Pateca who at the appointed age for her courses to flow had in stead of them a mans yard lying before that time hid and covered so that of a woman she became a man and therefore laying aside her womans habite was cloathed in mans and changing her name was called Emanuel who when hee had got much wealth by many and great negotiations and commerce in India returned into his country and married a wife but Lusitanus saith he did not certainely know whether he had any children but that he was certaine he remained alwaies beardlesse Anthony Loqueneux the Kings keeper or receiver of his rents of St. Quintin at Vermandois lately affirmed to me that he saw a man at Reimes at the Inne having the sign of the swan in the yeer 1560. who was taken for a woman untill the fourteenth yeere of his age for then it happened as he played somewhat wantonly with a maid which lay in the same bed with him his members hitherto lying hid started forth and unfolded them selves which when his parents knew by helpe of the Ecclesiasticke power they changed his name from Ioane to John and put him in mans apparell Some yeeres agone being in the traine of King Charles the ninth in the French Glasse-house I was shewed a man called Germane Garnierus but by some Germane Maria because in former times when he was a woman hee was called Mary he was of an indifferent stature and well set body with a thicke and red beard he was taken for a girle untill the fifteenth yeere of his age because there was no signe of being a man seene in his body and for that amongst women he in like attire did those things which pertaine to women in the fifteenth yeere of his age whilest he some-what earnestly pursued hogges given into his charge to bee kept who running into the corne he leaped violently over a ditch whereby it came to passe that the stayes and foldings being broken his hidden members sodainly broke forth but not without paine going home hee weeping complained to his mother that his guts came forth with which his mother amazed calling Physitians and Surgeons to counsell heard he was turned into a man therefore the whole businesse being brought to the Cardinall the Bishop of Lenuncure an assembly being called he received the name and habite of a man Pliny reports that the sonne of Cassinus of a girle became a boy living with his parents but by the command of the Soothsayers he was carried into a desart Isle because they thought such monsters did alwaies shew or portend some monstrous thing Certainely women have so many and like parts lying in their wombe as men have hanging forth onely a strong and lively heat seemes to bee wanting which may drive forth that which lyes hid within therefore in processe of time the heat being encreased and flourishing and the humidity which is predominant in childhood overcome it is not impossible that the virile members which hitherto sluggish by defect of heat lay hid may be put forth especially if to that strength of
others the bowels of the earth there to remaine untill God shall come to judge the world and as you see the clouds in the aire some-whiles to resemble centaures otherwhile serpents rocks towers men birds fishes and other shapes so these spirits turne themselves into all the shapes and wondrous formes of things as oft times into wild beasts into serpents toads owles lapwings crowes or ravens goats asses dogs cats wolves buls and the like Moreover they oft times assume and enter humane bodies as well dead as alive whom they torment and punish yea also they transforme themselves into angells of light They feigne themselves to bee shut up and forced by magicall rings but that is onely their deceit and craft they wish feare love hate and oft times as by the appointment and decree of God they punish malefactors for we read that God sent evill angels into Egypt there to destroy They houle on the night they murmure rattle as if they were bound in chaines they move benches tables counters props cupboards children in the cradles play at tables and chesse turne over books tell mony walk up down roomes and are heard to laugh to open windowes dores cast sounding vessels as brasse and the like upon the ground breake stone pots and glasses and make other the like noises Yet none of all these things appeare to us when as wee arise in the morning neither finde we any thing out of its place or broken They are called by divers names as Devills evill Spirits Incubi Sucubi Hobgoblines Fairies Robin-good-fellowes evill Angels Sathan Lucifer the father of lies Prince of darkenesse and of the world Legion and other names agreeable to their offices and natures CHAP. XIV Of the subterrene Devills and such as haunt Mines LEwis Lavater writes that by the certaine report of such as worke in Mines that in some Mines there are seene spirits who in the shape and habite of men worke there and running up and down seeme to doe much worke when as notwithstanding they doe nothing indeed But in the meane time they hurt none of the by-standers unlesse they bee provoked thereto by words or laughter For then they will throw some heavie or hard thing upon him that hurt them or injure them some other way The same author affirmes that there is a silver Mine in Rhetia out of which Peter Briot the Governour of the place did in his time get much silver In this Mine there was a Devill who chiefly on Frie-dayes when as the Miners put the minerall they had digged into tubbes kept a great quarter and made himselfe exceeding busie and poured the minerall as he listed out of one tubbe into another It happened one day that he was more busie than he used to be so that one of the Miners reviled him and bad him bee gone on a vengeance to the punishment appointed for him The Devill offended with his imprecation and scoââe so wrested the Miner taking him by the head that twining his necke about hee set his face behinde him yet was not the workman killed therewith but lived and was known by divers for many yeeres after CHAP. XV. By what meanes the Devills may deceive us OUr mindes involved in the earthy habitation of our bodies may bee deluded by the Devills divers waies for they excell in purity and subtlety of essence and in the much use of things besides they challenge a great preheminence as the Princes of this world over all sublunary bodies Wherefore it is no marvell if they the teachers and parents of lyes should cast clouds and mists before our eyes from the beginning turne themselves into a thousand shapes of things and bodies that by these juglings and trickes they may shadow and darken mens mindes CHAP. XVI Of Sucubi and Incubi POwerfull by these forementioned arts and deceipts they have sundry times accompanied with men in copulation whereupon such as have had to doe with men were called Sucubi those which made use of women Incubi Verily St. Augustine seemeth not to be altogether against it but that they taking upon them the shape of man may fill the genitalls as by the helpe of nature to the end that by this meanes they may draw aside the unwary by the flames of lust from vertue and chastity John Ruef in his book of the conception and generation of man writes that in his time a certaine woman of monstrous lust and wondrous impudency had to doe by night with a Divell that turned himselfe into a man and that her belly swelled up presently after the act and when as she thought shee was with childe she fell into so grievous a disease that shee voided all her entrailes by stoole medicines nothing at all prevailing The like history is told of the servant of a certaine Butcher who thinking too attentively on venereous matters a Divell appeared to him in the shape of a woman with whom supposing it to bee a woman when as hee had to doe his genitalls so burned after the act that becomming enflamed hee died with a great deale of torment Neither doth Peter Paludanus and Martin Arelatensis thinke it absurd to affirme that Devills may beget children if they shall ejaculate into the womans womb seed taken from some man either dead or alive Yet this opinion is most absurd and full of falsitie mans seed consisting of a seminall or sanguineous matter and much spirit if it runne otherwaies than into the wombe from the testicles and stay never so little a while it loseth its strength and efficacy the heat and spirits vanishing away for even the too great length of a mans yard is reckoned amongst the causes of barrennesse by reason that the seed is cooled by the length of the way If any in copulation after the ejaculation of the seed presently draw themselves from the womans embraces they are thought not to generate by reason of the aire entring into theyet open womb which is thought to corrupt the seed By which it appeares how false that history in Averrois is of a certaine woman that said she conceived with child by a mans seed shed in a bath and so drawne into her wombe she entring the bath presently after his departure forth It is much lesse credible that Divells can copulate with women for they are of an absolute spirituous nature but blood and flesh are necessary for the generation of man What naturall reason can allow that the incorporeall Divells can love corporeall women And how can we thinke that they can generate who want the instruments of generation How can they who neither eate nor drinke be said to swell with seed Now where the propagation of the species is not necessary to bee supplied by the succession of Individuals Nature hath given no desire of venery neither hath it imparted the use of generation but the divels once created were made immortall by Gods appointment If the faculty of
sore eyes a paper wherein the two greeke letters Î and A are written must bee tyed in a thred and hanged about the necke And for the tooth ache this ridiculous saying Strigiles falcesque dentatae dentium dolorem persanate Also oft times there is no small superstition in things that are outwardly applied Such is that of Apollonius in Pliny to scarifie the gummes in the tâ⦠ache with the tooth of one that died a violent death to make pils of the skull of one hanged against the bitings of a mad dogge to cure the falling sicknesse by eating the flesh of a wilde beast killed with the same iron wherewith a man was killed that he shall be freed from a quartaine ague who shall drinke the wine whereinto the sword that hath cut off a mans head shall be put and he the parings of whose nailes shall be tyed in a linnen cloth to the necke of a quicke Eele and the Eele let goe into the water againe The paine of the Milt to be asswaged if a beasts Milt bee laid upon it and the Physitian say that he cures or makes a medicine for the Milt Any one to bee freed from the cough who shall spit in the mouth of a Toad letting her goe away alive The halter wherein one hath beene hanged put about the temples to helpe the head ache This word Abracadabra written on a paper after the manner described by Serenus and hanged about the necke to help agues or feavers especially semitertians What truth can bee in that which sundry affirme that a leafe of Lathyris which is a kinde of Spurge if it be plucked upwards will cause vomit but broken downewards will move to stoole You may also finde many other superstitious fictions concerning herbes such as Galen reports that Andreas and Pamphilus writ as incantations transformations and herbes dedicated to conjurers and devills I had thought never in this place to have mentioned these and the like but that there may bee every where found such wicked persons who leaving the arts and means which are appointed by God to preserve the health of mans body flye to the superstitious ridiculous remedies of sorcerers or rather of devils which notwithstanding the devill sometimes makes to performe their wisht for effects that so hee may still keep them ensnared addicted to his service Neither is it to be approved which many say that it is good to be healed by any art or meanes for that healing is a good worke This saying is unworthy of a Christian and savours rather of him that trusts more in the devill than in God Those Empericks are not of the society of Sorcerers and Magitians who heale simple wounds with dry lint or lint dipt in water this cure is neither magicall nor miraculous as many suppose but wholly naturall proceeding from the healing fountains of nature wounds fractures which the Chirurgian may heale by onely taking away the impediments that is paine defluxion inflammation an abscesse and gangrene which retard and hinder the cure of such diseases The following examples will sufficiently make evident the devils maliciousnesse alwaies wickedly and craftily plotting against our safety and life A certaine woman at Florence as Langius writes having a maligne ulcer and being troubled with intolerable paine at the stomacke so that the Physitians could give her no ease behold on a sudden shee vomited up long and crooked nailes and brasse needles wrapped up with wax and haires and at length a great gobbit of flesh so biâge that a Giants jawes could scarce swallow it But that which happened in the yeere of our redemption 1539. in a certain town called Fugenstall in the Bishopricke of Eistet exceeds all credit unlesse there were eye-witnesses of approved integrity yet living In this towne one Ulrich Neusesser a husbandman was tormented with grievous paine in the one side of his belly hee sodainely got hold of an iron key with his hand under the skinne which was not hurt the which the Barber-Chirurgian of the place cut out with his razour yet for all this the paine ceased not but hee grew every day worse than other wherefore expecting no other remedy but death he got a knife and cut his throat His dead body was opened and in his stomacke were found a round and longish piece of wood foure steele knives part sharpe and part toothed like a saw and two sharpe peices of iron each whereof exceeded the length of a spanne there was also as it were a ball of haire All these things were put in by the craft and deceit of the devill Thus farre Langius CHAP. XVIII Of the Cozenages and crafty Trickes of Beggars HAving treated of Monsters it followes that wee speake of those things which either of themselves by reason of their nature full of admiration have some kinde of monstrousnesse in them or else from some other waies as by the craft and cozenage of men And because to the last mentioned crafts of the Devill the subtle devices of begging companions are sowewhat alike therefore I will handle them in the next place that the Chirurgian being admonished of them may be more cautious and cunning in discerning them when hee meets with them Anno Dom. 1525. when I was at Anjou there stood a crafty beggar begging at the Church dore who tying and hiding his owne arme behind his backe shewed in steed thereof one cut from the body of one that was hanged and this he propped up and bound to his breast and so laid it open to view as if it had been all enflamed so to move such as passed by unto greater commiseration of him The cozenage lay hid every one giving him mony untill at length his counterfeit arm not being surely fastened fell upon the ground many seeing and observing it hee being apprehended and layed in prison by the appointment of the Magistrate was whipped through the towne with his false arme hanging before him and so banished I had a brother called John Parey a Chirurgian who dwelt at Vitre in Britany he once observed a young woman begging who shewed her breast as if it had a cancrous ulcer thereon looking fearfully by reason of much and fordid filth wherewith it seemed to defile the cloath that lay under it But when as hee had more diligently beheld the womans face and the fresh colour thereof as also of the places about the ulcer and the good habite of the whole body agreeable to that colour for she was somewhat fat and of a very good habite of body he was easily hereby induced to suspect some roguery and deceit He acquainted the Magistrate with this his suspicion and got leave that hee might carry her home to his house so to search her more narrowly Where opening her breast he found under her arme-pit a sponge moistened with a commixture of beasts blood and milke and carried through an elder pipe to the hidden holes of her counterfeit cancer Therefore he foments her
it be touched with a speare or rod will benumbe even the strongest armes and retarde the feet how ever nimble to runne away CHAP. XXII Of the admirable nature of Birds and of some Beasts THAT there bee divers things not onely in the Sea but also in the aire and earth which by the wonderfull condition of their nature may equall that of Monsters the onely Estrich may serve for a witnesse It is the biggest of Birds though indeed it partly resembles a bird and partly a beast and it is familiar to Africa and Aethiopia as which contrary to the nature of beasts hath feathers and against the custome of birds cannot flye aloft for it hath not feathers fit to flye but like unto haires yet will it out-run a horse The naturall force of the stomacke in concocting is miraculous as to which nothing is untameable shee layes egges of a wondrous largenesse so that they may bee framed into cuppes their feathers are most beautifull as you may perceive by this following figure The figure of an Estrich Any one may easily gather of what a prodigious magnitude an Estrich is by the greatnesse of his bones Three of these birds were kept at the Kings charge by the Mareschall de Rets one whereof dying it was bestowed upon mee whereof I have with great diligence made a Sceleton The delineation of the Sceleton of an Estrich A. Shewes the head which was somewhat thicker than the head of a Crane of the length of ones hand plaine from the crowne even to the beake the beake being divided to the middle region of the eye being roundish at the end thereof B. The necke a yard long consisting of seventeene vertebrae each whereof on each side is furnished with a transverse processe looking downewards of some fingers length excepting the two which are next the head as which want these and are joyned together by Ginglymos C. The backe is of a foots length consisting of seven Vertebrae D The holy-bone of two foot long in whose top there is a transverse processe under which there lyes a great hole E. Three more but lesse F. G. H. After which there followes the cavity or socket whereinto the head of the thigh-bone is received and hid This externally and on the side produceth a perforated bone noted with the letter I. perforated I say at the beginning for it is presently united at the letter K. then is it forked and divided into two other bones whereof one is bigger than the other The lesse is noted with the letter L. then are they both united at the letter M. each of them is halfe a foot and foure inches long But from that part whereas they first begun to bee divided to that whereas they are united there is a hole some foure fingers broad but the length of ones hand or more and it is noted with the letter N. The residue of the bone is like to a pruning knife three inches broad but sixe in length at the end whereunder is the letter O. it is joyned by coalition P. The rumpe consisting of nine vertebrae like to a mans The thigh-bones are two whereof that which is noted with the letter Q. is of the length of a foot and of thickenesse equall to a horses thigh The other next under which peradventure you may call the legge-bone noted with R. is a foot and halfe long it hath joyned thereto the Fibula or lesser focile of the like length but which growes smaller as it comes lower S. Is the legge to which the foot adheres being one foot and a halfe long divided at the end into two clawes the one bigger the other lesse whereof each consists of three bones T. Eight ribbes which are inserted into the Sternon the three middlemost of these have a bony production like to a hook V. Is the Sternon consisting of one bone of some foot 's length representing a buckler to this there is joyned another bone which stretched over the three first ribs is in stead of clavicles or collar-bones X. The first bone of the wing which is one foot and halfe long Y Two bones under this equivalent to the ell and wand under which there are sixe other bones composing the point of the wing noted with Z. This whole Sceleton is seven foot long and so many foot or more high from the feet to the beake there are many other observable things in her composure but I have thought fit to omit them for brevities sake Jerome Cardane in his bookes De subtilitate writes that in the Hands of the Molucca's you may sometimes find lying upon the ground or take up in the waters a dead bird called a Manucodiata that is in Hebrew the bird of God it is never seene alive It lives aloft in the aire it is like a Swallow in body and beake yet distinguished with divers coloured feathers for those on the toppe of the head are of a golden colour those of the necke like to a Mallard but the taile and wings like Peacocks it wants feet Wherefore if it become weary with flying or desire sleepe it hangs up the body by twining the feathers about some bough of a tree It passeth through the aire wherein it must remaine as long as it lives with great celerity and lives by the aire and dew onely The cocke hath a cavity deprest in the backe wherein the hen laies and sits upon her egges I saw one at Paris which was presented to King Charles the ninth The effigies of a Manucodiata or bird of Paradise Wee have read in Thevets Cosmography that he saw a bird in America which in that country speech is called Touca in this very monstrous deformed for that the beake in length and thickenesse exceeds the bignesse of the rest of the body it feeds on pepper as the black-birds and felfires with us do upon Ivie berries which are not lesse hot than pepper A certaine Gentleman of Provence brought a bird of this kinde from that country to present it to King Charles the ninth but dying in the way he could not present it alive Wherefore the King wished the Mareschal de Rets to give her to me that I might take forth her bowells and embalme her that she might bee kept amongst the Kings rarities I did what I could yet not long after she rotted she resembled a crow in body and feathers but had a yellowish beake cleere smooth and toothed like a saw and of such length and thicknesse as we formerly mentioned I keep it yet as a certaine monstrous thing Thevet writes that in the Iland Zocetera there is frequently found a certaine wild beast called Hulpalis of the bignesse of an Aethiopian Monkey It is a very monstroas creature but in nothing more than that it is thought to live upon the aire only the skinne as if it were died in graine is of a scarlet colour yet is it in some places spotted variegated it hath a round
head like to a boule with feet round broad and wanting hurtfull nailes The Moores kill it and use to eat the flesh of it being first bruised that so it may be the more tender In the Realme of Camota of Ahob of Benga and other mountaines of Cangipa Plimatique and Catagan which are in the inner India beyond the river of Ganges some five degrees beyond the Tropicke of Cancer is found a beast which the westerne Germanes call Giraffe This beast in head eares and cloven feet is not much unlike our Doe it hath a very slender necke but it is some sixe foot long and there are few beasts that exceed him in the length of their legges his taile is round but reacheth no further than his hammes his skin is exceeding beautifull yet somewhat rough having haire thereon somewhat longer than a Cow it is spotted and variegared in some places with spors of a middle colour betweene white and chesnut so as Leopards are for which cause by some greeke Historians it is called a Cameleopardalis it is so wilde before it bee taken that with the good-will it will not so much as be seen Therefore it inhabites and lives only in desart and secret places unknown to the rest of the beasts of that region He presently flyes away at the sight of a man yet is he taken at length for that he is not very speedy in his running away once taken he is as easily and speedily tamed as any wild beast whatsoever He hath above his crowne two straight horns covered with haires and of a foots length When as he holds up his head and necke hee is as high as a Lance. He feeds upon herbes and the leaves and boughes of trees yea and he is also delighted with bread The effigies of a Giraffa Such as saile in the red sea alongst the coast of Arabia meet with an Iland called by the Arabians Cademota in that part thereof where the river Plata runnes is found a wild beast called by the barbarous inhabitants Parassoupi being of the bignesse of a Mule headed not unlike one yet rough and haired like to a Beare but not of so dark a colour but inclining to yellow with cloven feet like a Hart shee hath two long hornes on her head but not branched somewhat resembling those so much magnifyed hornes of Unicornes For the natives of the place bitten by the venemous tooth of either beast or fish are presently helped and recover by drinking the water wherein such hornes have beene infused for sixe or seven dayes space as Thevet in his Cosmography reports In one of the Ilands of the Molucca's there is found a Beast living both on land and water like as a Crocodile it is called Camphurch it is of the bignesse of an Hart it hath one horne in the forehead moveable after the fashion of the nose of a Turky-cocke it is some three foot and an halfe long and never thicker than a mans arme his neck is covered over with haire of an ash colour he hath two feet like to a gooses feet wherwith he swims both in fresh and salt waters His fore feet are like to a stags he lives upon fish Many have perswaded themselves that this beast is a kind of Unicorne and that therefore his horne should bee good against poysons The King of the Iland loves to be called by the name of this beast and so also other Kings take to themselves the names of the wilde beasts fishes or fruits that are most pretious and observable in their dominions as Thevet reports Mauritania and Aethiopia and that part of Africke that is beyond the desarts and syrtes bring forth Elephants but those of India are farre larger Now although in the largenesse of their body they exceed all foure footed beasts yet may they bee more speedily and easily tamed than other beasts For they may be taught to doe many things above the common nature of beasts Their skin is somewhat like to a Buffles with little haire upon it but that which is is ash coloured his head large his necke short his eares two handfulls broad his nose or trunke very long and hanging down almost to the ground hollow like as a trumpet the which he useth in stead of an hand his mouth is not farre from his beast not much unlike a swines from the upper part whereof two large teeth thrust forth themselves his legges are thicke and strong not consisting of one bone as many formerly have falsly believed for they kneele to admit their Rider or to bee laden and then rise up againe of themselves his feet are round like a quoit some two or three hands breadth and divided into five clefts He hath a taile like a Buffle but not very rough some three hands breadth long wherefore they would be much troubled with flyes and waspes but that nature hath recompenced the shortness of their tailes by another way for when they finde themselves molested they contract their skin so strongly that they suffocate and kill these little creatures taken in the wrinkles thereof they overtake a man running by going onely for his legges are proportionable to the rest of his body They feed upon the leaves and fruits of trees neither is any tree so strong or well rooted which they cannot throw downe and breake They grow to bee sixteene handfulls high wherefore such as ride upon an Elephant are as much troubled as if they went to sea They are of so unbridled a nature that they cannot endure any head-stall or raines therefore you must suffer them to take the course and way they please Yet doe they obey their country men without any great trouble for they seeme after some sort to understand their speech wherefore they are easily governed by their knowne voices and words They throw down a man that angers them first taking him up with their Trunke and lifting him aloft and then letting him fall they tread him under foot and leave him not before he bee dead Aristotle writes that Elephants generate not before they be twenty yeeres old they know not adultery neither touch they any female but one from which they also diligently abstain when they know she hath once conceived It cannot be knowne how long they goe with young the reason is for that their copulation is not seen for they never do it but in secret The females bring forth resting upon their hinde legges and with paine like women they licke their young and these presently see and goe and sucke with their mouths and not with their Trunkes You may see Elephants teeth of a monstrous and stupendious bignesse at Venice Rome Naples and Paris they terme it Ivory and it is used for Cabinets Harps Combes and other such like uses The figure of an Elephant We have read in Thevet that in Florida there are great Bulls called in that country tongue Beautrol they have hornes of a foot long a bunch on their backe like a
Camell their haire long and yellow the taile of a Lion there is scarce any creature more fierce or wild for it can never be tamed unlesse it be taken from the dam. The Salvages use their Hides against the cold and their hornes as an Antidote against poyson The same author affirmes that whilest he sayled in the red sea hee saw a monster in the hands of certaine Indian merchants which in bignesse and shape of his limbs was not unlike a Tiger yet had the face of a man but a very flat nose besides his fore feet were like a mans hands but the hinde like the feet of a Tiger hee had no taile he was of a dun colour to conclude in head eares necke and face it resembled a man but in the blackish and curled haire a More for the other parts they were like a Tiger they called it Thanacth The figure of a beast called Thanacth This following monster is so strange that it will scarce bee believed but by those that have seene it it is bred in America and by the Salvages called Haiit of the bignesse of a Monkey with a great belly almost touching the ground and the head and face of a child being taken it mournes and sighes like to a man that is troubled and perplext it is of an ashe colour hath the feet divided into three clawes foure fingers long and sharper than those of a Lion it climbes trees and lives there more frequently than upon the ground the taile is no longer than the breadth of three fingers It is strange and almost monstrous that these kinde of creatures have never bin seene to feed upon or eat any thing for the salvages have kept them long in their houses to make triall thereof wherefore they thinke them to live by the aire The figure of a beast called Haiit I have taken this following monster out of Leo's African history it is very deformed being round after the manner of a Tortoise two yellow lines crossing each other at right angles divide his backe at every end of which he hath one eye and also one eare so that such a creature may see on every side with his foure eyes as also heare by his so many eares yet hath hee but one mouth and one belly to containe his meat but his round body is encompassed with many feet by whose helpe he can go any way he please without turning of his body his taile is something long and very hairy at the end The inhabitants affirme that his blood is more effectuall in healing of wounds than any balsome It is strange that the Rhinoceros should be a born enemy to the Elephant wherfore he whets his horne which growes upon his nose upon the rockes and so prepares himselfe for fight wherein he chiefly assailes the belly as that which he knowes to be the softest he is as long as an Elephant but his legs are much shorter he is of the colour of box yet somewhat spotted Pompey was the first that shewed one at Rome The effigies of a Rhinoceros The figure of a Chameleon Africa produceth the Chameleon yet is it more frequent in India he is in shape and greatnesse like a Lizard but that his legs are straight and higher his sides are joyned to the belly as in fish his backe stands up after the same manner his nose stands out not much unlike a swines his taile is long and endeth sharpe and hee foulds it up in a round like a serpent his nailes are crooked his pace slow like as the Tortoise his body rough hee never shuts his eyes neither doth hee looke about by the moving of the apple but by the turning of the whole eye The nature of his colour is very wonderfull for he changeth it now and then in his eyes and taile and whole body beside and hee alwaies assimulates that which he is next to unlesse it be red or white His skin is very thinne and his body cleare therefore the one of these two either the colour of the neighbouring things in so great subtlety of his cleare skinne easily shines as in a glasse or else various humors diversly stirred up in him according to the variety of his affections represent divers colours in his skinne as a Turky-cocke doth in those flethy excrescences under his throat and upon his head hee is pale when he is dead Mathiolus writes that the right eye taken from a living Chameleon takes away the white spots which are upon the horny coat of the eye his body being beaten and mixed with Goats milke and rubbed upon any part fetcheth off haires his gall discusseth the Cataracts of the eye CHAP. XXIII Of coelestiall Monsters PEradventure it hath not bin strange that monsters have beene generated upon the earth and in the Sea but for monsters to appeare in heaven and in the upper region of the aire exceeds all admiration Yet have wee often read it written by the antients that the face of heaven hath beene deformed by bearded tailed and haired Comets by meteors representing burning Torches and lamps pillars darts shields troups of clouds hostilely assailing each other Dragons two Moones Sunnes and the like monsters and prodigies Antiquity hath not seene any thing more prodigious than that Commet which appeared with bloody haire in Uvestine upon the ninth day of October 1528. for it was so horrible and fearefull a spectacle that divers died with feare and many fell into grievous diseases going from the East to the South it endured no longer than one hower and a quarter in the toppe thereof was seene a bending arme holding a great sword in a threatning hand at the end thereof appeared three starres but that over which the point of the sword directly hanged was more bright and cleare than the rest on each side of this Comet were seene many speares swords and other kinds of weapons died with blood which were intermixt with mens heads having long and terrible haire and beards as you may see in the following figure The figure of a fearefull Comet Also there have beene seene great and thicke barres of Iron to have fallen from heaven which have presently beene turned into swords and rapiers At Sugolia in the borders of Hungaria a stone fell from heaven with a great noise the seventh day of September anno Dom. 1514. it weighed two hundred and fifty pound the Citizens hanged it up with a great iron chaine put through it in the midst of the Church of their City and used to shew it as a miracle to travellers of better note that past that way Pliny reports that the clashing of armour and the sound of a trumpet were heard from heaven often before and after the Cimbrian warre The same author also writes that in the third Consul-ship of Marius the Amarines and Tudortines saw the heavenly armies comming from East and West and so joyning those being vanquished which came from the East Which samething
over the fire untill all the liquor be almost wasted away Then they cut into peeces the salt or that earthy matter which remains after the boyling away of the Capitellum with a knife or hot iron spatula forme them into cauteries of such figure and magnitude as they thinke fitting and so they lay them up or keep them for use in a violl or glasse closly stopped that the ayre get not in Or Take a bundle or sufficient quantity of Beane stalkes or huskes of Colewort stalks two little bundles of cuttings of Vines foure bundles burn them all to ashes which put into a vessell of river water so let them infuse for a dayes space being stirred ever now and then to this adde two pounds of unquencht lime of Axungia vitri halfe a pound of calcined Tartar two pounds of Sal niter foure ounces infuse all these being made into powder in the foresaid Lye for two or three dayes space often stirring it then straine the Capitellum or liquor through a thicke cloth untill it become cleare Put it into a bason and set it over the fire and when as the moisture is almost wholly spent let two or three ounces of vitrioll be added when the moisture is sufficiently evaporated make cauteries of that which remaines after the formerly mentioned manner Take of the ashes of sound knotty old Oake as much as you please make thereof a Lye powre this Lye againe upon other fresh ashes of the same wood let this bee done three or foure times then quench some lime in this Lye of these two make a Capitellum whereof you may make most approved cauteries For such ashes are hot in the fourth degree and in like sort the stones whereof the lime by burning becomes fiery and hot to the fourth degree Verily I have made cauteries of Oake ashes only which have wrought quickly and powerfully The Capitellum or Lye is thought sufficiently strong if that an Egge will swimme therein without sinking Or Take of the ashes of Bean stalkes three pounds of unquencht lime Argoll of the ashes of Oake wood being all well burnt of each two pounds Let them for two dayes space be infused in a vessell full of Lye made of the ashes of Oake wood and be often stirred up and downe Let this Lye then be put into another vessell having many holes in the bottome thereof covered with strums or straw pipes that the Capitellum flowing through these strait passages may become more cleare Let it be put twice or thrice upon the ashes that so it may the better extract the heate and causticke quality of the ashes Then putting it into a Barbers bason set it over the fire and when it shall begin to grow thicke the fire must be increased and cauteries made of this concreating matter The following cauteries are the best that ever I made tryall of as those that applyed to the arme in the bignesse of a Pease in the space of halfe an houre without paine especially if the part of it selfe be painlesse and free from inflammation eate into the skinne and flesh even to the bone and make an ulcer of the bignesse of ones fingers end and they leave an eschar so moyst and humide that within foure or five dayes space it will fall away of it selfe without any scarification I have thought good to call these cauteries Silken or Velvet ones not onely for that they are like Silke gentle and without paine but chiefly because I obtained the description of them of a certaine Chymist who kept it as a great secret for some Velvet and much entreaty Their description is this Take of the ashes of Beane stalkes of the ashes of Oake wood well burnt of each three pounds let them bee infused in a pretty quantity of river water and bee often stirred up and down then adde thereto of unqueneht lime foure pounds which being quencht stirre it now and then together for two daies space that the Capitellum may become the stronger then straine it through a thick strong linnen cloth thus strained put it three or foure times upon the ashes that so it may draw more of the causticke faculties from them then boyle it in a Barbers bason or else an earthen one well leaded upon a good Char-cole fire untill it become thicke But a great part of the secret or art consists in the manner and limit of this boyling for this Capitellum becomming thicke and concreating into salt must not bee kept so long upon the fire untill all the moysture shall bee vanished and spent by the heate thereof for thus also the force of the foresaid medicines which also consists in a spirituous substance will bee much dissipated and weakened therefore before it be come to extreme drinesse it shall be taken off from the fire to wit when as yet there shall some thicke moysture remaine which may not hinder the cauteries from being made up into a forme The made up cauteries shall bee put up into a glasse most closely luted up or stopped that the ayre may not dissolve them and so they shall be laid up and kept in a dry place Now because the powder of Mercury is neere to cauteries in the effects and faculty thereof which therefore is termed Pulvis Angelicus for the excellency therefore I have thought good to give you the description thereof which is thus â Auripigmenti citrini floris aeris an ⥠ii salis nitri lb iss alumin. rochae lb ii vitrioli rom lb iii. Let them all bee powdred and put into a Retort having a large receiver well luted put thereto Then set the Retort over a Fornace and let the distillation be made first with a gentle fire then increased by little and little so that the receiver may waxe a little reddish â Argenti vivi lb ss aquae fortis lb i. ponantur in phiala fiat pulvis ut sequitur Take a large earthen pot whereinto put the violl or bolt head wherein the Argentum vivum and Aqua fortis are contained setting it in ashes up to the necke thereof then set the pot over a fornace or upon hot coales so that it may boyle and evapourate away the Aqua fortis neither in the interim will the glasse bee in any danger of breaking when all the water is vanished away which you may know is done when as it leaves smoaking suffer it to become cold then take it forth of the ashes and you shall finde calcined Mercury in the bottome of the colour of red Lead separated from the white yellow or blacke excrement for the white that concretes in the toppe is called Sublimate which if it should remaine with the calcined Mercury would make it more painfull in the operation Wherefore separating this calcined Mercury you shall make it into powder and put it in a brasse vessell upon some coales stirring or turning it with a spatula for the space of an houre
dead Truely the wounds that are made on a living man if he dye of them after his death will appeare red and bloody with the sides or edges swollne or pale round about contrary wise those that are made in a dead man will bee neither red bloody swollne nor puffed up For all the faculties and functions of life in the body doe cease and fall together by death so that thenceforth no spirits nor blood can be sent or flow unto the wounded place Therefore by these signes which shall appeare it may be declared that hee was wounded dead or alive The like question may come in judgement when a man is found hanged whether he were dead or alive Therefore if he were hanged alive the impression or print of the rope will appeare red pale or blacke and the skinne round about it will be contracted or wrinkled by reason of the compression which the cord hath made also often times the head of the aspera arteria is rent and torne and the second spondile and the necke luxated or mooved out of his place Also the armes and legges will be pale by reason of the violent and sodaine suffocation of the spirits moreover there will be a foame about his mouth and a foamie and filthy matter hanging out at his nosethrills being sent thither both by reason that the Lungs are sodainely heated and suffocated as also by the convulsive concussion of the braine like as it were in the falling sicknesse Contrariwise if he be hanged dead none of these signes appeare for neither the print of the rope appeares red or pale but of the same colour as the other parts of the body are because in dead men the blood and spirits doe not flow to the greeved parts Whosoever is found dead in the waters you shall know whether they were throwne into the water alive or dead For all the belly of him that was throwne in alive will be swollen and puffed up by reason of the water that is contained therein certaine clammie excrements come out at his mouth and nosethrills the ends of his fingers will be worne and excoriated because that hee dyed striving and digging or scraping in the sand or bottome of the river seeking somewhat whereon hee might take hold to save himselfe from drowning Contrariwise if he be throwne into the waters being dead before his belly will not be swollne because that in a dead man all the passages and conduites of the body doe fall together and are stopped and closed and for that a dead man breathes not there appeareth no foame nor filthy matter about his mouth and nose and much lesse can the toppes of his fingers be worne and excoriated for when a man is already dead he cannot strive against death But as concerning the bodies of those that are drowned those that swimme on the upper part of the water being swollne or puffed up they are not so by reason of the water that is contained in the belly but by reason of a certaine vapour into which a great portion of the humors of the body are converted by the efficacy of the putryfying heate Therefore this swelling appeareth not in all men which doe perish or else are cast out dead into the waters but onely in them which are corrupted with the filthinesse or muddinesse of the water long time after they were drowned and are cast on the shore But now I will declare the accidents that come to those that are suffocated and stifled or smoothered with the vapour of kindled or burning charcoales and how you may foretell the causes thereof by the history following In the yeere of our Lord God 1575. the tenth day of May I with Robert Greauline Doctor of Physicke was sent for by Master Hamell an advocate of the Court of Parlament of Paris to see and shew my opinion on two of his servants of whom the one was his Clarke and the other his Horse-keeper All his family supposed them dead because they could not perceive or feele their Arteries to beate all the extreame parts of their bodyes were cold they could neither speake nor move their faces were pale and wanne neither could they bee raised up with any violent beating or plucking by the haire Therefore all men accounted them dead and the question was onely of what kind of death they dyed for their master suspected that some body had strangled them others thought that each of them had stopped one anothers winde with their hands and others judged that they were taken with a sodaine apoplexie But I presently enquired whether there had beene any fire made with Coales in the house lately whereunto their master giving care sought about all the corners of the chamber for the chamber was very little and close and at last found an earthen panne with charcoale halfe burned which when we once saw we all affirmed with one voyce that it was the cause of all this misfortune and that it was the maligne fume and venemous vapour which had smothered them as it were by stopping the passages of their breath Therefore I put my hand to the regions of their hearts where I might perceive that there was some life remaining by the heat and pulsation that I felt though it were very little wherefore we thought it convenient to augment and encrease it Therefore first of all artificially opened their mouthes which were very fast closed and sticking obstinately together and thereinto both with a spoone and also with a silver pipe we put aqua vitae often distilled with dissolved hiera and treacle when we had injected these medicines often into their mouthes they began to moove and to stretch themselves and to cast up and expell many viscous excrementall and filthy humors at their mouth and nostrells and their Lungs seemed to be hot as it were in their throates Therefore then we gave them vomitories of a great quantity of Oxymel and beate them often violently on the last spondill of the backe and first of the loynes both with the hand and knee for unto this place the orifice of the stomacke is turned that by the power of the vomitory medicine and concussion of the stomacke they might be constrained to vomit Neither did our purpose faile us for presently they voided clammie yellow and spumous fleame and blood But wee not being content with all this blowed up into their nostrells out of a Goose quill the powder of Euphorbium that the expulsive faculty of the braine might be stirred up to the expulsion of that which oppressed it therefore presently the braine being shaken or mooved with sneesing and instimulated thereunto by rubbing the chymicall oyle of mints on the pallate and on the cheekes they expelled much viscous and clammie matter at their nostrells Then we used frictions of their armes legges and backe-bones and ministered sharpe glisters by whose efficacie the belly being abundantly loosened they beganne presently to speake and to take things that were
the backe of his left hand the bignesse almost of foure fingers with the cutting of the Veines Arteries Nerves and part of the bones of that part whence it is that he will be lame of that hand howsoever carefully and diligently healed Now because by hurting the spinall marrow men become lame sometimes of a legge it is fit you know that the spinall marrow descends from the braine like a rivelet for the distribution of the Nerves who might distribute sense and motion to all the parts under the head wherefore if by hurting the spinall marrow the patients armes or hands are resolved or numme or wholy without sense it is a signe these Nerves are hurt which come forth of the fifth sixth seaventh vertebrae of the necke But if the same accidents happen to the thigh legge or foote with refrigeration so that the excrements flow unvoluntarily without the patients knowledge or else are totally supprest it is a signe that the âinewes which proceed from the vertebrae of the loynes and holy-bone are hurt or in fault so that the animall faculty bestowing sense and motion upon the whole body and the benefit of opening and shutting to the sphincter muscle of the bladder and fundament cannot shew its self in these parts by which meanes suddaine death happens especially if there be difficulty of breathing therewith Being to make report of a child killed with the mother have a care that you make a discreete report whether the childe were perfect in all the parts and members thereof that the judge may equally punish the author thereof For he meriteth farre greater punishment who hath killed a child perfectly shaped and made in all the members that is he which hath killed a live childe than he which hath killed an Embryon that is a certaine concretion of the spermaticke body For Moses punisheth the former with death as that he should give life for life but the other with a pecuniary mulcte But I judge it fit to ex emplifie this report by a president I A. P. by the Iudges command visited Mistris Margaret Vlmary whom I found sicke in bed having a strong feaver upon her with a convulsion and effluxe of blood out of her wombe by reason of a wound in her lower belly below her navill on the right side penetrating into the capacity of her belly and the wombe therein whence it hath come to passe that she was delivered before her time of a male childe perfect in all his members but dead being killed by the same wound piercing through his scull into the marrow of the braine Which in a short time will be the death of the mother also In testimony whereof I have put my hand and seale The manner how to Embalme the dead I Had determined to finish this my tedious worke with the precedent treatise of Reports but a better thought came in my head which was to bring man whose cure I had undertaken from his infancie to his end and even to his grave so that nothing might be heere defective which the Chirurgion might by his profession performe about mans body either alive or dead Verily there hath scarse ever beene a nation so barbarous which hath not onely beene carefull for the buriall but also for the Embalming or preserving of their dead bodyes For the very Scythians who have seemed to exceede other nations in barbarousnesse and inhumanity have done this for according to Herodotus the Scythians bury not the corpes of their King before that being embowelled and stuffed full of beaten Cypresse frankincense the seedes of Persly and Annise hee be also wrapped in cearcloathes The like care hath also possessed the mindes of the Ethiopians for having disburdened the corpes of their friends of their entrails and flesh they plaistered them over and then having thus rough cast them they painted them with colours so to expressâ the dead to the life they inclosed them thus adorned in a hollow pillar of glasse that thus inclosed they might be seene and yet not anoy the spectators with their smell Then were they kept the space of a yeere in the hands of their next kindred who during this space offered and sacrifized to them The yeare ended they carryed them forth of the Citty and placed them about the walls each in his proper vault as Herodotus affirmes But this pious care of the dead did farre otherwise affect the Aegyptians than it did other nations For they were so studious to preserve the memory of their ancestors that they embalmed their whole body with aromaticke oyntments and set them in translucent Vânes or glasse Colls in the more eminent and honoured part of their houses that so they might have them dayly in their sight and might be as monuments and inciters to stirre them up to imitate their fathers and Grandâires vertues Besides also the bodyes thus embalmed with aromatick balsamick oyntments were in steed of a most sure pawn so that if any Aegyptian had neede of a great sum of money they might easily procure it of such as knew them their neighbours by pawning the bodye of some of their dead parents For by this meanes the creditour was certaine that he which pawned it would sooner loose his life than break his promise But if all things so unhappily succeded with any so that through poverty he could not fetch home his pawne againe but was forceâ to forgoe it he was so infamous amongst all men during the rest of the life as one banished or forlorne and loosing his freedome he shall become a servant yea scorned and reviled of all men he should be accounted unworthy to enjoy the light and society of men And certainely the Aegyptians understanding the life which we heere lead to be of short continuance comparison being made with that which wee are to live after the separation of the soule from the body they were more negligent in building their houses they dwelt in but in raring the pyramides which should serve them in steed of sepulchers they were so beyond reason sumptuous and magnificent that for the building of one of these edifices so renowned over all the world which King Cheopes begun a hundred thousand men were every 3 moneths for twenty yeeres space there kept at worke it was five furlongs and being square each side was 800. foot long and so much in height Almost all the peeces of marble went to the building thereof were thirty foote long engraven and carved with various workemanship as Herodotus reports But before the bodyes were committed to these magnificent Sepulchers they were carryed to the Salters and Embalmers who for that purpose had allowance out of the publicke stocke These besmeared them with Aromaticke and balsamicke oyntments and sowed up the incisions they made then strewed them over with salt and then covered them with brine for 70. dayes which being expired they washed them being taken thence and all the filth being taken off they
persons 17. Wherefore some are hereditary 886. supernaturall 989. Monstrous accidents in them 996 Dislocations their kinds and manner 593. their differences 594. Causes ib. Signes 595. Prognosticks 595. The generall cure 564. 597. Symptomes that may be fall a dislocated member 634 Dislocation of the jaw 600. The cure ibid. 601. Of the Collar-bone 601. Of the spine 602. Of the head 603. Of the necke 603. Of the Rumpe 607. Of the Ribs ibid. Of the shoulder 608. Of the Elbow 619. Of the Styliformis processus 621. Of the wrest 622. Of the After-wrest 623. Of the Fingers ibid. Of the thigh or hip ibid. Of the whirlebone 630. Of the knee forwards 631. Of the greater and lesse Focile 631. 632. Of the heele 632. Of the Pasterne or Anckle bone 633. Of the instep and backe of the foote 633. Of the toes 634 Dismembring see Amputation Distemperature and the diver sity thereof 41 Distillation and the kinds thereof 1093. Fornaces the vessells therefore 1094. What to be considered therein 1095. How to prepare the materialls therefore 1098 How to distill waters 1099. How aqua vita 1100. How to rectifie them 1101. To distill in the Sun ibid. By filtring 1102. Of Oyles 1103. Of Spirits 1105. Of Oyles out of Gummes 1107. Of Oyle of Vitrioll 1108 Docillity of Beasts 69 Dogs their love to their masters 61. Their docillitie 69. Why they become mad sooner than other creatures 785. How their bites may be knowne 786. Prognosticks 787. The cure of such as are bitten by them 788 Dorycnium the poysonous quality thereof and the cure 805 Doves free from adultery 62 Draco marinus the Sea Dragon his poysonous puncture the symptomes cure 801 Dracunculus what 315. The cure 316 Dragons their craft 68 Dreames of the sangnine cholericke phlegmaticke and malancholicke persons 17 18. Not to be neglected 36 Dropsie what 299. The differences Symptomes and causes ibid. Signes and prognosticks 300. The cure 301. Following upon a Tumor of the mesentery 930 Dugges their substance magnitude c. 137 What to be done to them to dry up milke 918 Duodemum the magnitude c. 105 Dura mater what 164. The hurts thereof by Trepanning and how helped 373. Remedies for the inflammation and the Apostumation thereof 374. Why it easily endures acride medicines 375 E Eares their parts and composure 189. Their wounds and cure 386. To supply their defects 875. Their ulcers 479. Their stopping and things falling into them how helped 655 Eares of the heart 145 Eare wax for what use it serves 190 Earth a cold and dry element 6 Earthquakes their cause 415 Ecchymosis what and how cured 343 Echo the cause thereof 190 Effects of Phlegme 14. Of choler and melancholy 15 Ejaculatorie vessells in men 121. In women 127 Elbow the dislocation thereof 619. how to restore it dislocated outwardly 619. To the inside 621. Why most subject to anchyliosis ibid. Elements how understood and their principall qualities 6. What those of generation are 7. What these of mixt bodies are ibid. The cause of their transmutation 415 Elephants their strength piety c. 62 63. Where bred and their qualities 1019 Embalming the dead 1130. The manner how 1131 Embrion when it takes that name 893 Embrocation what how performed 1063 Emollient and resolving medicines 275 278 Emplasters what their differences 1058. Signes they are perfectly boyled 1059. Their use 1061. Cautions in their application 269 270 Emplastrum de Vigo cum Mercurio 1060 De gratia Dei ibid. De Betonica sive de Ianua ibid. Oxycrocium 1061. De cerusa ibid. Tripharmacum seââigrum ibid. Diapalma seu Diacalcitheos ibid. Contra Rupturam ib. De Mucilaginibus ibid. De minio ibid. Diachylum magnum ibid. Empyema what 298. The cure thereof 299 Emptinesse 37 Emulgens Arteria 114. Vena 116 Enarthrosis a kind of articulation 242 Enterocele a kind of Rupture 304 Ephemera febris 260. The causes and signes thereef ibid. The cure 262 Epidermis 88 Epidydimis 119 EpigastriuÌ what 87. The containing parts thereof ibid. Epigastrica vena 117 Epiglottis what 195 Epiploon what 101 Epiplois vena 113 Epiplocele 304 Epithemes to strengthen the principall parts 845. Their composition and use 1064 Epomis musculus 216 Epulis what the symptomes and cure 292 Epuloticke or skinning medicines their kinds and use 1045 Errhines their differences discription and use 1068 Erysipelas what 262. What tumors referred thereto 253 The differences thereof 262. Prognosticks 267. Their cure ibid. Erythrois tunica 119 Eschar how to hasten the falling away thereof 856. Medicines causing it 1047 Escharoticks 1047. Why used to spreading Vlcers 401 Estrich betweene a bird and a beast 1014. The sceleton of one 1015 Evacuation and the kinds thereof 37. What to be observed therein 38 Eunnches assimulated to women 27 Excrements of the first second and third concoction what 898 Exercise the use and best time for it 34. The quality thereof 35 Exomphalos or standing forth of the navill 303 Epostosis in Lue venerea 746 Experience without reason of what account 45 Eye-browes 181 Eyelids 181. To stay them being too laxe 641. To open them fastned together 643. To helpe their itching 644 Eyes their site and quicknesse 181. Figure composure c 182. Their muscles coates humors 182 183 184. their wounds 379. to hide the losse or defect of them 669 their ulcers 476. their cure 477. their affects 641 642 c. their inflammation 645 F. FAce a discloser of affections and passions 40. the wounds thereof 378. How to helpe the rednesse thereof 1080 Faculties what 21. their division 22 Falling downe of the Fundament the causes and cure thereof 313 Fat the substance and cause c. thereof 90. 91. Why not generated under the skull 377. How to be distinguished from the Braine ibid. the cure thereof being wounded 398 Fauces what 194 Faulcon her sight with the Herne 70 Faults of conformation must be speedily helped 904. Of the first concoction not helped in the after 707 Feare and the effects thereof 39 Feaver sometimes a symptome otherwhiles a disease Feavers accompanying Phlegmons and their cure 260. Happening upon Erysipelous tumors 165. Vpon Oedematous tumors 275. Vpon Schirrous tumors 284. The cure of bastard intermitting Feavers 286 Feet and their bones 233. Their twofold use 236 Feirce Clare a fish 803 Females of what seede generated 888 Fibra auris what 189 Fibula 231 Figures in Anatomy and first of the forepart of man 86. Of the backparts 87. Of the lower belly and parts thereof 100 102 107 114 122. Of the stomacke 104. Of the vessells of seede and Vrine 118. Of the Bladder and Yard 124. Of the wombe 127. Of some parts in women different from those of men 131. Of the hollow veine 149. Of the Arteries 154. Of the rough Artery or weazon 157. First and and second of the braine 164. Third of the Cerebellum 167. Fourth and fifth of the braine 169. The sixth of the braine 170. Seaventh shewing the
forme and use 1703. Suppression of urine see Urine Surgery what 3. the operations thereof 4. Surgeons what necessary for them 3. their office 4. the choice of such as shall have care of those sick of the plague 830. they must be carefull in making reports 1121 how long in some cases they must suspend their judgements I. 122. they must have a care lest they bring Magistrates into an error 1128. how to report or make certificates in divers cases 1129 Sutures of the skull their number c. 161 wanting in some ib. why not to be trepaned 162. 167. Sutures in wounds their sorts and maner how to be performed 326. 327. Sweating sicknesse 821 Sweet bread 108. Sweet waters 1083 Swine assist their fellowes 67 Symptomes their denfition and division 42 Sympathy and Antipathy of living creatures 73 Symphysis a kinde of articulation 243 Synarcosis Synarthrosis Synchondrosis Syneurosis 243 Synochus putrida its cause and cure 261 T. TAlparia what 272 Tarentula's poysonous bite cure 49 Tarsus what 181 Tastes what their differences 1034. their several denominations natures 1035. Tasting what 22. Teeth their number division use 179 wherein they differ from other bones ib. pain of them how helped 401. their affects 657. how to draw them 659. to cleanse theÌ 660. how to supply their defect 872. to help the pain in breeding them 959 Temporall muscle 188. what ensues the cutting thereof 369 Temperament what the division therof 7 ad pondus ib. ad justitiam 8. of a bone ligament gristle tendon veine artery 9. of ages ib. of humours 11. Temper of the foure seasons of the yeare 10 native temper how changed 18 Temperatures in particular as of the southerne northern c. people 19. 20 Tensores musculi 230. Tentigo 130 Tertian agues or feavers their causes c. 265. their cure 266 Testicles their substance 119. in women 126. their wounds 399 Testudo what 272 Tettars their kinds and causes 264. their cure 265. 1081. occasioned by the Lues venerea 754. their cure ib. Thanacth a strange beast 1021 Thenar musculus 222. 238. Thigh the nerves thereof 226. its proper parts 227. and wounds thereof 399. Thigh-bone the appendices and processes thereof 228. 229. the fracture and cure 577. nigh to the joint 580. its dislocation 623. 720. see Hip. Things naturall 5. not naturall 29. why so called ib. against nature 41 Thorax the chest and parts thereof 135 Thoracica arteria 153 Throat how to get out bones and such like things that sticke therein 655 Throttle and the parts thereof 194 Throwes and their cause 903 Thymus what 156. Tibia 231 Tibiaeus anticus musculus 237. posticus 238. Tinea what 638 Toad his bite and cure 796 Tongue its quantity c. 192. its wounds its cure 385. its impediment contraction and the cure 661. to supply its defects 873. Tonsillae 293. their inflammations and their cure 293. 294 Tooth-ache the causes signes c. 656. Tophi or knots at the joints in some that have the gout how caused 717. in the Lues venerea how helped 746 Torpedo his craft stupefying force 794 Touching how performed 22 Toucha a strange bird 1016 Trapezius musculus 208 Transverfarius musculus 205 Transverse muscles of the Epigastrium 99 Treacle how usefull in the gout 706. how it dulls the force of simple poysons 783 Trepan when to be applied 342. their description 365. where to be applyed 369 Trepaning why used 364. how performed ib. a caution in performance thereof 366 Triangulus musculus 207 Triton 1001. Trochanter 229 Trusses their forme and use 306. 307. Tumors their differences 249. their generall causes signes 250. generall cure 252. which hardest to be cured ib. the four principall 253. flatulent watrish their signs and cure 269. 270. of the gums 292. of the almonds of the throat 293. of the navell 303. of the groine and cods 304. of the knees 314 Turtles 62 Tympanites sââ Dropsie V. VAlves of the heart their action site c. 146. Varicous bodies 120 Varices what their causes signes and cure 483. Vâ⦠breve seu venosum 113 Vsa ejaculatoria 121. Vasti musculi 232 Veine what 97. Gate veine its distribution 112. descendent hollow veine its distribution ascendent hollow veine its distribution 116 they are more than arteries 155. those of the eies 184. which to bee opened in the inflammation of the eies 186. the cephalick 210. median ib. distribution of the subclavian vein ib. of the axilary 211. of the crurall 224 Venae porta 112. cava 216. arteriosa 147. phreâicae coronales azygos intercostalis mammariae cervicalis musculosa 148. axillaris humeralis jugularis interna externa 149. recta pupis 152. cephalica humeraria mediana 210. salvatella plenica 211. sapheia vel saphena ischiadica 224. muscula poplitea suralis ischiadica major 225 Venery its discommodities in wounds of the head 359 Venemous bites and stings how to be cured 783 Venome of a mad dog outwardly applied causeth madnesse 787 Ventoses their form and use 694. 695 Ventricle see stomacke Ventricles of the brain 166 Verdegreace its poysonous quality and cure 810 Vertebrae their processes 196. of the neck ib. of the holy-hone 198. how different from those of the loins 205. Tenth of the back how the middle of the spine 206 their dislocation See Spine Vertigo its causes signes 639. the cure 640 Vessels for distillation 1094. 1096. 1097 c. Vesicatories why better than cauteries in cure of a pestilent bubo 854. whereof made 1046. their description and use 1067. Viper see Adder Virginity the signes thereof 1128 Vitall parts which 84. their division ibid. Vitreus humor 184 Viver or as some terme it the Weaver a fish his poysonous pricke the cure 801 âcers conjoined with tumors how cured 265. inâ⦠at bodies not easily cured 417. their nature ââ¦uses c. 466. 467. signes prognosticks 468 their generall cure 470. signes of a distempered one the cure 471. a painefull one the cure 472. with proud flesh in them ib. putrid and breeding wormes 473. a sordid one ibib a maligne virulent and eating one 474. advertisements concerning the time of dressing ulcers 475. how to bind them up 476. such as run are good in time of the plague 828. Ulcers in particular first of the eyes 476. of the nose 477. of the mouth 478. of the eares 479. of the winde-pipe weazon stomack guts 480. of the kidneis bladder 481. of the wombe 482. that happen upon the fracture of the leg rump and heele 586 how to prevent them 587. they must be seldome drest when the callus is breeding 589 Umbilicall vessels how many what 892 Unction to bee used in the Lues venerea 731. their use 732. cautions in their use ib. and the inconveniences following the immoderat use 734 Ungula or the web on the eye the causes prognostickes and cure 647 Unguentum adstringens 1056 nutritum ib. aureum ib.
basilicum sive tetrapharmacum ib. diapompholigos 1057. desiccativum rub ib. enulatum ib. Album Rhasis ib. Altheae ib. populeon ib. apostolorum ib. comitissae ib. pro stomacho 1058. ad morsus rabiosos ãâ¦ã ibid. Unicorn if any such beast what the name imports 813. what the ordinary horns are 814. not effectual against poyson ib. effectuall onely to dry ib. in what cases good 815 Voices whence so various 194 Vomits their force 38. their descriptions 277 Vomiting why it happens in the Collick 106. the fittest time therfore 705. to make it easie ib. Voyages and other employments wherein the Author was present of Thurin 1142. of Marolle low Britany 1144. of Perpignan 1145. of Landresie Bologne 1146. of Germany 1147. of Danvilliers 1148. of Castle of Compt 1149. of Mets 1150. of Hedin 1155. Battell of S. Quintin 1164. Voyage of Amiens of Harbour of Grace 1165. to Roven ib. battell of Dreux 1166 of Moncontour 1167. voyage of Flanders 1168. of Burges 1172. battell of S. Denis 1172. voyage of Bayon 1173 Uraclius 134. Ureters their substance c. 123 Urine sâopt by dislocation of the thigh-bone 626 suppression thereof how deadly 666. how it happens by internall causes 683. by externall 684 prognosticks ib. things unprofitable in the whole body purged thereby 683. bloody the differences and causes thereof 685. the cure 687. scalding therof how helped 740. a receptacle for such as cannot keepe it 877. Urines of such as have the plague somtimes like those that are in health 832 Utelif a strange fish 69. Uvea tunica 183 Vulnerary potions their use 752. the names of the simples whereof they are composed 753. their form and when chiefly to bee used ib. Uvula the site use therof 193. the inflaÌmation and relaxation thereof 294. the cure 295. W. WAlnut tree and the malignity therof 808 Warts of the neck of the womb 955. their cure 956. Washes to be beautifie the skin 1079 Wasps their stinging how helped 789 Watching and the discommodities thereof 37 Water its qualities 6. best in time of plague 824 Waters how to bââdistilled 1099. Watrish tumors their signes and cure 269. 270 Weapons of the Antients compared with those of the moderne times 407 Weazon the substance c. therof 156. how to be opened in extreme diseases 294. the wounds therof 387. the ulcers thereof 480 Weaknesse two causes thereof 250 Web on the eye which curable which not 647 the cure ibid. Wedge bone 172 Weights and measures with their notes 1049 Wens their causes and cure 272. 273. how to distinguish them in the breast from a Cancer 273 Whale why reckoned among monsters 1012. they bring forth young suckle them ib. how caught ibid. Whale-bone 1013 Whirle-bone the fracture thereof and cure 582 the dislocation thereof 630 White lime 100 Whites the reason of the name differences c. 952. causes 953. their cure 954 Whitlowes 314 Wine which not good in the Gout 708 Winds their tempers and qualities 20. 30 Winter and the temper thereof 10. how it encreaseth the native heat 11 Wisedome the daughter of memorie and experience 898 Witches hurtby the Devils assistance 989 Wolves their deceits and ambushes 66 Wombe the substance magnitude c. thereof 128. 129. the coats thereof 132. signes of the wounds thereof 347. ulcers therof their cure 482. when it hath received the seed it is shut up 891. the falling downe thereof how caused 906 it is not distinguished into cells 924. a scirrhus thereof 930. signes of the distemper thereof 933 which meet for conception ib. of the falling down pervertion or turning thereof 934. the cure therof 935. it must be cut away when it is putrefyed 936. the strangulation or suffocation therof 939. see Strangulation Women their nature 27. how to know whether they have conceived 890. their travell in child-birth and the cause thereof 899. what must bee done to them presently after their deliverance 917. bearing many children at a birth 970. 971 Wonderfull net 172 Wondrous originall of some creatures 1000. nature of some marine things ibid. Wormes in the teeth their causes and how killed 658. bred in the head 762. cast forth by urine 765. how generated and their differences ibid. of monstrous length 766. signes ib. the cure 7â7 Wounds may be cured only with liââ water 52 Wounds termed great in three respects 323 112. Wounds poysoned how cured â80 Wounds of the head at Paris and of the leg at Avignon why hard to bee cured 4â7 Wounds what the divers appellation and divison of them 321. their causes signes 322. prognostickes 323. small ones sometimes mortall 324 their cure in generall ibid. to stay their bleeding 328. to helpe paine 329. why some die of small ones and others recover of great 351. whether better to cure in children or in old people 352 Wounds of the head see Fractures Of the musculous skinne thereof 360. their cure 361. of the face 378. of the eye-browes ib. of the eyes 379 of the cheeke 382. of the nose 384. of the tongue 385. of the eares 386. of the necke and throat ibid. of the weazon and Gullet 387. of the chest 388. of the heart lungs and midriffe ibid. of the spine 389. what wounds of the lungs cureable 392. of the Epigastrium or lower belly 396. their cure 397. of the Kall and fat 398. of the groines yard and testicles 399. of the thighes and legges ibid. of the nerves and nervous parts ibid. of the joints 403. of the ligaments 404 Wounds contused must be brought to suppuration 417 Wounds made by gun-shot are not burnt neither must they be cauterized 408. they may be dressed with suppuratives 410. why hard to cure ibid. why they looke blacke 413. they have no Eschar ibid. why so deadly 415. in what bodies not easily cured 417. their division 418. signes ibid. how to be drest at the first 419. 423. how the second time 424. they all are contused 432 Wounds made by arrowes how different from those made by gunshot 438 Wrest and the bones thereof 218. the dislocation thereof and the cure 622 Y YArd and the parts thereof 125. the wound thereof 399. to helpe the cord thereof 663 the maligne ulcers thereof 737. to supply the defect thereof for making water 877 Yew tree his malignity 807 Z ZIrbus the Kall the substance c. thereof 101 FINIS * In his Epistle prefixed before the Latine edition of this author * Vide Aul. Gel. l. 20. c. 4. * Gal. de simp l. 6. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Genes 1. Ecclesiast 38. 1. plin l. 7 c. 2. In what esteeme Phisitions have formerly beene Names given to Plants Phisicke is devided into 3 parts The excellency of Chirurgery The definition of Chirurgerie What necessary for a Chirurgion The nature of a Chirurgion Experience more necessary for a Chirurgion thau Art Examples of taking away that which is superfluous * Two tunicles of the eyes Examples of replacing Example of separating
of the cavities or fissures of thâ Throttle What the necke is What to be considered in the vertebrae of the necke Which be the right processes of the vertebrae Which the transverse Which the transverse The connexions of the vertebrae of the necke The processe called the tooth By what articulation the head is bended backwards and forewards The Vertebrae of the Holy bone The manifold uses of the backebone What a Ligament is Why it is without sense What parts may be called Ligaments in a generall signification The differences of Ligaments properly so called Their number Which may be truly called the proper muscle of the necke The two motions of the head The Transversaâ⦠The Spinatus The Lâ⦠The Scalenus In what the Vertebrae of the necke and loines agree and disagree How the tenth Vertebrae of the backe may be said to be the middle of the spine The number of the muscles of the Chest The muscles dilating the Chest The muscles contracting the Chest The Subclavius is the first of the muscles dilating the chest Serratuâ major Serratus posterior and superior The oblique ascendent of the lower belly The eleaven Intercostales externi 6. Intercartilaginei The Sacro-lumbus the first of those which contract the chest The oblique descendent the right and transverse of the Epigastrium Triangulus musculâs Intercostalcâ incerni Intercartilaginei interni Muscles alwayes receive their nerves in their heads The midriffe The muscles of the loines They are three pairâ⦠Trianguluâ Semispinatu Sacer The description of the blade-bone or shoulder-blade The basis of the bladâ The head of the shoulder-blade The spine of the blade The processes Acromion and Coracoides The muscles of the shoulder blade Rhomboides Levator Trapezius Latissimus Pectoralis What is meant by the hand in generaâl The differences of the hand from the site thereof Why the hand is devided into so many fingers Why the nailes are added to the soft flesh of the fingers Why the nailes grow continunally The Cephalicke vaine The median veine Howby opening the median veine you may draw more or lesse bloud from the head or liver The axillary is devided into The deepe axillary and outward axillary The Selvatella and Splenitica An Aontomicall Axiome The 7 paire of nerves of the necke The first paire The second paire The third paire The fourth paire The fift paire The sixt paire The seventh paire The 12. pairâ of Nerves of the Chest The first paiââ The second paire The otheâ paires The Nerves vvhich are carryed to thâ Armes The greatnesse and figure The Appendix of the Arme. The processes of the Arme The figure of the Arme. The originall and insertion of the pectorall muscle The Deltoides The Epomis or Scapularis What is ment by the Cubit What the Olecranum is The 2 bones of the Cubit The two Appendices of the wande The figure and fite of the wande The 2 Appendices of the bone of the Cubit The figure of the Cubit bone or Ell. The muscles moving the Cubite The Biceps or ãâã headed muscle The Brachiaus The Longus The Brevis What the Hand properly so called is What the Annulus oâ Ring is The bones of the Aftervvrest The bones of the fingers When at the mailes are generated The ossa Sesamoid or Seed-bones Their use The museles of the Cubite The Supinatores The Carpitensores The Digitum-tensores The Obliquator externus The first of the Supinatores The second The upper of the Carpitensores The lower The greater of the Digitumtensores The lesser The Obliquator or Abductor externus The muscles of the inner part of the Cubit The Palmaris The Pronatores The Carpiflexores The Digitum-flexores The Sublimis Digitumflexor The profundus Digitum-flexor The number of the muscles of the inside of the hand The Thenar The Hypothenar The externall Abductor of the thumbe The Lumbrici The Interosses The number of the muscles of the whole taken in generall The diverse acception of the Legge The thigh The legge or shanke The foote The division of the foote The Instep The top of the foote The toes The beginning of the Crurall veine The two branches thereof By what veines the matter causing those tumors called Bubones flows downe Where and in what diseases the Sapheia must be opened To what places and by how manifold devisions the internall branch of the crurall veine goes Ischiadica Vena Muscâla ãâã Poplitea ãâã Suralis venaâ Ischiadica maior muscula The five conjugations of the nerves of the loines Where the testicles have their nerves The conjugations of the nerves proceeding through the holybone An Anatomis call axiome Of how many bones the Ossa Ilium consist What the Os Ilium strictly taken is What theline lippe brow and rib of the Os Ilium are The Os Ischium or huckle-bone The Os pubis or share-bone The descript of the thigh-bone The two appendices of the thigh-bone The two processes of the thigh-bone make the two Trochanters Whence the marrow becomes partaker of sense Their number The two flexores The three Tensores Three Intromoventes The movers of the buttocks The two Obturatores What the Paiella or whirle bone of the knee is The use thereof What and how many bones the legge hath The legge-bone What Diaphysis is The Perone fibula or shinne-bone Their number The Longus The Membranosus The Rectus The two Vasti The Crurcus The three Internall The Biceps or two-headed muscle The Popliteus or ham muscle Their number The bones of the Instep The Astragalus it s three connexions and their use It s three processes The description of the Calcaneum or Câ⦠Why a fracture of the heele is so dangerous Hippocrates Sect. 3. lib. de fracturis The Os Scaphoidos or boate-like-bone The Os Cuboides or Die-bone The Ossa innominata or namelesse bones The bones of the foote or Pedium The bones of the toes The Seed-bones of the foote The twofold use of the feete Their number Musculus Peronaus Tibiaeus anticus The Toestretcher is two-fold The 6 hinde muscles The 2 Gemeli or Twins muscles Yn what place the kibes breed The Plantaris The Soleus The Tibiaeus Posticus The Digitum-flexor two-fold Their number The Abductor of the Toes or Pediosus The Flexor superior The muscle equivalent to the Thenar The 4 Lumbrics The descripââon of the upper and loâ⦠Interosses The bones of the face 15. The teeth 32. The bone Hyoides The bones of the spine 34. 2 Coller-bones The Ribs 24. The bones of the Sternon 3. The bones of the whole arme 62. The bones of the whole leg 66. What the Sceletos is The bones are composed two manner of wayes 2 Sorts of Articulation What Diarthosis and Synarthrosis are 3. Sorts of Diarthrosis What Enarthrosis is What Arthrodia What Cephale is What Corone is What Cotyle is What Glene is What Ginglymos 3 Kinds of Synarthrosis What a Suture is What Gomphosis is What Harmonia is What Symphyasis is Synchondrosis Syneurosis The things signified by word Nerve Synsarcosis The â8 of the Laââ¦x
drest Hipp. sent 43. sect 1. de fract Meats fit for generating a Callus Lib. 6. meth cap. ãâã Why the marrow may seeme to have sense of feeling In what space the legge is usually knit Discussing and unctuous medicines hinder the generation of a Callus What helps forward the generation thereof What Callus must not be broken though distorte or otherwise ill conformed The causes of too slender a Callus Remedies therefore When we must desist from fomenting and frictions Warme water The effects thereof Notes of short just and too long fomenting Fomentations hurt plethorick bodies Why the fractured bones of the foot must be kept in a strait posturâ What a Luxation properly so called is What a Luxation not properly so called is The third kind of Dislocation The fourth What Luxations are simple What compound What a complete Luxation is What a subluxation or straine Internall causes of dislocations Externall causes Hereditary causes Sect 3. sent 88. 94 sect 82. 4. sent 3. 4. lib. de art Children may have impostumes in their mothers wombs The common signe of all dislocations Signes of an unperfect dislocation What luxations be uncureable Why those bones which are hardly dislocated are hard to be set Sect. 1. de artiâ sent 29. Celsus lib. 8. cap. 11. Why the plucking of an appendâx from a bone is uncureable Hipp. sent 88. sect 3. de art Sent. 10 sect 5. lib. 6. epid sect 3. de art sent 88. You must not endevour to set an inflamed joynt Five intentions in curing dislocations The benefit of holding the member in dislocations The use of intension The manner of setting it or putting it into its place Signes that the bone is set The benefit of sit placing the member The manner of binding up the set joynt The cure of inveterate âuxations These ligatures are not for deligation but extension The causes Differences Signes that only one part is dislocated Signes that both sides are dislocated Prognosticks Why death quickely ensues upon the dislocation of both sides of the jaw An astringent medicine The first maner of setting a jaw-bone Another Dict. What the Surgeon What the Patient ought to do Signes that the Jaw is dislocated backwards The Cure Differences of the luxated Collar-bones The Cure Com. ad sent 62. sect 1. de art An anatomicall description of the Spine The variety of the processes of the Spine Gal. cap. 7. lib. 13. de usu partium Lib. 13. de usu partium The connexion of the head with the first Rack-bone of the neck Prognostiâ The danger hereof Signeâ⦠symptoâ⦠their ãâ¦ã tion The Cure Signes of their restitution Differences and signes Causes The danger of a vertebra dislocated inwards Hipp. sent 51. sect 3. de art Gal. in com The cure Another maner of cure How to keep the restored vertebrae in their places Cyphosis Lordosis Scoliosis Com. ad sent 2. sect 3. lib. ãâã art Seisis The separation of the spinall marrow from the encompassing vertebrae The error of Nurses in binding and lacing of Children Hipp. sent 6. sect 3. de art Why when the spine is luxated the parts belonging to the chest are nourished and grow the lesse Why the Luxation of one vertebra is more dangerous than of many Sent. 51. sect 3. lib. de art The signeâ⦠The Câre Causeâ Signes Cure Gal. Com. ad sent 3. sect 1. de art Why there is no internall ligament from the arme-bone to the shoulder blade Differences of a luxated shoulder Sent. 1. sect 1. lib. de art Signes of the shoulder dislocated downe-wards The waies to restore it Gal. com ad sent 23. sect 1. de art A perfect setting the luxated shoulder by extension only Hipp. sent 12. sect 1. de art Sect. 1. lib. 1. de ãâã sent 19. The description of the Glossoâomium termed Amâi Sect. 1. de art sent 21. Hip. sent 64. 4. de artiâ How to make use of the Ambi. Com. ad sen ãâã 23. sect 1 de articulis Signes Cure Sent. 23. sect 1. de art Signes The cure What to bee done to hold in the shoulder after it is restored Signes Cure The Author seems not to agree with Hipp. Sent. ult Sect. 3. fract and Celsus in the setting down the kinds of a dislocated Elbow The Author doth not agree with Hippocrates and Celsus in setting downe the notes of these dislocations for those notes which are here attributed to an outward and inward luxation these Celsus hath given to an elbow dislocated towards the fore and out part and those which are here attributed to the elbow dislocated upwards down-wards those Celsus hath attribured to a dislocation to the out and in-sides Inflamation hinders reposition Signe Cure A Caution The cure Sent. 63. sect 3. defract Why the elbow is most subject to Ancylosis Differences and causes Cure Sent. 1. sect 2. sent ult sect 3. de fract Here as before chap. 31 the Author dissents from Celsus and Hippocrates in expressing the names and signes of these dislocations Signe Cure Celsus lib. ãâã Cap. 18. Why the dislocated fingers may be easily restored Hip. sent 68. sect 3. de art Gal. com ad sent 47. sect 4. de art A subluxation may befall the Thigh from an internall cause Why the thigh-bone dislocated is difficultly restored or restored easily falls out againe The breaking and relaxation of the internall ligament Gal. com ad sent 42 sect 4. de art Hippocrates explained sect 1. ãâã lib. de art Ad sent 51. sect 3. de art Signes of the thigh-bone dislocated out-wards Paul Aeg. lib. 6. cap. 8. Hip. sent 91. sect 3. lib. de artic Stopping of urine by reason of an internall dislocation of the thigh-bone Signes The generall cure Sect. 2. lib. de fract Sect. 2. lib. de fract How to make extension and counter-extension in this kind of fracture Ligatures made for extension must be fastened neere the part to be extended A generall precept Sect. 2. lib. de fract When it is that onely extension serves for the restoring the dislocated thigh The differences The cure The differences Adâ⦠sect 3. de fract How to restore a knee dislocated backwards The cure The joyning of the leg and shin ãâã The cure Differences and signes Causes and differences The cure Why bloud-letting necessary in the fracture of a heele Hip. sect 3. de fracturis Why the heele is subject to inflammation Gal. ad sent 2â sec 2. ãâ¦ã fract Sigâes Cure Cure Sent. 14. sect 2. lib. de fract The differences Cure Remedies for a confusion What may happen by paine Remedies for the leanenesse or Atrophia of any member What measure to be used in fomenting A dropax Binding of the sound part opposite to the emaciated How to bind up the emaciated part Signes that an Atrophia is cureable Gal. c. 2. lib. 1. de comp med securlocos The cause What Alopecia uncurable What curable and how Lib. 1. de comp med sect locos Cap. 8. lib. citati The cure For a scaly scall An
childs mouth Milke soon corrupted in a flegmatick stomack The mothers milke is most similiar for the child The disease of the nurse is participated unto the child Gel. lib. 12. ca. 1. The best age of a nurse The best habit of body in a autse Lib. de inf nutr Of what behaviour the nurse must bee Why the nurse must abstaine from copulation What dugs a nurse ought to have What is to bee observed in the milke The laudable consistence of milke Why the milke ought to be very white Why a woman that hath red hair or freckles on her face cannot be a good nurse Why that nurse that hath borne a man childe is to be preferted before another Why she cannot be a good nurse whose childe was born before the time Anger greatly hurteth the nurse The exercise of the arms is best for the nurse How the child should be placed in the cradle Why an arch of wickers must be made over the childes head lying in the cradle Why a squint-eyed nurse causeth the childe to be squint-eyed How children become left-handed Three laudable conditions of pappe How the meale must be prepared to make the pap withall Why the meale wherewith the pap must be made must first be boiled or baked 1. de sanit ãâã A cataplasme to relaxe the childs belly For the fretting of the guts in children For the ulcers of the nipples or teats What moderate crying worketh in the infant What immoderate crying causeth When children must be weaned Why children must not be weaned before their ãâã appeare How children must be weaned What children are strong and found of body An often cause of sudden crookednesse A most certaine sign of the child dead in the wombe When the child is dead in the wombe hee is more heavie than he was before being alive That which is alive will not suffer that which is dead Lib. de tumorib Why the belly of a woman will be more bigge when the child is dead within her than it was before when it was alive The signes of a woman that is weake After what sort the woman in travell must be placed when the child being dead in her wombe must be drawne out How she must be bound How the Chirurgion ought to prepare himselfe and his patient to the drawing out of the child from the wombe How the infant that is dead in the womb must be turned bound and drawne out A caution to avoid strangling of the infant in drawing out the body Why the child must not bee drawn out with his hands forwards A history To diminish the wind wherewith the infant being dead in the wombe swolleth is pufted up that he cannot be gotten out of the wombe How the head of the infant if it remaine in the wombe separated from the body may be drawne out Why the head being alone in the wombe is more difficult to be drawne out Cold an enemy to women in travell What accidents follow the taking of cold in a woman that is delivered of child Secundines must be laid to the region of the wombe whilest they be warme Uugaents for the woman in travell that the region of the belly may not be wtiakled The medicine called Tela Gualterina A powder for the fretting of the guts What must bee done when the groine is torne in child-birth To drive the milke downe-wards By what reason and which way cupping-glasses being fastened on the groine or above the navell do draw the milke out of the breasts Astringent fomentations for the privie parts A distilled liquor for to draw together the dug that are loose and slacke The causes of the difficult child-birth that are in the women that travelleth The pasâions of ââ¦hinââr the ââth The causes of difficult child-birth that are in the infant The externall causes of difficult child-birth Which is an easie birth What causeth easinesse of child-birth What Abortion is What Effluxion is Women are in more paine by reason of the effluxion than at the true birth The causes of Abortion Girding of the belly may cause untimely birth How bathes hot houses cause untimely birth Hip. 53. 37 sect 5. Hipaph 45. se 5. Hip. aph ãâã se 5. Women are in more pain at the untimely birth than at the due time of birth The errour of the first child-birth continues afterwards A plaster staying the infant in the wombe What children are ten or eleven moneths in the wombe A male will bee borne sooner than a female Why it is not sufficient to preserve life in the childe to hold open the mouth and privie parts of the mother so soone as the is dead and the childe alive in her body How the body of the woman that death in travell must be cut open to save the childe How it may bee known whether the infant be ââ¦live of not What superfoetation is A womans wombe is not ãâã into divers cels The reason of superfoetation Lib. de superfoetationâ⦠ãâã the womb ãâã the conception of the seed doth ma ãâã âimes afterwards open Lib. 7. cap. 11. The reason of the name What a mola is Lib. de steril Cap. 7. lib. 4. de usu part How the mola is engendered The signes of a mola enclosed in the wombe By what faculty the wombe moveth How the motion of the mola differeth from the motion of the infant in the wombe The mola doth turne to each side of the wombe as the situation of the body is A history The description of a mola carried seventeene yeeres in the wombe A vaine or unprofitable conception The mola ãâ¦ã the infant in the ãâ¦ã it is fastened unto it There things that provoke the flowers forcibly due also ãâ¦ã or wast the mola The Chirurgion all ãâ¦ã of the mola A history Apostumes of divers kinds in the Mesenterium The accidents that come when the Mesentertum is separated from the bodies adjoyning The dropsie comming of a tumour of the Mesenterium Tom. 1. ãâã 1. c. 1. Lib 6. part morb cap. 7. The Mesenterium is the sinke of the body The Scrophulaes in the Mesenterium A scirrhus of the wombe How the seed is unfertile How the cutting of the veines behind the eares maketh men barren The defaults of the yard The signe of the palsie in the yard Magick bands and enchanted knots The cause why the neck of the wombe is narrow The membrane called Hymen The cause of the fluxe of women Apb 36. sect 5. Gal. lib. 14. de usu par cap. 9. Arist in prob sect de ster quae 3. 4. The signes of a hot wombe The signes of a cold wombe The signes of a moyst wombe The signes of a dry wombe A meet time for conception Arist l. 7. de hist anim c. 2. c. 5. Lib. 7. cap. 14. Lib. 6. cap. 12. Lib. 7. de hist c. nim c. 1. c. 6. lib. 7. cap. 14. What is the falling downe of the wombe The causes ãâ¦ã lib. 7. de histor ãâã cap. ãâã
necke and the eight upper Vertebrae of the chest and then is inserted by his nervous part almost into the whole basis of the blade extending it selfe above the muscles thereof even to the midst of its spine where being fleshy it is inserted even to the Acromion the upper part of the calvicle and in some sort to the upper ribbe This muscle hath a threefold action by reason of its triple originall The first is to draw the shoulder-blade towards its originall that is to the nowle and spine of the necke the other is to draw it towards the backe because of the contraction of the middle or transverse fibers which leade it directly thither and the other is to draw it downewards by reason of the originall it hath from the fifth sixth seventh and eight spine of the Vertebrae of the Chest But we must note that these diverse actions are not performed by this muscle by the assistance of one onely nerve but by more which come into it by the spinall marrow by the holes of the Vertebrae as well of the necke as the chest from whence it takes the originall For the two other which are the common muscles of the blade and arme or shoulder we will describe them with the muscles of the shoulder or arme for one of these which is called the Latissimus that is the broadest ascends from the holy-bone to the shoulder-blade and arme The other named the Pectoralis coms from the Sternon and collar-bone to the shoulder-blade and arme CHAP. XX. The Description of the Hand taken in Generall NOW it befits us to to describe in order the muscles of the arme but first we must know what it is that we call the arme But seeing that cannot fitly be understood unlesse 1. we know what the hand is seeing that the arme is a part of the hand therefore first we must define what a hand is and then devide it into its parts Therefore the hand is taken two manner of wayes that is generally and specially The hand generally taken signifies all that which is contained from the joyning of the arme to the shoulder-blade even to the ends of the fingers But in particular it signifies onely that which is comprehended from the furthest bones of the cubit or the beginning of the wrest to the very fingers ends Therefore the hand in generall is an instrument of instruments made for to take up and hold any thing It is composed of three great parts that is of the Arme Cubite and Hand vulgarly and properly so called but the hand taken thus in particular is againe devided in three other parts the Carpus or Brachiale the Wrest the Metacarpium or Postbrachiale the afterwrest and the fingers all these parts seeing each of them are not only organicall parts but also parts of organicall parts are composed of all or certainely of the most of the simular parts that is of both the skinnes the fleshy pannicle the fat vaines arteries nerves muscles or flesh coats both common and proper bones gristles and ligaments all which we will discribe in their order But first I thinke good to admonish you of the differences of the hand taken from the site thereof and these differences are sixe in number the fore the hinde the internall the externall the upper and lower side or part thereof By the fore we meane that part which lookes directly from the thumbe to the shoulder by the hinde we understand the part opposite to it which from the little finger lookes towards the basis of the shoulder-blade By the inside we signifie that part which lies next to the sides of the body when the hand retaines its naturall site by the outside the part opposite to it The upper and lower side you may know by the very naming thereof The hand properly so called is devided into five fingers that so it may hold and take up bodies of all figures as round triangular square and the like and gather up the leasts bodies with the fingers ends as needles pins and such like Nature hath bestowed two hands upon us that so they may belpe each other each moving to each side But for the taking up and holding of small bodies it was fit that the fingers of their owne nature soft should be armed with nailes that consisting of soft flesh and an hard naile they might serve for all actions for the naile is a stay to the soft flesh which otherwise would turne away in meeting with an hard body the use of the nailes is to scratch shave and pull off the skinne to rend pinch and plucke asunder small bodies They have not bony hardnesse that so they might not breake but bend Yet other creatures have hard nailes to serve them in stead of weapons Their figure is round because fuch a figure is lesse obnoxious to externall injuries and by reason they are subject to wearing they grow continually Nature hath placed flesh on the inner and side part of the fingers so to presse more straitly the things they once take hold of so that by holding them close together we can hold water that it may not runne out The length of the fingers is unequall that when they are opened and stretched forth they make as it were a circular figure for so it comes to passe that the hand can hold all bodies but especially round It remaines that we prosecute the distribution of the veines arteries and sinewes which runne over all the parts of the hand taken in generall and particular whereby wee may more commodiously hereafter handle all the proper parts thereof CHAP. XXI The Distribution of the Subclavian veine and first of the Cephalica or Humeraria TWo large veines descend from the Subclavian the one from the lower side the other from the higher Yet sometimes and most usually both these proceede from the same common orifice as in men of a low statnre in the arme The one of these is called the Axillaris the other the Humeraria or Cephalicke therefore this Cephalicke passing forth of the Subclavian runnes superficially along the foreside betweene the muscle Deltoides and the Tendon of the pectorall muscle and descends in the midst betweene the common coate of the muscles and the fleshy pannicle even to the bending of the cubite where in leane bodies it is plainely to be seene whereas in fat bodies it is hardly to be perceived being as it were buried in abundance of fat This veine having in its descent sent forth some small branches both to the skinne as also to certaine muscles over which it runs is devided into two a little above the outward protuberation of the arme One of the branches into which it is devided descending obliquely to the fore part of the cubite a little below the bending of the cubite it meets and is united with the like branch in the same place as shall be showne hereafter That which arises from this concourse is
generation should be granted to devills long since all places had beene full of them Wherefore if at any time women with childe by the familiarity of the devill seeme to travell we must thinke it happens by those arts we mentioned in the former chapter to wit they use to stuffe up the bodies of living women with old clouts bones pieces of iron thornes twisted haires pieces of wood serpents and a world of such trumpery wholly dissenting from a womans nature who afterwards the time as it were of their delivery drawing nigh through the wombe of her that was falsly judged with child before the blinded and as it were bound up eyes of the by-standing women they give vent to their impostures The following history recorded in the writings of many most credible authors may give credit hereto There was at Constance a faire damosell called Margaret who served a wealthy Citizen she gave it out every where that she was with child by lying with the devill on a certaine night Wherefore the Magistrates thought it fit she should bee kept in prison that it might bee apparent both to them and others what the end of this exploit would bee The time of deliverance approaching shee felt paines like those which women endure in travell at length after many throwes by the midwives helpe in stead of a childe shee brought forth iron nailes pieces of wood of glasse bones stones haires towe and the like things as much different from each other as from the nature of her that brought them forth and which were formerly thrust in by the devill to delude the too credulous mindes of men The Church acknowledgeth that devils by the permission and appointment of God punishing our wickednesse may abuse a certaine shape so to use copulation with mankinde But that a humane birth may thence arise it not onely affirmes to bee false but detests as impious as which beleeves that there was never any man begot without the seed of man our Saviour Christ excepted Now what confusion and perturbation of creatures should possesse this world as Cassianus saith if divells could conceive by copulation with men or if women should prove with childe by accompanying them howmany monsters would the divells have brought forth from the beginning of the world how many prodigies by casting their seed into the wombes of wilde and brute beasts for by the opinion of Philosophers as often as faculty and will concurre the effect must necessarily follow now the Devils never have wanted will to disturbe mankinde and the order of this world for the devill as they say is our enemy from the beginning and as God is the author of order and beauty so the devill by pride contrary to God is the causer of confusion and wickednesse Wherefore if power should accrew equall to his evill minde and nature and his infinite desire of mischiefe and envie who can doubt but a great confusion of all things and species and also great deformity would invade the decent and comely order of this universe monsters arising on every side But seeing that devills are incorporeall what reason can induce us to beleeve that they can be delighted with venereous actions and what will can there be where as there is no delight nor any decay of the species to be feared seeing that by Gods appointment they are immortall so to remaine for ever in punishment so what need they succession of individualls by generation wherefore if they neither will nor can it is a madnesse to thinke that they doe commixe with man CHAP. XVII Of Magicke and supernaturall diseases and remedies THat I may refresh the mind of the Reader invited to these histories of monsters raised up by the art of the divell witches and conjurers his servants I have thought good to add the following histories of certaine diseases and remedies supernaturall and wholly magicall out of Fernelius There are diseases which as they are sent amongst men by God being offended so they cannot expect cure otherwise than from God from whence they are thought supernaturally to have their essence and cure Thus the aire oft-times yet chiefly in the time of King David being defiled with the pestilence killed sixty odde thousand persons Thus Ezechias was strucke with a grievous disease Job was defiled with filthy ulcers by Sathan at Gods command And as the Devill the cruell enemy of mankinde commonly useth by Gods permission to afflict those so wicked persons by the wondrous subtlety of the devill offer violence and doe harme to many Some invoke I know not what spirits and adjure them with herbes exorcismes imprecations incantations charmes others hang about their neckes or otherwise carry certaine writings characters rings images and other such impious stuffe Some use songs sounds or numbers sometimes potions perfumes and smells sometimes gestures and jugling There be some that make the portraiture of the absent party in waxe and boast that they can cause or bring a disease into what soever part thereof they prick by the force of their words and starres into the like part of the party absent and they have no few other trickes to bring diseases We know for certain that magicians witches and conjurers have by charmes so bound some that they could not have to do with their wives and have made others so impotent as if they had bin gelt or made eunuches Neither do wicked men onely send diseases into mans body but also devills themselves These truely are soone distracted with a certain fury but in this one thing they differ from simple madnesse for that they speake things of great difficulty tell things past and hid disclose the secrets of such as are present and revile them many waies and are terrified tremble or grow angry by the power of divine words One not very long agone being by reason of heat exceeding dry in the night time rising out of his sleep and not finding drinke took an apple that he found by chance and eating it he thought his jawes were shut and held fast as by ones hands and that he was almost strangled and also now possessed of a Devill entring into him hee seemed in the darke to bee devoured of a huge exceeding blacke dogge which hee afterwards restored to his former health orderly related to me There were divers who by his pulse heat and the roughnesse of his tongue thought him to be in a feaver and by his watching and the perturbation of his minde thought him onely to rave Another young Noble-man some few yeeres since was troubled at set times with a shaking of the body and as it were a convulsion wherewith one while hee would move onely his left arme another while the right arme and also sometimes but one finger onely somewhiles but one legge sometimes the other and at other times the whole trunk of his body with such force and agility that lying in his bed he could scarce be held by foure men his
head lay without any shaking his tongue and speech was free his understanding sound and all his senses perfect even in the height of his fit He was taken at the least ten times a day well in the spaces between but wearied with labour it might have beene judged a true Epilepsie if the understanding and senses had failed The most judicious Physitians who were called to him judged it a convulsion cosen-germane to the falling sicknesse proceeding from a maligne and venemous vapour impact in the spine of the backe whence a vapour dispersed it selfe over all the nerves which passe from the spine every way into the limbes but not into the braine To remove this which they judged the cause frequent glysters are ordained and strong purges of all sorts cupping glasses are applied to the beginnings of the nerves âomentations unctions emplasters first to discusse then to strengthen and weare away the maligne quality These things doing little good he was sweated with bathes stoves and a decoction of Guajacum which did no more good than the former for that wee were all farre from the knowledge of the true cause of his disease for in the third moneth a certaine Devill was found to be the author of all this ill bewraying himselfe by voice unaccustomed words and sentences as well latine as greeke though the patient were ignorant of the greeke tongue he laied open many secrets of the by-standers but chiefly of the Physitians deriding them for that hee had abused them to the patients great harme because they had brought his body so low by needlesse purgations When his father came to visite him he would cry out long before he came at him or saw him drive away this visitant keep him from comming in here or else pluck his chaine from about his necke for on this as it is the custome of the French order of Knights there hangs the image of St. Michael If holy or divine things were read before him he shooke and trembled more violently When his fit was over hee remembred all that he had done and affirmed that hee did it against his will and that he was sorry for it The devill forced by ceremonies and exorcismes denied that he was damned for any crime and said that he was a spirit being asked who he was and by what meanes and power he did these things he said that hee had many habitations into which hee could betake him selfe and in the time of his rest hee could torment others that he was cast into this body by a certain person whom he would not name and that he entred by his feet up to his necke and that he would go forth againe the same way when as his appointed time was come He spoke of sundry other things as others which are possessed use to doe Now I speake not these things as new or strange but that it may appeare that devills sometimes entring into the body doe somewhiles torment it by divers and uncouth waies other whiles they doe not enter in but either agitate the good humours of the body or draw the ill into the principall parts or with them obstruct the veins or other passages or change the structure of the instruments from which causes innumerable diseases proceed of these Divells are the authors and wretched and forlorne persons the ministers and the reason of these things is beyond the search of nature Pliny tells that the Emperour Nero in his time found magicall arts most vain and false but what need we alledge profane writers when as those things that are recorded in scripture of the pythonisse of the woman speaking in her belly of King Nebuchodonozor of the Magitians of Pharaoh and other such things not a few prove that there both is and hath beene Magicke Pliny tells of Denarcâus that he tasting of the entrailes of a sacrificed childe turned himselfe into a Wolfe We read in Homer that Circes in the long wandering of Ulysses changed his companions into beasts with an inchanted cuppe or potion and in Virgil that the growing corne may bee spoiled or carried away by inchantments which things unlesse they were approved and witnessed by many mens credits the wisedome of Magistrates and Lawyers would not have made so many Lawes against Magitians neither would there have beene a mulct imposed upon their heads by the law of the twelve tables who had enchanted other mens corne But as in magicall arts the devill doth not exhibite things them selves as those which he cannot make but onely certaine shewes or appearances of things so in these which are any wayes accommodated to the use of Physicke the cure is neither certaine nor safe but deceitfull captious and dangerous I have seene the Jaundise over the whole body cured in one night by a written scroule hanged about the neck also I have seene Agues chased away by words and such ceremonies but within a short while after they returned againe and became much worse Now there are some vaine things and verily the fancies of old women which because they have long possessed the minds of men weakened with too much superstition we terme them superstitious These are such as we cannot truely say of them wherefore and whence they have the faculties ascribed to them for they neither arise from the temperament neither from other manifest qualities neither from the whole substance neither from a divine or magicall power from which two last mentioned all medicines beyond nature and which are consequently to be used to diseases whose essence are supernaturall must proceed Such like old wives medicines and superstitious remedies are written figures and characters rings where neither the assistance of God or Spirits is implored Let me aske you is it not a superstitious medicine to heale the falling sickenesse to carry in writing the names of the three Kings Gaspar Melchior and Balthasar who came to worship Christ To help the tooth ache if one whilst Masse is in saying touch his teeth saying these words Os non comminuet is ex co To stay vomiting with certaine ceremonies and words which they absent pronounce thinking it sufficient if that they but onely know the patients name I saw a certaine fellow that with murmuring a few words and touching the part would stanch blood out of what part soever it flowed there be some who to that purpose say this De latere ejus exivit Sanguis Aqua How many prayers or charmes are carried about to cure agues some taking hold of the patients hand say Aequè facilis tibi Febris haec sit atque Mariae virgini Christi partus Another washeth his hands with the patient before the fit saying to himselfe that solemne Psalme Exaltâbo te Deus meus Rex c. If one tell an Asse in his eare that hee is stung by a Scorpion they say that the danger is immediately over As there are many superstitious words so there are many superstitious writings also To helpe